Home

GLD 2014 User Manual

1. ooooccnnccccnoccncocononononanononnncnno 256 Undisturbed ground temperature 104 144 169 233 235 Units 20 21 23 32 37 38 62 84 90 91 106 146 166 169 176 183 193 201 209 210 211 216 217 226 229 230 231 232 244 245 USB dongles ia See Dongle USB KEY 000 acacia See Dongle Utiliti S 2 A Ad 17 32 Utility COStS minun 190 193 196 206 UT TA 25 26 30 88 100 101 108 242 V Vault 241 243 253 254 255 256 257 320 325 326 327 328 330 331 332 Vaults 241 256 257 326 327 330 344 Velocity 241 243 261 262 273 287 292 315 339 342 343 344 Vertical separation oooocooncnnnccconccoo o 136 137 140 Viscosity 101 108 142 148 262 263 W Warning cuina in 70 Water to alr cccccccccnccncccnicicinanananno 38 39 62 63 Water to Water ccccccccoooncccnnnnnonos 38 39 43 62 63 Wet Bulb A 63 Z Zone Files 2er 14 51 53 66 Zone Manager 23 28 50 51 52 53 55 59 62 64 66 68 69 70 72 79 80 81 88 109 134 162 179 192 Zone Reports 34 53 66 178 179 180 Page 359 Index Index of Terms
2. I Borehole Design Project BoreholeSample olez Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 18848 5 18848 5 Peak Unit Inlet F 83 7 49 6 Borehole Length ft 342 7 342 7 Peak Unit Outlet F 93 3 46 1 Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Calculate COOLING HEATING Month x 7 Total Length ft 183848 5 18848 5 Prediction Time 10 0 years Borehole Number 55 55 me Borehole Length ft 342 7 342 7 a a Ground Temperature Change F N A N A CO Fixed Temperature Fixed Length Peak Unit Inlet F 83 7 49 6 inet Tenperatires Peak Unit Outlet F 93 3 46 1 a7 aoe F Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 1330 5 750 0 i Peak Load kBtu Hr 1330 5 750 0 Borehole Length 343 ft Peak Demand kW 89 9 53 9 Heat Pump EER COP 14 7 4 1 Seasonal Heat Pump EER COP 18 7 4 4 Ce Avg Annual Power kWh 4 12E 4 2 90E 4 Borehole Number 55 Rows Across 41 _ System Flow Rate gpm 332 6 187 5 Rows Down 5 Optional Hybrid System Off Separation 20 0 ft Cooling Heating Update Peaks A 0 A 0 Totals aa 0 TE 0 Fig 4 1 Expanded User Interface The Borehole Design module includes several additional features Metric and English unit conversion Printed reports of all input and calculated data Convenient buttons to bring up tables and calculators A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations A Monthly Data button used to calcu
3. Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B Peak Load E Alphabetic Categorized Fig 11 21 Adjust the Relationship between the Two Main Windows Page 272 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Section Three Flow Type Selection At the top right is a drop down menu from which users can select to see the piping design performance results under three flow scenarios peak load equipment installed capacity and purge This can be seen in figure 11 22 Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B Peak Load Fig 11 22 Flow Scenario Selection Remember that the flow rates for each can be entered in the Fluid panel Section Four The Properties Window The fourth section is the Properties Window When a designer selects a piping design component in the Layout Manager Workspace a wide range of details pertaining to the component can be viewed and modified in the Properties Window A Property Window can be seen in figure 11 23 Page 273 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module b Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Peak Load v El GHX Module Supply Return Runout Alphabetic Categorized y STEIN E GHX Header Section 01 a Fittings Pipe 1 U Circuit 02 5 Fittings
4. Prediction Time 15 0 years Fig 4 14 Design Prediction Time in Expanded User Interface Fluid The circulating fluid parameters may be entered in the Fluid panel A sample input screen is shown in figure 4 15 Note that automatic fluid data entry mode is available as an option in this version of GLD Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures The heat pump inlet fluid temperatures are included in the Fluid panel The designer can input the desired inlet source temperatures for both heating and cooling here When changes are made to these values the heat pumps in all zones are updated automatically Since the new calculated equipment capacities can lead to changes in selected equipment the designer must be aware of the changes Customized pump values must be manually adjusted The inlet fluid temperatures also can be viewed and modified in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 9 above Note inlet temperatures can only be modified in fixed temperature mode In fixed length mode the program calculates the inlet temperatures based on the user defined field configuration and borehole depth Design System Flow Rate The system flow rate per installed ton is included on the Fluid panel This is the system flow rate per ton of peak load not installed capacity This is because it is assumed that all units will not be running at full load simultaneously even in the peak load condition The impact of installed capac
5. 5 0 8a m Noon 62 0 36 0 aes Noon 4p m 71 2 15 0 Transfer 4p m 8 p m 8 0 Calculate Hours 8pm 8a m 0 0 8 0 Annual Equivalent Fulload Hours 1012 Fig 5 21 Hybrid Loads Displayed in the Zone Manager Loads Module To use the LoadSplitter control the designer first adjusts one or more sliders to desired percentage s and then hits the Update button Upon doing so the loads in the linked loads module will update automatically as will heat pump performance Note that the modified geothermal loads will remain fixed until the Page 156 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module user makes additional modifications to the sliders and hits the Update button again or hits the Reset button which reverts the loads to their initial pre hybrid state If using the Average Block Load Module with monthly loads data the user has the option of using the graph button in the Hybrid Monthly Load Data window figure 5 20 to graphically review the geothermal hybrid loads balance A sample graphical data set can be seen in figure 5 22 below Hybrid Monthly Loads Profiles o ea wa Graph Data Hybrid Monthly Loads 200 T T T T 500 Y Geo Total Cooling Loads Y Geo Total Heating Loads Y Geo Peak Cooling Loads Y Geo Peak Heating Loads Y Hyb Total Cooling Loads Y Hyb Total Heating Loads a S Y Hyb Peak Cooling Loads Y Hyb Peak Heating Loads F Show Title T Show Legend T
6. 5 8 3 4 3 11 4 VUE 2 2 1p 3 2i 4 5 6 T SAKK K K K K K K EK Fig 11 10 Pipe Sizes Selection Panel List of Available Pipe Sizes This section contains a list of available pipe sizes in the CFD module If there are certain pipe sizes a designer does not wish to use in a design he or she can deselect them The optimization algorithms in the CFD module will only use the selected pipe sizes for designing systems Page 259 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module By selecting pipe sizes of interest and deselecting for example pipe sizes that are unavailable in a particular designer s region or market the designer helps ensures that the system designed by the CFD module actually can be built by a construction team using readily available pipes Fluid All parameters relating to fluid flow rates and fluid properties are listed in the Fluid panel as shown in figure 11 11 In addition this panel contains top level controls for some of the auto design features associated with optimizing systems for appropriate purging fluid velocities EE Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Fluid Information Peak Load Flow Rate gpm 30 00 Installed Capacity Flow Rate gpm 60 00 Purging Flow Rate gpm 90 00 F Minimum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Solution Properties F Atoratic Entry Mode a wade t e ta Fluid Type 11 3 Propylene
7. Index of Terms B Index Index of Terms A Active SOMOS oo ociciccesucesiceeesseecenctesicieceseteseeemncenectuy ss 62 Add circulation pump 246 247 347 348 Add Heat PUMPS cccccecesceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeess 47 Adding Pump Sets ccscccseseeeeeseeeeeeteeetees 15 48 Approach temperature cccccesccesseeeseeeseeeees 174 Auto build ocoooocccocccnncno 92 94 96 97 328 AUTOCAD naaa 91 99 Automatic entry mode oococococccccnoccccnoo 108 148 263 Automatic Estimator Mode 230 233 Automation 243 245 246 250 251 325 328 345 Average Block 13 21 23 24 26 28 50 51 63 64 65 66 68 69 70 72 73 74 75 76 77 81 83 88 109 134 162 177 178 179 192 Average Block Loads Module 23 63 64 65 66 68 70 73 74 76 83 Average Block Loads Pump Selection 69 B Before You Bein ccsccescesssessseeeseessteesees 12 162 Boiler 109 149 199 202 203 204 205 207 211 219 220 222 Bore 24 26 27 28 51 57 100 101 102 104 107 110 112 114 119 134 139 140 141 144 145 200 201 212 213 227 229 230 232 233 236 243 300 301 Borehole depth 106 109 112 114 118 227 230 Borehole Design 23 24 25 26 27 28 31 33 64 67 68 83 85 86 87 88 92 134 142 162 163 171 172 174 180 Boreho
8. Number of Units 4 Fig 3 7 Pump Selection Panel Details Specific details about a given pump may be obtained by clicking the Details button Additionally the details panel is where the designer may vary the loads input temperatures or flows for that particular pump After the user presses the return button variations in the input load temperature will affect the pump parameters listed on the main pump selection area A sample details panel is shown in figure 3 8 mHeat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate Pump Manufacturer Florida Heat Pump ps Pump Series EV Series Pump Type Water to Air Nominal Flow 1600 CFM Inlet Air Temperatures and Flow Rate Load EAT Cooling WB 67 0 degF Heating DB 70 0 degF Flow Rate Cooling 1609 CFM Heating 7699 CFM Fig 3 8 Pump Details Panel Clear Pressing the Clear button clears the current pump in a zone All values are reset to the initial state allowing the user to reselect or enter a pump for the zone Page 61 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Custom Pump Customization If the designer must include a heat pump unit that is not stored in GLD s Heat Pump Database he or she may add customized pumps simply by entering values directly into the boxes on the pump selection section of the zone data window When the user does this and overrides the automatic selection features a check appears next to the Custom Pump label
9. Page 55 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones 2151 x rec Pures cee ie S a Es P BoreholeSample zon Return s A Design Day Loads MBtu Hr Capacity Power COP Zone Pump 8 8 MBtusHr kw EER EV048 EV048 EV048 EVO30 EV048 GEHA 036 o o o in in EV048 EV048 EV048 EVO30 EV048 GEHA 036 ETE TT T e a en OOO OO NOOoOcooO 5 5 5 3 5 D Behe 5 5 8 5 HNohWONnNr HAO KON ALINE ESE E AS AR Y oo ooo ofio oooO exe ee ie eRe Se sais ure aN we ooo oO oon oo Oo o Ch aC BA Tuer ce SEC apelin TA OKO 3000 BHO AANHYAA AL oH AN WO D4 emis Crematory a CNA Q0NFFNN OdaPAXIN o COOLING HEATING Total Unit Capacity MBtu Hr 469 6 464 7 Peak Load MBtu Hr 342 0 243 0 Peak Demand kW 27 3 17 3 Heat Pump EER COP AO 4 2 Peak Load Period Noon 4 p m 8 a m Noon Flow Rate 3 0 gpmiton Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 CEELI Fig 3 3 Zone Manager Summary View Entering Loads Loads can be entered directly in the individual zone data windows back in the Main View of the Loads tabbed panel A sample entry is shown in figure 3 4 The GLD loads input methodology may be new for some designers Consequently an additional and alternative description of the methodology can be found at the end of this chapter Design Day Loads According to the model that GLD uses in the Zone Manager average peak load data for every hour of a twenty four hour day can be included if desired However for
10. Deleting components and nested component families is as easy as creating them To delete an individual component the user merely has to select the component right click and select delete This can be seen in figure 11 59 and figure 11 60 Page 313 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bl E GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 qee GHX Header Section 01 GHX Heade Add New Pipe Pair U Circi Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair GHX Add New Circuit Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 59 Select the Component of Interest Right Click and Choose Delete Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B E S GHX Module Supply Return Runout io U Circuit 01 GHX Header Section 01 GHX Header Section 02 i U Circuit 03 GHX Header Section 03 e U Circuit 04 El GHX Header Section 04 ome U Circuit 05 GHX Header Section 05 bom U Circuit 06 EJ Za GHX Header Section 06 boo U Circuit 07 E GHX Header Section 07 i U Circuit 08 Fig 11 60 Circuit 2 Has Been Deleted From lts Position as a Child of GHX Header Section 1 Page 314 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module To delete an entire nested component family or part of a nested component family the user has to select the highest level
11. Equipment Type Air cooled Chiller Boiler y Power Source Electricity y Natural Gas y Installed Capacity 373 5 kBtu hr 197 7 kBtu hr Efficiency 90 Extra Power 1 kw 1 kw Mech Install Area 300 ft 2 300 ft 2 Water Usage Rate 0 00 gpm ton 0 00 gpm ton Fig 9 7 Conventional Panel Contents Alternate Systems In this section users can scroll through the alternate standard HVAC systems and see the summary of each system s energy and fuel fuel type consumption Users can scroll through and review each system by clicking on the left and right arrows as seen below System pi al gt Please note that if a system has not been defined see below power and fuel type information cannot be displayed In general a user will select a system system 1 for example and then proceed to define the system in the system details section After defining system one the user can choose to define another system by selecting system two and then entering the relevant information for it The user can repeat the procedure for up to five alternate systems Page 209 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module System Details In this section the user can enter details about the system he or she selected system 1 5 in Alternate Systems above Please note that some of the details are locked out For example the equivalent full load hours values cannot be changed by the user Full load hours are entered in the Geo
12. Extra Equivalent Length per Circuit ee Pa ft Fig 6 1 Expanded User Interface The Surface Water Design module includes several additional features Metric and English unit conversion Printed reports of all input and calculated data Convenient buttons to bring up tables and calculators A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations A system to monitor header and branch piping head losses Page 161 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Opening Projects There are two ways to open Surface Water Design projects One is by using the New Surface Water command from the Design Studio File menu and the other is by opening an existing Surface Water Design project gld file Files cannot be opened if other modules with the same name are already open As many files can be opened as the system s memory permits New Projects New projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Surface Water from the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar New projects open with standard parameter values that must be edited for new projects In new projects no loads files zon are loaded The user must create a new loads file or open an existing loads file into one of the loads modules Links may be established using the Studio Link system described in Chapter 3 gt Existing Projects Existing projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing Open from t
13. Fig 4 11 Coordinate List Control Buttons The buttons include the Add Remove Delete All and Review buttons El Add The user can add a new borehole by manually entering the X Y coordinates at the bottom of the coordinate list section and then hitting the Add button The Group input box allows the user to break boreholes up until groups for example the user can group boreholes according to supply return runouts i Subtract The user can select an existing borehole in the coordinate list and hit the Subtract button to delete it from the system Page 96 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module E Clear The user can press the Clear button to delete all of the boreholes El Review The Review button enables the user to see the entire system on one convenient screen Figure 4 12 is an example of a system with six boreholes and two groups x 40 00 y 20 00 Group 2 Fig 4 12 A Six Borehole System The second section in the GridBuilder is Auto Build Options This section has a set of tools that enable a designer to quickly build a range of scalable borefield systems This section is shown in figure 4 13 below Auto Build Options Build Add Pitch Number ft Columns X 3 20 0 Rows Y 2 20 0 Fig 4 13 Auto Build Options Page 97 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module To use the Auto Build Options the user can first optionally select a group number for the set of borehole
14. Flow Rate 3 0 R Unit Inlet F 90 0 40 0 Fig 4 32 Hybrid Loads Displayed in the Average Block Loads Module Notice that the cooling peak loads in May through September have been capped at 605 by the LoadSplitter Design Day Loads Days Week Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses per Week kBtu Hr kBtu Hr 5 0 8a m Noon 62 0 36 0 Noon 4p m 71 2 15 0 Transfer 4p m 8 p m 8 0 Calculate Hours 8p m 8 a m 0 0 8 0 Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours 1012 Fig 4 33 Hybrid Loads Displayed in the Zone Manager Loads Module To use the LoadSplitter control the designer first adjusts one or more sliders to desired percentage s and then hits the Update button Upon doing so the loads in the linked loads module will update automatically as will heat pump performance Note that the modified geothermal loads Page 128 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module will remain fixed until the user makes additional modifications to the sliders and hits the Update button again or hits the Reset button which reverts the loads to their initial pre hybrid state If using the Average Block Load Module with hourly or monthly loads data the user has the option of using the graph button in the Hybrid Monthly Load Data window figure 4 32 to graphically review the geothermal hybrid loads balance A sample graphical data set can be seen in figure 4 34 below S gt Hybrid Monthly Loads Profiles f
15. Ground Loop Design Geothermal Design Studio 2014 Edition PUNO 7 0 3 0 3 me 2 deo uo usa User s Manual English GLD Premier 2014 Edition for Windows Gala Geothermal www gaiageo com Copyright Notice Ground Loop Design Premier 2014 User s Guide O 2014 Celsia LLC All Rights Reserved This guide as well as the software described in it is furnished for information purposes only to licensed users of the GLD software product and is furnished on an AS IS basis without any warranties whatsoever express or implied This may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the included End User License Agreement The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Gaia Geothermal Gaia Geothermal assumes no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies that may occur in this book Except as permitted by such license no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any means electronic mechanical recording or otherwise without the prior written consent of Gaia Geothermal Other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders Microsoft Excel Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Windows Explorer Windows ME Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 8 are registered trademarks
16. Oo Connection Established First Light from Left The light furthest to the left indicates both whether or not a connection is established and the type of connection If the light is off no connection is established Magenta indicates a link to an Average Block Loads module while light blue indicates a link to a Zone Manager loads module OHT Receiving Data Second Light from Left The second light from the left indicates when the module is receiving data from the other module It is green in color 0 Sending Data Third Light from Left The third light from the left indicates when the module is sending data to the other module It is yellow in color Om Broken Connection Rightmost Light The light on the right turns red whenever a connection is broken It turns off again when connections are reestablished Importing Loads Data From External Programs With GLD users easily can import design day monthly and or hourly loads data from both commercial loads programs and Excel files directly into the loads modules Page 73 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Importing Loads Into the Average Block Loads Module The Average Block Loads module can accept the importation of monthly and hourly loads data sets For monthly and hourly loads sets users can import loads files from 3rd party building simulation tools or can import csv files from Excel For monthly loads users have the additional option of quickly copying pasting mo
17. Page 163 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels GLD s innovative tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Surface Water Piping Soil Fluid and Calculate panels The Information and Extra kW panels are identical to those included in the Borehole Design module described in Chapter 4 so the reader is referred there for detailed information See Chapter 3 for a discussion of Loads entry Surface Water Use the Surface Water panel to enter data related to the body of water being used as the heat transfer medium Figure 6 2 shows the associated input screen E Surface Water Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kw Information Surface Water Temperatures at Average Circuit Pipe Depth Summer 46 0 F Winter 39 2 F Surface Water Temperatures at Average Header Pipe Depth Primary gt Summer 70 0 F Winter 35 0 F m Branches gt Summer 70 0 ESR winter 35 0 F Details Reference Only Surface Water Type Pond Surface Area 4000 ftS2 Circuit Pipe Depth 12 0 ft Fig 6 2 Surface Water Panel Contents Page 164 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Surface Water Temperatures at Average Circuit Pipe Depth These are the temperatures
18. Pipe 2 Flow Rate General Pipe 1 Pipe 2 Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Fig 11 23 The Properties Window In figure 11 23 in the Layout Manager Workspace circuit 1 has been selected Details regarding circuit 1 can be seen in the Properties Window Properties for all GHX Circuits include the following Fittings end or bottom Fittings on pipe 1 the supply side pipe of the GHX Circuit Fittings on pipe 2 the return side pipe of the GHX Circuit Flow Rate General Information Pipe 1 supply pipe details Pipe 2 return pipe details Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Properties for Pipe Pairs Supply Return Runouts GHX Deader sections are identical except that they have only two fittings by default rather than the three by default of GHX Circuits Page 274 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Users can explore the details of each property section by clicking on the to expand the view In figure 11 24 the Pipe 1 supply pipe property details have been expanded b Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Peak Load E GHX Module Supply Return Runout ic Categorized U Alphabetic eg E GHX Header Section 01 gt A U Circuit 02 on ee Fittings Pipe 2 Flow Rate General Pipe 1 Length ft 300 00 Pipe 1 Length Extra 0 00
19. Solution properties are also included in the Fluid panel These include the specific heat and density of the circulating fluid Also a reference label is included so that the designer knows the percentage of antifreeze and antifreeze type however this reference label is not currently linked to the other input parameters The specific heat and density values of the antifreeze are used for the calculation of the heat pump outlet temperature which in turn is used for the trench length calculation Page 148 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Additionally the viscosity of the solution may affect the flow type in the pipe which was selected on the Piping panel The designer must be aware of any changes made In automatic entry mode the user first selects the fluid type and then selects the desired freezing temperature GLD automatically displays the specific heat and density for the fluid selection In manual entry mode the user manually selects and inputs the specific heat and density for the target solution Note Since solution properties vary considerably and non linearly with type and percentage of additive GLD does not include detailed automatic antifreeze information for all conditions Generalized tables of data may be found in the Fluid Properties tables It is recommended that the designer manually enter the desired values in the input text boxes Results All results for both the heating and the cooling ca
20. The user can right click the mouse while inside the Layout Manager Workspace to see the menu in figure 11 68 appear Page 321 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Add New Pipe Pair Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 68 Right Click to Access the GHX Module Builder After the user selects New GHX Module the GHX Module Builder will appear as it does in figure 11 69 Page 322 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module GHXModule and Manifold Group Name Group Name EHX Module 01 Return Piping Style Return Type Reverse Return Circuit Information Number of Circuits Circuit Separation ft One way Circuit Length ft 300 0 0 0 Circuit Pipe Size SDR11 1 in 25 mm Circuits Per Parallel Loop Circuits Per One Way Length 1 Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 2 in 50 mm OK Cancel Header Pipe Size SDR11 J 2 in 50 mm 5 1 Fig 11 69 The GHX Module Builder The GHX Module Builder is broken into five sections Group Name Return Piping Style Circuit Information Supply Return P
21. gt Project File None ALE 9 Import Data File None i Diffusivity Information Flow Rate Information TC Unit Model Name GeoCube Standard y Flow Pressure Coefficients a 12 632 b 0 645 G 0 013 Pressure Drop Flow Rate Ib in 2 gpm 1 00 5 0 2 00 10 0 3 00 15 0 Calculate Coefficients Fig 10 3 Flow Panel Contents Bore Input parameters related to the test borehole are located in the Bore panel as shown in figure 10 4 While the bore length bore diameter and ground temperature are integral to the calculation all other parameters are for reference only and are included in the report Users must enter the appropriate bore length to ensure accurate results Page 233 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module In Automatic Estimator Mode The program automatically estimates the undisturbed ground temperature from the in situ data set as it is imported When Automatic Estimator Mode is not selected the user must manually enter the undisturbed ground temperature It is recommended that users manually determine the undisturbed ground temperature usual industry accepted standards Note that the undisturbed ground temperature impacts the Borehole Thermal Resistance BTR calculations Therefore for those designers wishing to use the BTR in a design it becomes critical to have an accurate undisturbed ground temperature BTR is also sensitive to the borehole diame
22. 20 35 61 69 97 269 317 Customized files oooooononcnoccnncnnnnnon 182 D Data f rmat idos nitive 75 Data inputen 26 39 48 67 224 Data quality o o o o 227 228 234 236 Demo Version ii acc 17 Depreciation schedule oooooooccoocccco ccoo 194 195 Depth 30 93 134 135 138 140 144 145 164 168 169 170 171 Design Day 13 24 55 66 68 72 74 75 79 80 82 83 108 109 111 112 113 114 115 116 118 119 120 122 152 180 Design Modules Description o ooo om 12 Design procedure oocoooocccccoocccconcconononcnonncconananoninnnnos 30 Design Studio 2 12 18 19 21 24 33 35 37 40 50 77 79 80 84 87 130 132 133 158 161 175 176 177 182 187 188 192 228 244 245 Details34 58 60 61 66 68 69 83 97 164 178 179 207 208 209 210 212 214 215 216 218 219 223 236 245 249 250 251 252 253 254 256 258 266 272 273 274 281 304 316 323 328 335 338 349 350 Diffusivity 32 91 93 104 105 144 145 170 184 226 227 230 231 233 235 236 Diffusivity calculator ooooooocococccconcooo 105 145 Direct return 255 257 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 302 323 327 347 Dongle ici i ii 16 17 Drilling log lt lt bailen 104 Dry Bulbo ee en ee 63 E Editing Pump Data oooocncocccccoocccc
23. 253 254 255 256 257 258 266 267 273 275 276 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 315 316 318 320 322 323 325 327 328 330 333 335 338 342 343 344 345 346 347 350 Reverse return 240 241 243 251 255 257 275 281 283 284 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 300 302 303 304 305 320 323 325 330 333 338 344 346 347 350 Reynold s Number 266 267 268 273 293 334 338 340 344 RA bests ei hacienda 189 194 223 Rule of thumb ieee 202 203 205 Page 358 Index Index of Terms Runout 242 243 253 254 255 256 257 284 285 286 288 289 292 293 294 296 297 299 300 301 302 304 311 315 316 328 330 S SalVage iii tol 189 191 195 222 Saving Projects 87 133 161 193 228 245 Separation 91 92 98 134 135 136 137 138 252 253 255 257 323 328 Software Warranty Soil Tab SoilTable 185 186 188 Sia 14 177 240 260 275 346 Studio 2 12 18 19 21 23 24 25 33 35 37 40 50 70 72 77 79 80 84 87 118 130 132 133 158 161 175 176 177 182 187 188 192 228 244 245 Subsurface installation costs 200 213 222 Supply 95 140 164 165 167 168 228 238 241 242 243 244 253 254 255 256 257 258 266 267 268 273 274 276 279
24. 81 87 88 133 161 Loads module 13 18 21 22 23 24 25 26 34 50 51 52 57 58 59 63 64 65 66 68 70 71 72 73 74 76 77 79 81 82 84 87 88 107 133 134 146 161 162 178 193 M Maintenance 189 191 201 203 204 205 207 222 225 Maintenance costs 189 191 201 203 204 205 222 Manifold 164 167 241 243 250 253 254 255 256 257 268 320 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 340 344 Manual Select ooo ooocnnnnnnocococcccninannnnnncncnnno 59 241 Matching 50 51 52 58 59 62 64 Metric 13 18 19 20 21 35 38 86 91 132 160 176 183 185 191 193 227 230 244 245 260 Metric Units nissa siia 91 Modeling time period 103 105 114 118 220 221 223 Modified data 74 77 79 81 Monthly Loads 24 26 28 51 64 65 67 68 73 75 76 81 84 109 178 N Net Present Value ccooocccccoccccnoccnc nn New Manufacturer New Series New Zone Nomenclature 242 282 283 290 300 301 Notice 1 45 68 268 287 292 293 342 346 348 349 NPV 32 180 181 191 199 201 206 207 221 O Opening Projects 87 132 161 191 228 244 Overview 18 85 94 131 159 176 182 189 212 226 237 240 250 P Palindrome iia idas 293 346 Pattern 26 88 91 92 93 94 100 110 112 114 119 Peak Load 23 24 28 54 55 56 68 69 82 83 1
25. CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview modules which provide organized methods for entering the heat gains or losses for an installation Because the heat pump and loads modules are closely related users can match heat pumps to the loads automatically or manually An advantage of this design is that the heat pump selection and the loads modules can be connected directly with the various design modules available in the studio Therefore one type of loads and heat pump data can be used for all designs Heat Pump Module In GLD heat pump data can be entered into a separate module that keeps track of all of the pumps stored in the GLD s Heat Pump Database Families of heat pumps from various manufacturers can be added to the existing pump set maintained by the user In this way heat pump data obtained from any source easily can be included within the software to take advantage of the automatic equipment sizing features of GLD Recent data from popular heat pump manufacturers is included with GLD However any pump set can be added to the list The heat pump model only requires that certain data from heat pump specification sheets or from software provided by the manufacturer be entered into the Edit Add Heat Pumps module The model in GLD requires the input of a minimum of six data points for both heating and cooling modes These data points relate capacity and power to the inlet source temperature and are fit using a polynomial line to p
26. It represents the flow rate from the installation out to the buried pipe system Calculation results for lengths and temperatures are always available in the expanded user interface as well as seen in figure 4 18 Calculations can be performed at any time in the expanded user interface as well Page 112 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 16003 6 9484 3 Unit Inlet F 90 0 40 0 Borehole Length ft 266 7 158 1 Unit Outlet F 100 1 34 1 Fig 4 18 Calculation Results in Expanded User Interface Results Subsections Fixed Length Mode In fixed length mode where the designer selects the target borehole depth and the program calculates EWTs and pump performance the reporting section also is separated into five subsections A sample screen for fixed temperature design day results can be seen in figure 4 19 The two lists on the Results panel are for heating and cooling In fixed length mode both heating and cooling results are printed in bold type so that they stand out This is different from fixed temperature model above The reason is that in fixed length mode performance calculations for both the dominant and non dominant sides are based on the actual designer selected length of the heat exchanger Results for both sides are therefore relevant The first subsection deals with the bores including the total length the borehole number and
27. Working Series Selection in the Heat Pumps Tabbed Panel 62 Choosing the Active Seriesi seais es aE e r a ae s SiT 62 Inlet Load TemMperat rE Sissies nenene esera saua n R a ais 63 The Average Block Loads Module ccesccsceesseessesseesseeseeeeecnsecsecaecsaecsaecaeeeseeeseeaeecseeeseenneensees 63 Managing the Average Block Loads c ecccesseeseceseceseeeeecseeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeserenerensees 66 INO We td A A A cales tit ri 66 A OTE NON 66 Entering Loads de acia 66 Monthly Load iaa 67 NS O 68 Graphical View of Loads cccccccssessesssessceesceeeeesecesecaecaecaaecseecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeasenaees 68 Pump SleCt Onis hes A E e O O do ie 68 Detailsiand Clot aida cadens tated intimacies aleve 69 Custom Pump Customization ccccesccssccssecseecseecseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeereneeneenaees 69 Pump Continuous Update Feature ccccccccssccscessseescessceseceseeesecaeceeceaecsaecsaecaeeeseseseeeeeseeeeereneeensees 70 Pump Performance Bracketing Feature cccccecccessesssesscessceeeceecesecenecseecaeecseeeaeeeeeeereseseneeeereseees 70 The Studio Link Systems etie n renn iiini E cubed dei esea EEA fav deed each sel R S Es 70 Making a Ek tds 71 Unlinking dd 71 Studio Link Status Lights coo i i 72 Connection Established First Light from Left cee ecceecceeseeeeeseeteeeteenees 72 Receiving Data Second Light from Left oooconconiccniccnconicnnononononanconncnnocnnonnnoo 72
28. analysis depends on the needs of the user If the user enters only some of the cost factors then some costs cannot be calculated or displayed If the user enters all of the cost factors then all of the costs can be calculated and displayed For the single year costs the program sums up the various costs for a single year of operation and displays the results For the lifetime costs the program uses a net present value NPV analysis that incorporates an overall discount rate as well as inflation rates associated with different fuel types Opening Projects Page 192 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module There are two ways to open GSA projects One is by using the New Geothermal System Analyzer command from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar and the other is by opening an existing GSA project fin file from within the GSA module In the design studio only one GSA module can be open at a time El New Projects New GSA projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Geothermal System Analyzer from either the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar New projects open with standard cost values that the user can modify as necessary for new projects The module opens directly into the Results panel New GSA projects can be for a stand alone financial analysis or for use in conjunction with an existing heat exchanger design project For use in conjunction with an existing heat exchang
29. compared directly or entirely different designs can be created and varied All of the information a designer needs exists in one convenient location within GLD Besides opening and closing windows and taking care of file management the studio desktop menu and toolbar include control features which can be applied to more than one different type of project For example the English metric unit conversion tool can convert a single window without affecting the rest of the open windows Project reports can also be printed from the studio desktop Page 20 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview Customization GLD offers the user a great deal of freedom in how he or she enters and uses information Rather than conforming designs to the software this software package allows some modification and variation in its included features Some of the most common areas of customization in GLD include the entry of loads and the selection of equipment Although fully automatic modes are available the user also has the ability to customize or override the automatic features For example detailed load information may be included for precision designs while extremely limited data is enough for rough calculations Additionally if the data are available the designing engineer can enter his or her own pump sets to take full advantage of the automatic selection procedures Also different families of pumps can be used within a single project and even individua
30. monthly total loads for all of the months Kbtu or kWh and divide by the peak demand KBtu hr or kW The resulting number the annual equivalent full load hours then has the units of hours To put it another way think of the annual equivalent full load hours as the total number of hours the system would be running in a year if it ran at full capacity the whole time To help with this calculation the program offers the Equivalent Hours Calculator as one of the standard tools included in the Geothermal Design Studio If the designer knows the monthly total loads and peak demand he or she can simply input them into the boxes provided in the calculator Pressing Calculate then determines the hours according to the summation and division described above When the user presses the Transfer button in any loads module when the calculator is showing the values will be transferred directly into the loads module as previously described Surface Water Design Loads The Surface Water Design Module does not require the loads input detail of the other design modules Since there is no long term build up of heat in the water the only values that are actually required are the peak demand of the installation All other values may be set to zero or included simply for reference Page 85 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module BS CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module This chapter describes the features and operation of the Borehole Design
31. s thermal efficiency here Additional Power Here the user enters extra power requirements for the system such as fans circulation pumps etc Installation Area In this section the user enters the floor space square footage required by the selected heating equipment For example if the boiler requires 600 ft of floor space the user can enter 600 ft here Water Usage Rate The user can enter the water usage rate if any for the boiler Results All of the cost emissions results for both the geothermal and alternate systems can be viewed at any time on the Results panel After all data have been entered or any changes have been made the user can calculate interim or final results using the Calculate button Next to the Calculate button is an input box for the modeling time period When a user imports a design project into the GSA module the modeling time period automatically is set to match the modeling time period in the heat exchanger design In such a case the modeling time period is grayed out indicated that the value was imported If a user wishes to override the value he or she can do so by first selecting the manual option and then entering the time period of interest Page 221 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module In addition to the right of the modeling time period is a graph button Users can push the graph button to view results in a color graph format The core of the Results
32. since long term buildup effects are unimportant If a loads module is linked to a Surface Water Design module the hours will not be visible Page 58 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Days per Week This value represents the occupation of the installation in days per week The building in the example is only occupied during weekdays so the value 5 0 was entered Decimal values can be used for partial occupations and the amount can vary between zones If the heat loss calculations embody occupancy data then days per week can be left at the value 7 0 Again the occupation is unnecessary for a surface water design since long term buildup effects are unimportant If a loads module is linked to a Surface Water Design module the days per week will not be visible Pump Matching and Selection Every zone has heat pump equipment associated with it Equipment matching and selection is done within the zone data window in the lower section entitled Heat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate In this section the designer has three choices when matching a pump to a zone e Automatic selection based on the active heat pump series e Manual selection from a list of all available pumps e Custom input of pump data Once selected the zone retains all of the information associated with the pump chosen This information includes the pump name the number of pumps and the capacity power consumption EER COP flow rate and parti
33. that provides the user with a freedom that single purpose software cannot offer The program is modular and permits flexibility in the designing process and customization based on designer preferences Additionally it has an English metric unit conversion option providing applicability to the widest range of equipment and customers Because the software is available in different languages it is truly international in its ability to traverse national borders as well as language and cultural barriers New in Premier 2014 Edition GLD Premier 2014 Edition adds a range of features to the program including The Hybrid LoadSplitter Tool The hybrid LoadSplitter tool when used in conjunction with 8760 hourly loads data quickly and accurately determines the Page 19 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview relationship between hourly monthly and design day peak and total loads providing for an accurate determination of when the hybrid system s will be active When used in conjunction with monthly loads data sets the Splitter Tool intelligently estimates the relationship between peak and total loads in the months in which the peak geothermal load is reduced When used in conjunction with design day loads data sets the designer can independently modify the peak and total loads and see the individual and joint influence on borefield length calculations Users have the option of exporting both geothermal and hybrid loads profiles into txt file
34. the data the program is able to calculate many of the hard and soft costs associated with HVAC systems Note that calculating the soft cost benefits of geothermal systems may help designers convince clients of the important yet oftentimes overlooked benefits of geothermal HVAC systems The Other Costs panel is divided into three sections emissions costs average building costs and system related costs The system related costs now are further divided into two sub panels Subsurface Costs and Equipment Building Above Surface Costs The contents of the Other Costs panel are shown in figure 9 3 Page 197 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module gt Finance Module sa S a Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives CO2 Emission Rate 1 5 lbs kWh CO2 Emissions Cost 20 00 ton Effective Initiation Delay 2 yr Total Structure Floor Space 10 000 ft 2 Average Building Construction Cost 160 00 ft 2 Lease Value 1 25 ft 2 yr Cost per unit Length Cost per Area excavated trenched Fig 9 3 Other Costs Panel Contents Page 198 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Emissions Costs As the global response to climate change intensifies CO2 emissions regimes will likely become the norm These regimes may include cap and trade mechanisms taxes and other to be determined processes for incentivizing emissions reductions In some countr
35. the warmest and coolest months as compared to the yearly average temperature Regions with temperate climates have a lower temperature swing than regions that have large differences between summer and winter temperatures Page 171 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Coldest Warmest Day in Year These are the actual days of the year on a 365 day scale when the temperature is usually coldest or warmest For example if February 3 is approximately the coldest day of the year the value entered will be 34 31 days in January plus 3 days of February The program uses these days to determine the soil temperature at the given depth at these times of the year Corrected Temperature These are the corrected temperatures at the depth specified calculated automatically from the undisturbed temperature and the other input values provided These values are used in the heat transfer calculation between the header or branch pipes and the soil Fluid The fluid panel is identical to the one described for the Borehole Design module in Chapter 4 except for one addition That addition is the minimum required circuit flow rate in the lower Minimum Circuit Flow Rate and Solution Properties section The added section is shown in figure 6 7 As in the other modules the inlet temperatures can be viewed and modified from the expanded interface as seen in figure 6 8 m Minimum Circuit Flow Rate Cooling 2 8 gpm Heating 4
36. which the software uses to update the pump data automatically Using GLD the designer can concentrate on the effects of variations without worrying about how the individual pumps in various zones will react to such changes The heat pump model employed in GLD reproduces the complete operational data of any particular unit when supplied with a few representative data points selected from across the range of interest Data for each pump can be entered into the Page 38 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps model and grouped together under manufacturer and series headings The data need only be input once and then can be used repeatedly for subsequent modeling sessions Pump data is stored permanently in the pumps directory Many popular pumps from major manufacturers already are included with the program In both heating and cooling modes the minimum data required is the capacity and power variations with source inlet temperature To increase the modeling accuracy these same variations have to be included at a second flow rate Even more accurate results can be obtained if correction factors are provided for variations in the load inlet temperature and flow rate The level of accuracy depends both on the amount of data available and the time the designer wants to invest Note that GLD s heat pump module allows for both water to air and water to water pumps Theoretical Basis Capacity and Power Heat pump capacities and power r
37. 09 cuna Fig 1 2 Expanded Interface Borehole Design Module Description The Borehole Design module allows the user to enter various parameters with respect to the desired vertical borehole system Input is arranged in panels corresponding to the type of input as shown in figure 1 3 Key design parameters can be modified quickly in the expanded user interface as well see figure 1 2 above Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kW Information Fig 1 3 Borehole Design Panel List Page 26 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview Using these seven panels Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kW and Information the user enters the project specific information After the user enters all parameters the software calculates results based on the input data Within this framework it is straightforward and easy to make changes and conduct new calculations The Borehole Design module allows for two types of design methodologies fixed temperature and fixed length designs Fixed temperature refers to the design process in which users specify target inlet temperatures designers set or fix the temperatures themselves and then have the program calculate results such as the required bore length the outlet temperatures and the coefficient of performance COP etc based on the input data With fixed length designs designers specify the required borefield length by inputting the number of bor
38. 1 and Circuit 2 for example are connected to each other by supply pipe B of Pipe Pair BB The return pipe B of Pipe Pair BB brings Page 299 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module the entire series of two parallel circuits back into return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Can you find the parallel flow paths in figure 11 42 Remember parallel flow paths are vertically stacked and have one parent and at least two children or at least two siblings looking at it from the child s perspective This means that Circuit 1 and the supply pipe C of GHX Header Section CC are parallel flow paths Circuit 1 and supply pipe C of GHX Header Section CC are siblings and share supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA as a parent This becomes very clear in figure 11 41 where the flow branches from supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout Pipe AA and into Circuit 1 and supply pipe C of the GHX Header Section CC After looking at figure 11 42 one might ask if pipe pair BB and Circuit 3 are in parallel are siblings as well since they are vertically stacked The answer is no Remember that a parallel flow path is defined as one in which a flow path and component divides into two or more parallel flow paths and components Pipe pair BB and circuit 3 although vertically stacked do not branch out from the same predecessor component Therefore they cannot be siblings and ca
39. 2 Fluid circulates from supply pipe of Pipe Pair A to the supply pipe of Pipe Pair B through Circuit 2 and then continues on into the return pipe of Pipe Pair C and finally into the return pipe of Pipe Pair A 3 Fluid circulates from supply pipe of Pipe Pair A to the supply pipe of Pipe Pair B to the supply pipe of Pipe Pair C to Circuit 3 and then continues on into the return pipe of Pipe Pair A In other words in a reverse return system the flow paths stay pretty much the same length for all the GHX circuits This can be seen even in the descriptions of the three path flows above they are all about the same length compare this to the descriptions of the three path flows in the direct return section and notice how those get progressively longer In a reverse return system the flow paths within the GHX Module section are the same length for each molecule of water regardless of whether the molecule goes through Circuit 1 or through Circuit 3 In these systems the return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout pipe A in figure 11 34 is connected to the farthest GHX Circuit For comparison s sake in direct return systems as can be seen in fig 11 30 above the return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout A is connected to the closest GHX Circuit Reverse return systems are inherently flow balancing which has made them the standard in the geothermal industry Figure 11 35 is a reverse return three GHX Circuit GHX Modul
40. 72 73 79 INCENTIVES ccc cece ce eeeeeees 32 191 193 194 196 Included tables iii iins 182 Inflation 189 191 206 207 Inlet temperature23 24 26 27 31 33 38 39 44 64 67 70 83 86 87 106 114 118 130 134 147 171 172 177 178 Installation 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 22 23 24 28 30 31 36 51 52 58 64 66 81 82 83 84 102 110 111 112 113 114 116 119 120 149 150 164 168 169 170 172 178 188 189 191 199 200 201 202 203 205 210 211 213 217 219 220 222 226 240 Installation costs 191 199 200 201 202 203 205 222 226 Internationalization oooooocccnoccccconancnooncncnnns 21 223 Kavanaugh oooooonoccccoccooccnocncoonnoonnconnnonnnnoo 27 30 31 36 L Language 13 18 21 182 186 241 244 275 316 Length 24 26 27 28 29 30 31 52 57 69 83 91 100 104 105 106 107 109 110 112 113 114 115 118 119 124 134 135 138 140 141 142 145 147 149 150 152 162 166 167 168 169 172 174 177 200 212 213 229 232 241 252 253 254 255 257 266 267 268 274 275 276 277 279 281 284 287 288 289 294 295 315 316 318 323 324 325 328 330 Lifecycle 32 34 116 120 189 195 202 221 Lifecycle analySis ccccesceeseeeeees 195 202 221 Lifecycle cOStiING insni dies 32 LOAGS et nina 51 79 83 84 Loads files 50 51 73 77 78 79
41. A NN AN 159 General Features ona 159 Opening Projects a ees 161 New Projects osc aa 161 Existing Projects ii 161 SAVING PLACAS a E las 161 LPI AO sde 161 Before UB aia 162 Enteri g Data into the Tabbed Parels iii cess a R EE OER 163 Surface Water esos ivescee Sessile ones ck sap rE ol bess ETO EAE EONAR ESE EE ETENA 163 Surface Water Temperatures at Average Circuit Pipe Depth 164 Surface Water Temperatures at Average Header Pipe Depth 164 Primary Header ii Aia 164 o RO ON 164 Details Reference Only maria hena a tija hi 164 A an tat a O 164 Circuit Paramotor tes a lado de ul odo eo cece 166 Circuit Pipe SIZE ed Dad do ol 166 Number of Parallel CircultS ooooncnnnnincononnnononnnnonononcnnocononn canon nono noo 166 Circuitistyle atasca aras aldo de used edo dede 166 Circuit Head Loss per 100 feet cc eccecseeseessceeeeeeeeeseceseeteeeeensees 166 Extra Equivalent Length per CirCUlt ooooonoccnncniccnoocnonnconcconconnconocnnoco noo 166 Header Parambters nilo ells lets 167 NUDE MES A i aos 168 PE e dd e ao 168 Header Length Average Branch Length 168 Head Loss per 100 feCt ooooooccincnnocinononnconnonn nono nonncnononononnnc nono nocn nono noo 169 A I AE A EA E EN 169 Page 7 PREFACE Contents Depth of Header in S ldl ooooonnonncnincnccnnocnonnconncnnconncnnnonn nono nonnnnnnrnnnnnnnnos 170 O OS 170 Regional Air Temperature SWIO8B ooconocncnnnon
42. BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST REVENUE PROFIT OR DATA OR FOR SPECIAL INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES HOWEVER CAUSED AND REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF GAIA OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL GAIA S OR ITS SUPPLIERS TOTAL LIABILITY TO CUSTOMER WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE EXCEED THE PRICE PAID BY CUSTOMER THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS SHALL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED WARRANTY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE BECAUSE SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO CUSTOMER Page 111 PREFACE END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Term and Termination This End User Agreement is effective until terminated Customer s license rights under this End User Agreement will terminate immediately without notice from Gaia if Customer fails to comply with any provision of this End User Agreement Upon termination Customer must destroy all copies of Software and the corresponding keys in its possession or control Compliance With Law Each party agrees to comply with all applicable laws rules and regulations in connection with its activities under this End User Agreement Without limiting the foregoing Customer acknowledges and agrees that the Software including technical data is
43. CFD module take more effort to build and can require more total pipe and hence offer a higher total pressure drop compared to direct return GHX Headers The return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout may be longer in the reverse return case compared to the direct return case This is easily visualized look at return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in both figure 34 and figure 30 it is longer in the reverse return case Of course if a reverse return GHX Header system follows the horseshoe approach the length of return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in it could be more or less the same length as return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in the direct return system This would reduce the lower pressure drop benefit associated with shorter direct return systems It all depends on the particular design GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section 2 C C GHX Header Section 1 B B B y a j Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Fig 11 34 A Reverse Return GHX Module The reverse return system in the figure 11 34 has three flow paths The three flow paths are 1 Fluid circulates from supply pipe of Pipe Pair A through Circuit 1 and then continues on into the return pipe of Pipe Pair B and then Page 289 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module into the return pipe of Pipe Pair C and finally into the return pipe of Pipe Pair A
44. CFD module In the design studio only one CFD module can be open at a time Page 245 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module New Projects New CFD projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Piping from either the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar New projects open with several default values that the user can modify as necessary for new projects The module opens directly into the Layout panel New CFD projects can be for a stand alone analysis or for use in conjunction with an existing heat exchanger design project For use in conjunction with an existing heat exchanger design project see below gt Existing Projects Existing CFD projects may be opened at any time from within the CFD module by choosing Open from the CFD module toolbar Saving Projects CFD projects may be saved at any time by clicking the save button on the CFD module toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user if he or she wants to save the CFD project Typical Operation Although each user will have his or her own unique method the typical operation of the CFD module would include the following steps Open a new CFD module Choose metric or English units If necessary enter modify automation details in the Automation Panel If necessary modify flow rate details in the Fluid Panel Modify fluid type as necessary In the Layout tab
45. CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones alla Heat Pumps Loads Heat Pump Selection And Design Load Temperatures Select Heat Pump Manufacturer And Series Florida Heat Pump y EV Series y m Pumps Available in this Series Design Heat Pump Inlet Load Temperatures Cooling WB 67 0 degF Heating DB 70 0 degF e Water Temperatures Water to Water Pumps Cooling 55 0 degF Heating 100 0 deg F E Air Temperatures Water to Air Pumps Fig 3 9 Heat Pumps Tabbed Panel It represents the primary heat pump family utilized by the designer for a particular project Although this is the primary series other pumps may still be selected for certain zones using either the Select button or by defining a custom pump To choose a pump series select a manufacturer followed by the desired series of that manufacturer A list of available pumps appears in the list box Inlet Load Temperatures Values for the initial inlet load temperatures for both water to air and water to water pumps may be entered in the appropriate boxes If necessary these values may be changed for individual pumps in the Loads panel For water to air pumps WB refers to Wet Bulb and DB refers to Dry Bulb temperatures 1 The Average Block Loads Module If detailed zone style modeling is unnecessary for an initial calculation or if information is incomplete for a component base
46. Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB are siblings because they share the same parent In the CFD Layout Manager Workspace parallel flow paths or siblings are vertically stacked directly above one another This can be seen in figure 11 40 where Circuit 1 is directly above GHX Header Section BB Series Flow Paths gt map In figure 11 39 a series flow path occurs where supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB continues into Circuit 2 The fluid flow from supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB to Circuit 2 is therefore in series Supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB is the parent of Circuit 2 and Circuit 2 is the child of supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB In the CFD Layout Manager workspace serial flow paths or parent child relationships are stacked with indentation This can be seen in figure 11 40 where Circuit 2 is one level below the GHX Header Section B and indented What this means is that Circuit 2 is connected to GHX Header Section B in series As long as the designer recognizes that parallel flow involves three or more component elements and two or more flow directions and that series flow involves two component elements and one flow direction he or she is ready to proceed to the next section To solidify our understanding of how the Layout Manager Workspace diagrams direct return systems we will follow the fluid flow in figure 11 40 Because there are two GHX Circuits there are two major flow
47. Customer s rights granted hereunder without retaining any of the Software or any copies thereof or any rights thereto Except as otherwise expressly provided under this End User Agreement Customer shall have no right and Customer specifically agrees not to i make error corrections to or otherwise modify or adapt the Software nor create derivative works based upon the Software or to permit third parties to do the same or 11 copy in whole or in part decompile translate reverse engineer disassemble or otherwise reduce the Software to human readable form Upgrades and Additional Copies For purposes of this End User Agreement Software shall also include and the terms and conditions of this End User Agreement shall apply to any upgrades updates bug fixes or modified versions collectively Upgrades or backup copies of the Software licensed or provided to Customer by Gaia or an authorized distributor for which Customer has paid the applicable license fees and holds the corresponding software keys Notwithstanding the foregoing Customer acknowledges and agrees that Gaia shall have no obligation to provide any Upgrades under this End User Agreement If Upgrades are provided Customer acknowledges and agrees that 1 Customer has no license or right to use any such additional copies or Upgrades unless Customer at the time of acquiring such copy or Upgrade already holds a valid license to the original Software Notices of
48. Design Optimizer c ceccceeccescessccesecssecseceseceecaeecseeeaeeseeeeeeeeresrensees 343 Adding Circulation Pumps cc sciece sececcccceesth enceccccedeedeesecevecbacevacevinceveesenteadvsca EE EK E a e 347 Adding A Circulation PUMP s cccsccscccscecseeveceisscstecssctes ivadecsteeveetin cutee scedetvacesseceveessndeedeaces 348 Deleting a Circulation PUMP iii 351 Printing Reports oen iena ag ccc cess EEE iia 352 Exporting a Piping Repo iii 352 Exporting a Circulation Pump Report cccecccecccescesccssecesecececseeeseeeseeeeeeereseeeseeesseserensees 353 Concluding Remarks eiii ita 353 A A O OO 354 INGOXCOR TO A a a EPE EEE E covecces covdadvausuancuc cavsscus cevaucvausuessedcevecseaceveese 354 Page 12 PREFACE Before You Begin V gt PREFACE Before You Begin This chapter describes the typical uses and users of the software It also describes the installation procedure and hardware and software requirements for the Ground Loop Design GLD program Additionally the chapter introduces the licensing system Introduction Typical Uses and Users GLD Premier Edition 2014 is intended as a Design Studio for professional HVAC designers and engineers working in the area of geothermal applications It is primarily designed for use with light commercial or commercial installations since the calculations take into account a the long term thermal effects that often determine the necessary design requirements and b pipi
49. Design Optimizer tool was used all the header pipes were 2 on the supply and return side Now the optimized reverse return headering system has reducing headers that start at GHX Header Section 5 highlighted with a 1 1 2 pipe and reduce down to a final 3 4 header section Notice also the Header sizes in the Pipe 2 return pipe column They start out at the top with a 3 4 diameter pipe in GHX Header Section 1 and gradually increase until reaching a steady state 2 diameter at GHX Header Section 4 In the Header Sections the Pipe 1 and Pipe 2 sizes are exact opposite palindromes This is because they are a reverse return Page 347 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module system which necessitates such a setup If the system had been direct return the layout would appear quite different Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Name ipe 1 Si i i if i ity Pipe 1 Reynold s Number Pipe 2 Reynold s Number GHX Module Supply Return Pipe 2 E 5 37 ft s 5 37 ft s 55098 U Circuit 01 gt 2 00 ft s 2 00 ft s 11372 2C GHX Header Section 01 5 y 4 75 ft s 3 14 ft s 48802 U Circuit 02 A a 2 23 ft s 2 23 ft s 12654 5 GHX Header Section 02 z 4 07 ft s 2 65 ft s 41795 U Circuit 03 s 2 25 ft s 2 25 ft s 12814 35 GHX Header Section 03 E fs 3 38 ft s 3 10 ft s 34701 U circuit 04 Kg E 2 27 ft s 2 27 ft s 12916 2C GHX Header Section 04 x Z 2 68 ft s 2 68 ft s 27549 U Circuit 05 t z 27 ft s 2
50. Glycol Freezing Point 25 F 11 3 by Weight Design Temperature 32 vl F Specific Heat Cp 0 962 Btu F lbm Density rho 63 42 lb ft 3 Dynamic Viscosity u 6 127E 5 lbf s ft 2 Check Fluid Tables Fig 11 11 Fluid Panel Contents Page 260 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Fluid Information In this section users may enter flow rates for peak load installed capacity and purging These three flow rate options handy for comparison purposes are used to calculate fluid dynamics results in the Layout tab Note that users can switch between the three entered flow rates in the Layout tab and so do not have to keep returning back and forth to the Fluid tab during the piping optimization process Peak Load Flow Rate The peak load flow rate is the flow rate necessary to cover the peak heating or cooling load The peak flow rate typically calculated in the heat exchanger design modules is based on the peak load and the flow rate in GPM ton or its metric equivalent The user can enter the peak flow rate here or it can be automatically transferred in when a user imports a design project into the CFD module Installed Capacity Flow Rate Some designers desire to see the fluid dynamics performance of their piping system under the installed capacity flow rate for circulation pump sizing purposes for example Typically the installed capacity flow rate is higher than the peak load flow rat
51. Hall New Jersey 1997 Incropera F and Dewitt D Introduction to Heat Transfer 2 Edition p 456 p 98 John Wiley and Sons New York 1990 Paul N The Effect of Grout Thermal Conductivity on Vertical Geothermal Heat Exchanger Design and Performance M S Thesis South Dakota State University 1996 Page 131 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module V gt CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module This chapter describes the features and operation of the Horizontal Design module This module is used in the design of near surface horizontal systems It is one of the four design modules included with GLD The module can be used to design trench pit and horizontal bore systems Overview As with the Borehole and Surface Water Design modules the calculations made in the Horizontal Design module involve the combination of a large number of input parameters Care must be taken to assure that proper values are verified before use Assuming that reasonable values are provided to the software the software will provide a reasonable result Fixed area mode and the temperature prediction graphs also are available for horizontal systems General Features The Horizontal Design module in GLD also includes a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables in a straightforward and efficient manner For example parameters related to trench configuration are listed on the Configurati
52. Heat Pumps Design of Geothermal Systems for Commercial and Institutional Buildings by S P Kavanaugh and K Rafferty 1997 Page 32 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview Geothermal System Analyzer Module The new Geothermal System Analyzer GSA module is a major update to the lifecycle costing module This module allows the user to enter parameters necessary to calculate both hard and soft annual and lifecycle Net Present Value NPV costs associated with his or her designed geothermal system compared to standard HVAC systems This enables designers and decision makers to compare simultaneously the financial profiles and benefits of geothermal vs standard HVAC systems The interface is arranged in panels corresponding to the type of input After the user enters his or her desired parameters the software calculates results such as the energy consumed by the selected systems the CO emitted from the systems the water consumed by the systems 1f any etc The input information is organized into six panels as shown in figure 1 6 ETS Geothermal Conventional Lanas Other cual Incentives E Fig 1 6 Lifecycle Costing and CO2 Panel List Using these six panels Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs and Incentives the user can enter describe and compare project specific financial and emissions estimates A more complete description of this module can be found in Chapter 9 Thermal Conductiv
53. Import a commercial loads file or excel file using the loads import button see below If necessary hit the zero box at the top of each column to reset all values to 0 Page 68 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones In the last row of the peak cooling and peak heating columns there are two input boxes for the number of hours the system is expected to operate at the peak The initial value is set at 3 0 hours and shown in bold face Only the Monthly Data or second model of the Borehole Design module uses this Hours at Peak value in its calculations The number entered here determines the number of sequential hours the peak load is applied to the system For example if the peak cooling load is expected to last from 12 noon until 4pm on July 21st then the user can enter 4 0 cooling hours at peak Except for a process load it is probably rarely the case where the peak load is applied for more than 4 6 hours The impact of modifying the hours at peak input on final results can be viewed most clearly in the new Graphing Module in GLD 2014 which is described below and in the calculated peak entering and exiting water temperatures shown in the Monthly Design method see below The Design Day heat transfer model utilizes the 4 or 8 hour time period already fixed in the Design Day Loads section After entering the loads data hit the Update button to return to the main loads panel screen Notice that the program automatically converts th
54. Length ft 100 Pipe 1 Length Extra ft 0 00 Pipe 1 Name Supply Pipe 1 Size 3 in 80 mm Pipe 1 Type SDR11 Pipe 1 Volume gal 47 E Pipe 2 Return Pipe 2 Diameter Inne in 2 86 Pipe 2 Length ft 100 Pipe 2 Length Extra ft 0 00 Pipe 2 Name Return 3 in 80 mm Pipe 2 Type SDR11 Pipe 2 Volume gal 7 Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Pipe Size Radial dimension of pipe Fig 11 63 Properties Can Be Modified With the Properties Window Page 316 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module The designer can also control details about the Supply Side and Return Side fittings in the Properties Windows for the same pipe pair the Supply Return Runout from the above figure It is important to remember where these fittings are located in the model see the GLD Piping Language section of this chapter In figure 11 64 below some of the fitting options can be seen in the drop down menu Note that if a user wishes to manually enter a fitting equivalent length he or she must first choose Other and then can manually enter the equivalent length The fittings database built into the program will be growing over time as designers and manufacturers provide our firm with more accurate and detailed data pertaining to different types of fittings Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Fittings Return E Fittings Supply Supply Fitting 1 Eqv Length ft 5 Supply Fitting 1 Na
55. Name Fitting Type Butt Tee Branch Pipe Type SDR11 Pipe Size 1 in 25 mm Eqv Length ft 10 7 Volume gal 0 00 Fig 11 67 The Fittings Section in the Pipe and Fitting Manager The fittings tab is broken into either two or three tabbed panels depending on the selected component If a pipe pair has been selected there are two available fittings tabbed panels Pipe 1 and Pipe 2 If a circuit has been selected three fittings tabbed panels will be available Pipe 1 Pipe 2 and End In figure 11 67 3 tabbed panels are available indicating that a circuit was selected as indeed was the case as can be seen in figure 11 65 above For some designs engineers will use two or more fittings in series at a single piping connection point The CFD module enables a designer to add more than one fitting as necessary When additional fittings are added they are added to the Properties Window and of course included in the calculations As can be seen above a single pipe fitting a 1 SDR11 Butt Tee branch fitting has been selected A designer can add or remove fittings as necessary via the buttons which can be seen below If a user desires a fitting that is not included in the database the user can choose Other and enter his or her required parameters Page 320 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module After the designer has completed his or her selection modification of fittings and pip
56. Peak Load Add New Pipe Pair Add New Reverse Return Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Add Circulation Pump Fig 11 54 Select the Component of Interest Right Click and Choose Paste Selection Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El Pipe Pair U Gita Pipe Pair U Circuit Fig 11 55 The Circuit Has Been Copied and Pasted as a New Child to a Parent Pipe Pair Page 311 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E E E Pipe Pair E Pipe Pair circuit U Circuit Fig 11 56 The Circuit Has Been Copied and Pasted As An Independent Parent Note that copying and pasting is not limited to individual components Entire nested component families and partial nested component families can be copied and pasted as well This is very convenient if a designer spends some time building for example a GHX Module with 10 GHX Circuits and wants to have several of these GHX Modules After the designer finishes one all he or she has to do is select the component at the top of the GHX Module the top parent component and then copy and paste The entire GHX Module will be instantly replicated Hiding and Displaying Nested Component Families Nested component families consist of two or more components that are in parent child relationships Figur
57. Pipe 1 Name Pipe 1 Pipe 1 Size 1 in 25 mm Pipe 1 Type SDR11 Pipe 1 Volume gal 1 89 Pipe 2 Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Fig 11 24 Pipe 1 Properties for GHX Circuit 1 Expanded Pipe 1 has a number of user definable and modifiable properties including the pipe length an extra pipe length and the pipe name as it is displayed in the Layout Manager Workspace the pipe size and the pipe type Grayed out properties such as the fluid volume in the pipe are calculated by the program automatically and not adjustable Note that the Properties Window is only one of several ways of entering and modifying pipe information The Properties Window provides the most detail but it also offers the slowest entry method Other faster entry methods are described below Section Five The Circuit Confirmation Calculator Page 275 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module The fifth section is the Circuit Confirmation Calculator panel When a designer is designing a larger commercial system the Circuit Confirmation Calculator keeps track of both the number of GHX Circuits and the total length of circuit pipe The Circuit Confirmation Calculator by default is hidden To view the Calculator a user can push the following button which can be found in the bottom right corner of the Layout Panel When a user hits the above button the Circuit Confirmation Calculator will appear at the top of the Layout panel
58. Proprietary Rights Customer agrees to maintain and reproduce all trademark copyright patent and notices of other proprietary rights on all copies in any form of the Software in the same form and manner that such trademark copyright patent and notices of other rights are included on the Software Except as expressly authorized in this End User Agreement Customer shall not make any copies or duplicates of any Software without the prior written permission of Gaia Customer may make such backup copies of the Software as may be necessary for Customer s lawful use provided Customer affixes to such copies all trademark copyright patent and notices of other proprietary rights that appear on the original Proprietary Rights Customer shall own the physical media on which the Software is recorded but the Software is and will remain the sole and exclusive property of Gaia Gaia s rights under this Section will include but not be limited to 1 all copies of the Software in whole and in part and ii all Intellectual Property Rights in the Software For purposes herein Intellectual Property Rights means patent rights including patent applications and disclosures copyrights including but not limited to rights in audiovisual works and moral rights trade secret rights rights of priority and any other intellectual property right recognized in any country or jurisdiction in the world Moral Rights means any right to claim authorship
59. Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kW Information Header Primary Number of Lines 2 Pipe Size 2in 50mm 7 Header Length In Water 50 0 fe In Soil 150 0 fr Head Loss per 100 feet Cooling os ft hd Heating 30 ft hd Branches Number of Lines Fa Pipe Size 1in 25mm Average Branch Length In Water 100 0 ft In Soil ft Head Loss per 100 feet Cooling 7 0 Ft hd Heating 28 ft hd Fig 6 5 Piping Header Panel Contents Header Parameters The GLD Surface Water module assumes that a standard supply and return line design will consist of mains followed by a Manifold that splits the mains into the headers Headers are generally the first pipes to enter the ground or water They can then branch off once more if necessary branch lines For small systems the mains may be the headers and there may not be branches For larger systems there may be many headers and multiple levels of branches In the Piping panel the model employed allows for multiple headers and multiple first level branches off of those headers If further branching is required the head loss calculations will need to be calculated and added separately Their effect on the calculated piping length which cannot be included will depend on their length All headers are assumed to have Page 168 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module an identical pipe size and an approximately equivalent flow The same is true for th
60. The GSA module enables designers to specify other energy sources besides electricity Options include fuel oil 2 natural gas propane LPG coal weighted average of anthracite bituminous and semibituminous wood and biomass Because the CO emissions from these fuel types tend not to vary as much as the CO emissions associated with electrical power generation the program uses standard CO emissions coefficients for these other fuel types These emissions coefficients are from the 2006 IPCC Guidelines for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories Volume 2 The CO emissions cost enables GLD to put a price tag on the CO2 emitted from a range of HVAC systems While at present time many consider this a soft cost soon it may be a hard cost that influences Page 199 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module investment decisions As a result it is especially important to consider the CO emissions costs over a project s lifetime While emissions costs estimates vary within the range of 15 USD ton to 834 USD ton it is likely that the cost will hover somewhere in the 30 100 USD ton range in the future The effective initiation delay is included because while at present time there are few enforced CO emissions regimes eventually CO2 emissions will have a financial cost associated with them This delay allows designers to estimate the lifetime CO emissions costs starting at a point in the future that is defined by the effective ini
61. Y On Off Total Area 50000 0 ft 2 width 100 ft x Length 500 0 ft Trench Layout 2 Number 20 Y Depth 80 fe Separation 5 ft width 12 0 in Pipe Configuration in Trench oo C Total Number of Pipes 1 Vertical Separation Y 240 in Horizontal Separation X 120 in Modeling Time Period Prediction Time 5 0 years Fig 5 5 Sample Pit Design Horizontal Bore Layout Horizontal bore systems can be designed as well with the horizontal module The key to doing so is to select the two pipe configuration and then think of each trench as being a horizontal bore See figure 5 6 for an example Page 140 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module AP Horizontal Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Fixed Area Mode l On off Total Area 50000 0 ft 2 Width 100 0 ft x Trench Layout 2 Number 5 Ej Depth 20 0 ft Separation 20 0 ft Width 10 in Pipe Configuration in Trench ELO O T s Total Number of Pipes 2 Lo o Vertical Separation Y 24 0 in k x1 Horizontal Separation X Pio in Modeling Time Period Prediction Time 50 years Fig 5 6 A Horizontal Bore Design For horizontal bores fixed area mode can be on or off When off GLD calculates the bore length When on the user defines the length and the program calculates the performance In figure 5 6 the design calls for five horizontal bores with 20 ft of horiz
62. a 308 Dragging and Dropping Pipe Pairs and CircuitS oooooncnnnicnoccnonocncnnnononncnnnanonann 308 Copying and Pasting Pipe Pairs and Circuits cccceesseeseesseeeeeeeeeeseeereneeeneees 309 Hiding and Displaying Nested Component Families cececeeeeeteereeeeeeees 311 Page 11 PREFACE Contents Deleting Pipe Pairs and Circuits oooooococcnocococonononnnconnnononononnn cnn nnnn cnn ncn nn rn nnnnnncn neos 312 Modifying Parameters with the Properties Windows coocccconncncnoconocnononananinnon 314 Modifying Parameters with the Pipe and Fitting Manager cece eeeeeeeeee 316 Automatic Methods enna Aaah nae one ea ean e a dances Bana aes 320 The GHX Mod le Bul d t hurones ae 320 The Manifold Vault Builder 0 0 cee eeceseeeeeseceeeeeceeeeeceaeeeceaecaeesecaeeeeeneeeeeeaees 326 The Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder cecesseeceseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeneees 330 Calculating and Reviewing Results cccccecccsseessesssessecseeeseeeseeseceeeceeenseeeseeeaeeaecaecsaecseeeaeeeneeaes 332 Calctilating Results diendo 332 Reviewing Results EESE E E T 333 PROPERTIES WINDOW RESULTS coococciccconoconicnnononcononnononnononncnnnonnonnoncnnonos 334 LAYOUT MANAGER WORKSPACE RESULTS cdooooccccccccononcononnoncononnnonnonos 335 REVIEW PANEL RESULTS oep aa ai eiaa ieni iiS 339 Auto Optimization A 341 The Purging Flow Rate Auto OptimiZer cceecceeeeseceseesceeeeeseeeecseeeseeeeeeeeeeereeeeensees 341 The GHX Header
63. a series of reducing fittings or butt fusions Also note that while the range of control can seem overwhelming in automatic mode most of these variables are selected automatically for the designer by the CFD algorithms In this version of the software note that the fittings are not automatically selected by the CFD algorithms Within the CFD Layout Manager Workspace a single GHX Circuit appears in figure 11 26 Note that the Workspace is on the left side of the screen and the right side contains a Properties Window The properties window can be expanded as necessary to view all of the characteristics for all five subcomponents of each GHX Circuit Note that the Properties Window also contains fluid dynamics results for each circuit These will be reviewed later Page 278 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module b Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B U Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Fittings End Fittings Pipe 1 Fittings Pipe 2 Flow Rate General Pipe 1 Pipe 2 Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Fig 11 26 The basic GHX Circuit Page 279 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module pd The Supply Return Pipe Pair An individual Supply Return Pipe Pair consist of the following four subcomponents Af Supply side fitting generally before the supply side pipe A Supp
64. a single pipe configuration is chosen The following subsection of the report lists the heat pump inlet and outlet temperatures of the circulating fluid The next subsection lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and demand of all the equipment and the calculated heat pump and system efficiencies The peak load is the maximum and is determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel Finally the system flow rate is listed in 1ts own subsection The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the flow rate in gpm ton chosen on the Fluid panel It represents the flow rate from the installation out to the buried pipe system Average Entering Water Temperature Graphs The user has the option to calculate and graph average entering water temperatures The graph button is visible only in the expanded user interface next to the Calculate button as can be seen below in figure 5 16 Page 151 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module TY Horizontal Design Project 1 Lengths Temperatures COOLING 4219 5 211 0 HEATING 5211 2 260 6 COOLING 90 0 100 1 Total Trench Length ft Single Trench Length ft Unit Inlet F Unit Outlet F Calculations Calculate lt Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuratio
65. are updated automatically Since the new calculated equipment capacities can lead to changes in selected equipment the designer must be aware of the changes Customized pump values must be adjusted manually Design System Flow Rate The system flow rate per installed ton is included on the Fluid panel This is the system flow rate per ton of peak load not installed capacity This is because it is assumed that all units will not be running at full load simultaneously even in the peak load condition Optimized systems generally operate in the range from 2 5 to 4 0 gpm ton while the ideal system flow rate is somewhere around 3 0 gpm ton Again if the flow rate is changed the selected heat pumps are updated in the loads modules Page 147 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module af Horizontal Design Project HorizontalSample Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kw Information Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures Cooling 85 0 lt F Heating 50 0 F Design System Flow Rate Flow Rate 3 0 gpmiton Solution Properties V Automatic Entry Mode Fluid Type Water y Freezing Point gt y SF 0 0 by Weight Specific Heat Cp f 1 00 Btu F lbm Density rho 2 4 bifte3 Check Fluid Tables Fig 5 12 Fluid Panel Contents Design Method Fixed Temperature Inlet Temperatures 85 0 F ps0 F Fig 5 13 Inlet Temperatures in Expanded User Interface Solution Properties
66. as can be seen in figure 11 50 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El Pipe Pair Pipe Pair U et Fig 11 50 Manually Adding a GHX Circuit Conversely if a user wishes to add a new GHX Circuit as a child of another piping component he can do so by moving the mouse over the parent component of interest right clicking and then adding a new circuit The result of such of an effort can be seen in figure 11 51 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El Pipe Pair El Pipe Pair U Fig 11 51 Manually Adding a GHX Circuit As a Child to the Pipe Pair Dragging and Dropping Pipe Pairs and Circuits After having added components into the Layout Design Manager users can quickly move components or nested families of components via the standard drag and drop methodology For example the user can select the GHX Circuit in figure 11 50 and then drag it onto the second pipe pair so that it looks like figure 11 51 The user can then select the second pipe pair and in doing so select all of the child components which in this case consist of only the circuit and Page 309 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module drag and drop the entire nested component family onto the first pipe pair The result can be seen in figure 11 52 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bl E m Pipe Pair Pipe Pair U Circuit Fig 11 52 The New Nested Component Family System Afte
67. as can be seen in figure 11 25 Layout Design and Optimization Required Included Difference Total Circuit Length ft 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total Circuit Number 0 0 0 Fig 11 25 The Circuit Confirmation Calculator is Visible The user can enter the total circuit length and total circuit number required at the start of a design and the Calculator will count down towards 0 as the user adds circuits This calculator ensures that a designer does not have too many or too few circuits and that the total calculated circuit length equals the total expected circuit length The GLD Piping Language Now that the primary components of the CFD module as well as the user interface have been introduced it is possible to begin understanding the GLD piping language The GLD piping language consists of two fundamental components and a grammar that describes how the components interact This section describes the fundamental components and explains via several practical examples how to use the visual piping grammar to model piping systems including direct and reverse return systems Please note that while the below description is quite detailed it is not necessary to remember everything because the CFD module automatically handles nearly all of these features and functions However having a basic understanding of the system will give a designer the power to modify and adjust his or her systems quickly and effortlessly Piping Components As mentioned
68. component the user wishes to delete everything below the selected component will be deleted right click and select delete This can be seen in figure 11 61 and figure 11 62 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 GHX Header Section 01 GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 4 GHX Header Section 02 PA U Circuit 04 EA i GHX Header Secti Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair U Circuit 05 Add New Circuit GHX Heade A U Circ Add New Ultra Manifold GHX Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 61 Deleting Part of a GHX Module Nested Component Family Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B E GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 die lt GHX Header Section 01 E S GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 Fig 11 62 All that remains of the GHX Module after deleting GHX Header Section 3 and Everything Below It Modifying Parameters with the Properties Windows Page 315 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module After manually creating a piping system or at any time in the creation process the user can modify the properties of any of the components One way to do so is via the Properties Window which is usually found to the right of the L
69. correctly into the Design Day Loads boxes in the loads modules the 0 448 must remain the same Noon to four p m represents four hours out of twenty four in a day Loads not included in that four hour period must be included in the other twenty hours of the day The following equation is used to determine the relationship between off peak loads and peak loads so that the PLFm is maintained Note that this automatic calculation also assumes that the installation is running 7 days per week and changes the Days per Week value to reflect this If other occupation times are desired the values will need to be changed manually to reflect proper distribution over the course of a month PLFm Days per Week 7 days x 4 hr x Peak Demand 8 12am 4 hr x Peak Demand 12 4 4 hr x Peak Demand 4 8 12 hr x Peak Demand 8pm 8am 24 hr x Top Peak Demand 0 448 7 days per Week 7days x 4 hr x 30 KBtu hr 4 hr x Y 4 hr x Y 12 hr x Y 24 hr x 30 KBtu hr or solving for Y Y 30 KBtu hr x 24 hr x 0 448 30 KBtu hr x 4hr 20 hr Page 83 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Y 322 56 KBtu 120 KBtu 20 hr Y 10 128 KBtu hr To preserve the partial load factor when transferring into the Design Day Loads 30 KBtu hr has to be transferred to the noon to four p m block as expected The 10 128 KBtu hr needs to be transferred into each of the other three blocks which represent the other 20 hou
70. design a new one use wizards or manual building techniques Adjust the size of the CFD module to maximize viewing flexibility Hit the Calculate button to analyze the system Hit the Display button to choose which results to review Select to have the program automatically determine the purging flow rate and or auto size the piping systems to ensure the user defined purging flow rate Page 246 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module e Make modifications as necessary e Add circulation pumps e Save and or print the CFD piping report Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels Ground Loop Design s innovative tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Circulation Pumps Automation Fluid and Layout panels Circulation Pumps General information pertaining to a piping system s circulation pumps can be entered and found in the Circulation Pumps panel as seen in figure 11 2 below b Piping Module ba ba e Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Circulation Pump Information Total Circulation Pump Power kW 0 0 Total Number of Circulation Pumps 0 No circulation pump information entered Fig 11 2 Circulation Panel Contents Page 247 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module After a designer has finalized a piping system in the L
71. distance between adjoining loops The horizontal Slinky configuration employs the same calculation procedure as that of the vertical However in the case of the horizontal Slinky the U tube depth is lowered such that the average depth of the vertical Slinky would be equal to that of a flat horizontal Slinky The pitch and run fraction function is obtained from a two dimensional interpolation over the surface determined from the experimentally determined data points provided in the Slinky manual Surface Water Design Module Description The Surface Water Design module allows the user to enter various parameters concerning the body of water lake pond river etc system As in the Borehole Module inputs are arranged in panels that relate to the type of input After the user enters all parameters the software calculates the required pipe length the circuit number the inlet and outlet temperatures and the COP etc based on the design specifications Again within this framework it is straightforward to make changes and recalculate results especially when using the expanded user interface The input information is organized into seven panels shown in figure 1 5 Page 31 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface water Extra kW Information Fig 1 5 Surface Water Design Panel List These seven panels include Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kW and Informa
72. e A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations Theoretical Basis The Thermal Conductivity module uses the line source theory the most commonly used theory for the evaluation of conductivity test data This analysis methodology requires a constant rate of heat injection a stable power supply and a thermal conductivity unit that is well insulated from the ambient air temperature Opening Projects There are two ways to open Thermal Conductivity projects One is by using the New Thermal Conductivity command from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar and the other is by opening an existing Thermal Conductivity project gtc file from within the Thermal Conductivity module In the design studio only one Thermal Conductivity module can be open at a time New Projects New Thermal Conductivity projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Thermal Conductivity from either the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar The module opens directly into the Results panel Existing Projects Existing Thermal Conductivity projects may be opened at any time from within the Thermal Conductivity module by choosing Open from the Thermal Conductivity Module toolbar Saving Projects Thermal Conductivity projects may be saved at any time by clicking the save button on the Thermal Conductivity module toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the u
73. for all other elements besides the heat pump units in the system that may require energy input Again these data can be imported from a heat exchanger project if the data are in the project or can be entered manually Geothermal Heating In this section the user can enter details about the geothermal heating system s Equivalent Full Load Hours The user can enter the equivalent full load hours here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Peak Capacity The user can enter the peak capacity note that this is the peak load covered by the equipment and not the installed equipment capacity here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Average Heat Pump Efficiency Page 217 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Here the user enters the expected COP for the heating side of the system if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Note that if the user has imported the data from a vertical heat exchanger project that has monthly data calculated see chapter 4 then the imported COP is the average COP over the system lifetime and not the peak conditions COP Generally using the monthly data provides for a higher COP and lower operating costs since average fluid temperatures tend to be less extreme than the fluid temperatures during peak load conditions Circulation Pum
74. four time periods during the peak day and then uses a generalized form of the automatic pump selection sequence to match a particular type of pump to an entire installation For buried heat exchangers the model also uses weekly and annual operational time as parameters The hours can be computed from monthly loads data using the Equivalent Hours Calculator Chapter 3 In GLD Premier 2014 users have the option of calculating month by month inlet temperatures and or 8750 hourly inlet temperatures in the borehole design module Performing these calculations requires detailed monthly and or hourly loads data and therefore the average block module in the GLD Premier 2014 Edition accepts the input of monthly total and peak loads for both heating and cooling as well as hourly peak loads for both heating and cooling Note that while a user can design a system without these detailed hourly and monthly loads data he or she cannot perform detailed simulations without the data Loads modules are covered in detail in Chapter 3 Design Modules The GLD Geothermal Design Studio consists of the following three heat exchanger design modules The Borehole Design Module In fixed temperature mode this module models the lengths of bore required for a vertical borehole exchanger system In fixed length mode it models the inlet temperatures for a user defined borehole field length Additionally the borehole design module can model and graph the monthly
75. header is generally larger than the branch and circuit pipe sizes and branches are generally larger than the circuit pipe size Header Length Average Branch Length This is the designer defined one way length of the pipe from the installation to the water line and then from the water to the circuit pipes Different heat transfer calculations are used for the header pipe buried in the soil and the header pipe submerged in the water Soil Page 169 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module If a primary header enters the water 1t is automatically assumed that the branches have no soil component Likewise if branches enter the soil it is assumed that the primary header has no water component Head Loss per 100 feet This is the head loss for the particular style of pipe These values are not entered automatically Instead they come from designer s charts A chart in English units is included with GLD in the Pipe Tables section As mentioned above the designer must be aware that this value changes with pipe size temperature and flow rate The Soil panel is included only for the heat transfer calculations associated with the portion of the header pipe in the soil The model uses the undisturbed ground temperature of the soil as well as several other parameters associated with the installation location to determine the temperature at pipe depth on the coolest and warmest days of the year This temperature then is used to
76. heat pump These data have been included for use in pressure drop calculations performed in an upcoming release of GLD Residential In a future version of GLD Premier these data may also be utilized in conjunction with the new CFD module Capacity Power and Flow Rates The capacity power and flow rate information pertaining to the source side flow for both heating and cooling are entered into the two tabbed panels labeled Cooling and Heating in the Pump Edit pane An example of the Cooling panel is shown below in figure 2 4 The Heating panel follows an identical format although the temperatures will be different General a Heating Load Temperatures Load Flows Test Heat Pump Specifications for Cooling SOURCE FLOW RATE 1 FLOW RATE 2 EWT Capacity Power Capacity Power degF MBtushr kw MBtufhr kw 77 0 95 0 115 0 Coefficients Capacity Power Flow Factor Calculate Coefficients Fig 2 4 Heat Pump Specifications Cooling Page 44 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps As can be seen from the figure the source entering water temperature EWT is listed to the left and the capacity and power requirement of the unit at different flow rates are listed to the right Once the values are input the coefficients and flow factor can be calculated from the entered data The Calculate Coefficients button turns red when values are changed indicating that new coefficients must be calculated be
77. indicating that the pump information is from an external source The details section will no longer contain information about the pump manufacturer series or type The calculation portion of GLD will require at least the capacity and power data to utilize the pump properly The actual COP used in the calculations is determined from the capacity and the power not the input text box Other information may be added for the designer s reference Note When a custom pump is included its values will remain unchanged during the designing process Variations in inlet source or load temperatures or system flow rate will not affect a customized pump s data Automatic Heat Pump Selection Options for the Entire Zone Set Two controls are included with GLD that allow for an automatic selection of pumps throughout the entire set of zones This feature is useful when the pump set needs to be compared or changed or when modifications are required throughout the existing set These controls are necessary so that large sets of pumps can be changed or updated without having to step through each individual zone E Auto Select All Pumps The Auto Select All Pumps control performs the same function as the Auto Select button in the pump selection section of the zone data window except it performs the selection sequentially through all of the zones It uses the active heat pump series selected on the Heat Pumps tabbed panel Note Auto Select All Pump
78. matching the loads to the heat exchanger From the time specific loads data that the user provides GLD determines the maximum heating and cooling loads of the entire system and then uses these values to calculate the length of heat exchanger required lla Heat Pumps Loads a l i Bl SB 8 a F P Untitled zon Zone 1 Loads Panel Reference Label Design Day Loads Design Day Loads Days Occupied Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses per Week MBtu Hr MBtu Hr 7 0 8 a m Noon 0 0 0 0 es Noon 4 p m 0 0 0 0 transfer 4 p m 8 p m n ag Calculate Hours 8pm 8 a m Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours Heat Pump Specifications at Design ANS and Flow Rate Pump Name I Custom Pump e 11 Cooling Heating AAEN Capacity MBtu Hr 0 0 0 0 ue Power kw 0 00 0 00 EER COP 0 0 0 0 Details Flow Rate gpm 0 0 0 0 Clear Partial Load Factor 0 00 0 00 Flow Rate 3 0 gpmiton Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 CELE Fig 3 1 Zone Manager Loads Module Main View The Zone Manager loads module can be opened either from the Loads Menu or by clicking the Zone Manager toolbar button An example of the module opened to the Loads tabbed panel is shown in figure 3 1 The Heat Pumps tabbed panel will be discussed shortly Page 53 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones In the Main View Zones in GLD are organized in a list on the left side of the Loads tabbed panel Each zone panel
79. mode checkbox is marked the program is in automatic entry mode In manual entry mode the user manually selects and inputs the specific heat and density for the target solution as seen in figure 11 15 When the automatic entry mode checkbox is unmarked the program is in manual entry mode Solution Properties Y Automatic Entry Mode e by Weight by Volume Fluid Type a 11 3 Propylene Glycol a Freezing Point 25 F 11 3 by Weight Design Temperature 32 w F Specific Heat Cp 0 962 Btu F lbm Density rho 63 42 lb ft 3 Dynamic Viscosity u 6 127E 5 lbf s ft 2 Check Fluid Tables Fig 11 15 Solution Properties Data Entry Note Since solution properties vary considerably and non linearly with temperature type and percentage of additive GLD does not include detailed automatic antifreeze information for all conditions Generalized tables of data may be found in the Fluid Properties tables For all designs it is recommended that the designer manually enter the Page 264 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module desired values in the input text boxes to ensure that fluid properties match the design requirements Layout The Layout panel is the heart of the CFD module This is the panel in which the designer builds piping systems explores their fluid dynamics implications and then modifies the design manually or automatically as necessary The Layout panel can be
80. module This module is used in the design of vertical borehole systems It is one of the four design modules included with GLD Overview A design is only as good as the quality of the data that goes into it This is certainly the case with the GLD Borehole Design module Although GLD utilizes the best theoretical models available today the most accurate results will naturally result from the most accurate input parameters Because the calculations conducted here involve the combination of a large number of input parameters care must be taken to assure that proper values are verified before use Assuming that reasonable values are provided to the software the software will provide reasonable results General Features To aid in the data entry process the Borehole Design module in GLD consists of a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables efficiently For example parameters related to the soil are listed on the Soil panel while piping choices are listed on the U tube panel The Page 86 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module idea is that everything related to a project is presented simultaneously and is easily accessible at any time during the design process In the expanded user interface mode which can be expanded by double clicking on any of the tabs the most commonly modified parameters as well as calculation results are always visible as seen below in figure 4 1
81. module will flash and cycle indicating that GLD is working Because hourly simulations are computationally intensive it is recommended that the design optimize a design using the Design Day and Monthly Data methodologies described above first After a designer is comfortable with a design he or she optionally may run an hourly simulation over a design year to estimate system performance based on the more fine hourly loads data Note that after the user starts the hourly calculation a cancel button will appear that enables the user to end the process if necessary For the Hourly Data results the reporting section is separated into five subsections and one Graphing Module Results that are unique to the Hourly Data results compared to the Design Day results are displayed in green A sample screen for Hourly Data results can be seen in figure 4 24 The two lists on the Results panel are for heating and cooling In fixed length mode both heating and cooling results are printed in bold type so that they stand out The reason is that in fixed length mode performance calculations for both the dominant and non dominant sides are based on Page 119 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module the actual designer selected length of the heat exchanger Results for both sides are therefore relevant The first subsection deals with the bores including the total length the borehole number and the borehole length for one bore A common way to adj
82. not be able to take into account the fuel oil inflation rate when performing the NPV calculations This could lead to an inaccurate final cost analysis Enter the discount rate in the other text box This discount rate is used in the overall NPV calculations Conventional The GSA module enables designers to compare the costs of a geothermal system with up to five different conventional systems These conventional systems can include any combination of heating boiler furnace air source heat pump water source heat pump and cooling air cooled chiller water cooled chiller unitary air conditioner equipment After the users first selects a conventional system number 1 5 and then defines the equipment type and performance characteristics for that system number the program determines the energy requirements and operating costs for the system The parameters relating to the conventional system options are located in the Conventional panel as shown in figure 9 7 The Conventional panel is broken up into two sections alternate systems and system details Page 208 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module ne e FR s B S a Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives System EKO COOLING HEATING TOTAL Total Annual Power 32 912 0 kWh 623 0 kWh 33 535 0 kWh Water 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons Other None 1 327 4 therm Natural Gas COOLING HEATING Eqv Full Load Hours 1107 hr 623 hr
83. not have to worry about updating the pumps already matched to zones in GLD However the designer must be aware that sometimes this may result in a new pump size assignment due to capacity changes related to variations in temperature or flow If this is problematic custom pumps may be used to lock pump values into a zone However for proper modeling any customized pumps must be edited separately by the designer after the design parameters have been established Pump Performance Bracketing Feature The Average Block Loads Module offers the pump performance bracketing feature For a particular heat pump if a the user enters an inlet temperature that is outside of the performance range for a particular pump or b the program during a simulation calculates an inlet temperature that is outside of the performance range the program will provide a warning message as can be seen below Flow Rate 3 0 gpm ton Unit Inlet F 110 40 0 Value out of range for selected pump CID Fig 3 17 Pump Performance Bracketing Warning The Studio Link System The Studio Link system is a powerful feature in GLD that gives users the ability to link or to unlink the loads modules to or from the design modules When a loads module is linked to a Borehole Horizontal or Surface Water Design module all of the data in that loads module is transferred to the design module Once the connection is established the pertinent information is stored within the
84. panel in the new GSA module consists of three sub panels Lifecycle Annual and Analysis as can be seen in figure 9 12 Geothermal System Analyzer Module suso Results Geothermal Calculate 16 C Import Alternate EKD years Manual Annual Analysis li Air cooled Chiller Geothermal Boiler Variable Costs Energy 66 229 41 110 070 55 CO2 Emissions 15 338 64 24 199 71 Water 0 00 0 00 Maintenance 68 878 16 137 756 31 Mechanical Room Lease 34 932 42 69 864 85 Fixed Costs Installation Subsurface 108 000 00 Installation Equipment 448 000 00 356 000 00 Installation Controls 40 000 00 60 000 00 Tax Credits 59 600 00 saz Depreciation 113 240 00 27 600 93 Equipment Replacement 0 00 114 251 43 Salvage 252 044 78 92 448 89 Lifecycle Total 356 493 85 752 093 03 Fig 9 12 Geothermal System Tabbed Panel LifeCycle Sub Panel The Lifecycle sub panel contains results for the Net Present Value NPV lifecycle analysis over the selected timeframe The sub panel is divided into two sections Variable Costs and Fixed Costs In each of the two sections results are presented in two columns the first is for the geothermal system and the second is for the alternate system s When more than one alternate system has been defined users can scroll through the different alternate systems using the arrows Note that the presented costs are the summations of heating cooling and hybrid
85. paths The flow path s are as follows note that supply flowpaths use this symbol and return flowpaths use this symbol 4 Page 297 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module The first flow path gt Fluid flows from supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout into Circuit 1 lt Fluid flows from Circuit 1 into return pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout The second flow path gt Fluid flows from supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout into supply pipe B of GHX Header gt Fluid flows from supply pipe B of GHX Header into Circuit 2 lt Fluid flows from Circuit 2 into return pipe B of GHX Header lt Fluid flows from return pipe B of GHX Header into return pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 2 Figure 11 41 is an illustration of a four circuit two circuit per parallel loop direct return GHX Module While the figure looks somewhat complex because each individual piece is labeled numbered it will soon become clear that in the CFD module the layout is quite straightforward The GHX Module Supply Return Runout the GHX Header pipe pairs and their associated fittings are in black The GHX Circuits and their associated fittings are in red Between each connection a space has been added to visibly separate different sections of the system for easy comparisons with the layout structure in the CFD module To ensure clarity each individu
86. pump power and pump motor efficiency for each circulation pump and then the program will calculate the required input power for the pump Future versions of the software likely will have a dynamic circulation pump performance engine included to do this final calculation automatically Note that if a user manually enters a pump in the Circulation Pumps tabbed panel it will not be associated with a component in the Layout Manager Workspace Note that if a user modifies a piping design in the Layout Manager Workspace after having added a circulation pump as the fluid dynamics results update in the Layout Manager Workspace they will also update automatically in the Circulation Pumps tab as well Note that circulation pumps cannot be added to reverse return pipe pair components Page 351 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Deleting a Circulation Pump To delete a circulation pump the designer can right click on a component that has a circulation pump A screen similar to the one in figure 11 100 below will appear Layout Design and Optimization U Circuit 01 Add New Pipe Pair E 2S GHX Header S Add New Reverse Return Pipe Pair U Circuit Add New Circuit pga GHX He U Add New Ultra Manifold B86 AddNe w Manifold Add New GHX Module E Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Add Circulation Pump Remove Circulation Pump Fig 11 100 Deleting a
87. salvage value for the loopfield For the hardware both geothermal and conventional salvage values calculations are straight line and depend on user defined equipment replacement time periods the user can define these on the Other Costs tabbed panel The Renewable Heat Incentive is a UK specific incentive for geothermal systems Users can enter the incentive for each kBtu or kW of heat extracted from the geothermal formation Page 196 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module A Geothermal System Analyzer Module s BS a Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives Investment Tax Credit 10 Fixed Tax Credit 0 00 Project Tax Rate 20 1st Year Bonus Depreciation 100 Geothermal Depreciation Schedule M MACRS Geo Depreciation straight line 0 yr Conventional Depreciation Schedule 39 yr Salvage Value Calculations On Off Renewable Heat Incentive Renewable Heat Incentive 0 05 kBtu Fig 9 2 Incentives Panel Contents Other Costs Information pertaining to a variety of hard and soft costs can be found in the Other Costs panel This includes all of the baseline data for non utility costs including CO 2 emissions costs average building costs and equipment related costs Note that in GLD2014 the Other Costs tab is significantly enhanced compared to previous versions of the software All of the data entry options in the Other Costs panel are optional but by entering
88. some nomenclature are in parallel they are vertically stacked Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A U Circuit 01 U Circuit 02 GHX Header Section B B U Circuit 03 U circuit 04 Fig 11 43 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 3 in Layout Manager Workspace Can you find the parallel flow paths in figure 11 43 Remember parallel flow paths are vertically stacked The following paths are in parallel Circuit 1 and Circuit 2 are in parallel coming out of supplypipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA and returning to return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 and Circuit 2 are siblings that share the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA as a parent Similarly Circuit 3 and Circuit 4 are in parallel coming out of supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB and returning to the return pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB Circuit 1 Circuit 2 and supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB for this parallel flow path system flow comes from supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout and then branches in three directions to Circuit 1 Circuit 2 and supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section Remember that parallel flow means that the flow branches off in two or more directions In this case flow is branching off in three directions Three siblings Circuit 1 Circuit 2 and supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB s
89. subject to United States export control laws including the United States Export Administration Act and its associated regulations and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that Customer has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export re export or import the Software Restricted Rights The Software shall be classified as commercial computer software as defined in the applicable provisions of the Federal Acquisition Regulation the FAR and supplements thereto including the Department of Defense DoD FAR Supplement the DFARS The parties acknowledge that the Software was developed entirely at private expense and that no part of the Software was first produced in the performance of a Government contract If the Software is supplied for use by DoD the Software is delivered subject to the terms of this End User Agreement and either 1 in accordance with DFARS 227 702 1 a and 227 7202 3 a or 11 with restricted rights in accordance with DFARS 252 227 7013 c 1 i OCT 1988 as applicable If the Software is supplied for use by a Federal agency other than DoD the Software is restricted computer software delivered subject to the terms of this End User Agreement and i FAR 12 212 a ii FAR 52 227 19 or iii FAR 52 227 14 ALT IID as applicable General This End User Agreement will bind and inure to the benefit of
90. system if any costs Data are broken down into their constituent parts and displayed in the reports Page 222 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Variable costs include energy costs CO2 emissions costs water costs maintenance costs and mechanical room lease costs Costs are reported as 0 00 if one or more of the required and user defined variables used in the calculations have not been set For example if the user has selected a natural gas boiler as an alternate heating system but has not specified the maintenance costs for such a system then the maintenance costs will be reported as 0 00 Upon seeing the 0 00 the user can go back to the Other Costs panel input the maintenance costs return to the Results page and then hit Calculate again to recalculate the results Fixed costs include subsurface installation costs equipment installation costs controls installation costs tax credits depreciation equipment replacement costs and salvage residual value Note that values in parenthesis are negative numbers and are subtracted from the total cost calculations For example a tax credit reduces the total cost of the system and is therefore reported as a negative parenthesis bound number Annual Sub Panel The Annual sub panel contains variable costs for a single year of system operation It is useful for quickly understanding single year operational savings associated with the geothermal sys
91. the borehole length for one bore A common way to adjust the borehole length to a desired value is to change the borehole number or pattern on the Pattern panel The second subsection presents the predicted long term ground temperature change with respect to the average ground temperature of the installation Both temperatures are more or less identical are in bold and have relevance The temperatures are identical because they represent the average temperature change for the entire loopfield over the design lifetime Since there can be only one overall average and the borehole lengths for heating and cooling are defined and equal the ground temperature change prediction is reported in bold for both heating and cooling Page 113 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module FT Borehole Design Project BoreholeSample Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Desin Day s lt COOLING HEATING E 16020 0 16020 0 Borehole Number 60 60 Borehole Length ft 267 0 267 0 Ground Temperature Change F 1 4 1 4 Unit Inlet F 90 0 50 2 Unit Outlet F 100 0 44 2 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 916 4 810 7 Peak Load kBtu Hr 755 9 Peak Demand kW 56 4 Heat Pump EER COP 13 4 System EER COP 13 4 System Flow Rate gpm 189 0 Optional Hybrid System Off Cooling Update Reset Fig 4 19 Results Panel Contents Fixed Length Design Day The third subsection of the report lists the heat pu
92. to or to object to any distortion mutilation or other modification or other Page 11 PREFACE END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT derogatory action in relation to a work whether or not such would be prejudicial to the author s reputation and any similar right existing under common or statutory law or any country in the world or under any treaty regardless of whether or not such right is denominated or generally referred to as a moral right Confidential Information Customer agrees that Customer will not disclose or except as expressly permitted in this End User Agreement use any Software or other technical information disclosed to Customer by Gaia Confidential Information and that Customer will take all reasonable measures to maintain the confidentiality of all Confidential Information in Customer s possession or control which will in no event be less than the measures Customer uses to maintain the confidentiality of Customer s own information of equal importance Confidential Information will not include information that i is in or enters the public domain without breach of this End User Agreement ii Customer receives from a third party without restriction on disclosure and without breach of a nondisclosure obligation or iii Customer develops independently which Customer can prove with written evidence Customer acknowledges that the Software is a trade secret of Gaia the disclosure of which would cause substanti
93. to the graph More than one graph can be open at the same time enabling designers to quickly compare different designs Saved graphs can be found in the GLD Graph Images folder A dated monthly data text file containing the temperature data is generated and stored in the Monthly Data folder each time the Calculate button is pressed If necessary data from this file can be imported into Excel Page 118 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Hourly Data Results Results Subsections Fixed Length Mode For Hourly Data calculations fixed length mode is the only option available This is because the loopfield geometry must be fully defined including borehole depth before the calculations can be performed As a result when a designer selects the Hourly Data calculation methodology the program switches to and locks in to fixed length mode GLD calculate hourly inlet temperatures for a user defined modeling time period see figure 4 12 It is highly recommended that a designer changes the modeling time period to one year prior to hitting Calculate Extending the modeling time period beyond one or two years results in a geometric increase in required calculation time While a smaller loopfield modeled over a single year could take a few minutes to process a large loopfield modeled over several years could take GLD an entire evening to process Note that during the calculation process the Studio Link status lights at the bottom of the
94. to view all results Because of the diverse processes involved in the design process users have the flexibility of selecting which specific results they wish to see at a particular time and how they wish to see them Users can do so via the two results display buttons E When the user hits the left button the Review button the Review panel appears The Review panel is well suited for quickly reviewing a design It is explained in more detail later in this chapter When the user hits the right button the Display button a pop up window will appear as can be seen in figure 11 17 Page 266 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Multi Select X Review Pipe Pair Circuit Pipel Pipe 2 Sze Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop Total Branch Pressure Drop Group Name Fig 11 17 Display Options Pop Up Window As can be seen in figure 11 17 display options are broken into four groups Multi Select Review Component types Pipe Pair and Circuit Supply and Return Pipes Pipe 1 and Pipe 2 Details Size Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop and Group Name Each group is explored below Multi Select and Review Multi Select Selecting this option opens up a new window that enables a designer to select multiple parameters at the same time Review Selecting this optio
95. user can enter the equivalent full load hours here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Note that by default the equivalent full load hours value in the hybrid panel matches the full load hours in the geothermal panel If the user changes the value in the geothermal tabbed panel the value in the hybrid component panel changes as well The user does have the option though of changing this value in the hybrid tab so that it does not match the value in the geothermal tabbed panel Hybrid Type At present time the user has the option of selecting a cooling tower Fuel Type Electricity is the only option for the cooling tower at this time Hybrid System Capacity Here the user can enter the installed capacity of the hybrid system This value automatically is entered when the user imports a heat exchanger design project that has a hybrid component into the GSA module Hybrid Unit Efficiency This value is not applicable to the cooling tower selection and is grayed out Page 219 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Additional Power Here the user enters extra power requirements for the system such as fans circulation pumps etc Installation Area In this section the user enters the floor space square footage required by the selected cooling equipment For example if a cooling tower requires 400 ft of rooftop space the user can enter 400 ft here Of
96. values directly into the Pipe Resistance text box overriding all pipe resistance calculations Page 144 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Soil Input parameters relating to the soil are located in the Soil panel as shown in figure 5 10 These include the average ground temperature the soil thermal properties and the ground temperature corrections at a given depth Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kw Information Undisturbed Ground Temperature Ground Temperature 629 F Ground Temperature Corrections at Given Depth Thermal Conductivity 1 3 Btuf h ft F Thermal Diffusivity 0 75 ft 2 day Diffusivity Calculator Check Soil Tables Soil Thermal Properties Regional Air Temperature Swing 23 0 fF Winter Summer Coldest Warmest Day in Year 34 225 Check Swing Temperature Table Fig 5 10 Soil Panel Contents Undisturbed Ground Temperature The undisturbed ground temperature refers to the temperature of the soil below the surface layer where there is no longer a seasonal swing This value may be determined from regional data or by recording the actual stabilized temperature of water circulated through pipe in a test bore Soil Thermal Properties The soil thermal properties are a little harder to define and care must be taken to provide accurate values especially for the thermal conductivity The thermal diffusivity relates to the density of the soil and its moist
97. would be otherwise without the use of the hybrid equipment Cooling Hybrids In any case where the calculated boring lengths for cooling are longer than those for heating the difference in the lengths can be eliminated through the use of a secondary cooling system tied in parallel to the geothermal ground loop This requires that either the cooling hybrid capacity is chosen such that both the peak load and the annual load to the ground are balanced or if a full balance is unnecessary a capacity is chosen that allows for downsizing the loop to an acceptable length Heating Hybrids Heating hybrid systems are similar to cooling hybrid systems except that they are added in order to reduce the overall heating load on the system Page 153 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Cooling and Heating Hybrids In certain circumstances a design may warrant a combined cooling and heating hybrid design The Hybrid LoadSplitter Tool To design a hybrid system properly it is essential that the designer has a detailed understanding of the relationship between the peak and total loads of a system The brand new Hybrid LoadSplitter tool enables the designer to understand this relationship quickly accurately and graphically and then take advantage of this knowledge to engineer an appropriately sized hybrid system While the new LoadSplitter Tool superficially looks very similar to the hybrid sliders in previous editions of GLD its functional pe
98. 0 gpm 45 00 gpm U Circuit 05 300 0 ft 11 16 gpm 11 16 gpm 2S GHX Header Section 05 20 0 ft 5 33 84 gpm 56 16 gpm U circuit 06 300 0 ft 11 20 gpm 11 20 gpm 5 GHX Header Section 06 20 0 ft 22 64 gpm 67 36 gpm U Circuit 07 300 0 ft 11 27 gpm 11 27 gpm 95 GHX Header Section 07 20 0 ft 11 37 gpm 78 63 gpm U Circuit 08 300 0 ft 11 37 gpm 11 37 gpm Fig 11 101 Preparing to Export a Design The user must first display the results he or she wishes to export using the display controls described earlier in this chapter After the desired results are visible the user can hit this button and then name a csv file By default the file will be exported to the Piping folder Page 353 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Exporting a Circulation Pump Report To export a circulation pump report the user must first add pumps and then go to the Summary panel in the circulation pumps tab An example can be seen in figure 11 102 below Circulation Pump Information Total Circulation Pump Power kW Total Number of Circulation Pumps Fig 11 102 Preparing to Export a Circulation Pump Design The user can then hit the following button and then name a csv file By default the file will be exported to the Piping folder Concluding Remarks The new CFD module is a powerful program We appreciate your feedback and suggestions for the module so that we can continue to improve it over time Page 354 Index
99. 06 111 113 116 120 124 146 150 152 174 175 178 215 216 217 260 265 272 333 334 Performance Bracketing cccccesesseeeeees 19 70 Pipe Pair 253 255 257 267 268 280 281 286 287 289 292 294 295 297 299 302 305 306 307 308 315 316 319 325 328 Pipe Placement cionado 27 102 Pipe Resistance oooooncccnnnnccccnnccos 101 102 142 143 Pipe Size 142 162 166 168 169 184 241 250 252 254 255 256 257 258 259 262 274 277 279 293 318 323 328 339 345 346 Pipe E 253 274 318 345 Pipes 29 31 102 136 137 138 140 145 162 164 166 167 168 171 244 259 266 267 268 287 292 293 295 299 318 320 344 345 346 PipeTable oia 185 186 187 188 Piping design 240 241 272 333 335 344 350 Piping language ccsccccsccssseessecessessseesseeesnees 275 Pit 131 134 135 138 139 PLEM innn i tia anat 81 82 Polynomial ve 22 31 38 39 Power 22 33 36 37 38 39 43 44 45 46 58 61 69 90 91 116 117 120 122 198 208 209 210 211 212 213 216 217 219 220 228 235 236 237 238 241 247 248 250 275 320 341 347 350 Page 357 Index Index of Terms Power standard deviation ooooccccccnonnns 236 Power Variation o oocccccooooccccncconnnoonnnncncnnnnnono 236 Prediction TiMe ooooooocccccccccnnnnnnnns 105 106 141 Pressure Drop 22 43 100
100. 2 7 As can be seen from the figure both source and load entering water and air temperatures as well as flow rates can be edited directly Clicking the Test button performs the calculation to see what capacity power and EER COP result from the chosen input parameters Average values are used initially but by varying the parameters the designer can see how well the newly created model matches the data set used for data entry Page 47 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps General Cooling Heating Load Temperatures Load Flows Test Test SOURCE LOAD RESULTS EWT Flow EAT WB Flow Capacity Power EER degF gpm deg F CFM MBtufhr kW COP 35 0 EE 66 2 1140 331 3 12 10 6 EAT DB deg F 45 0 EE 68 0 1140 Je ala ia Y Fig 2 7 Heat Pump Test Panel Often any input errors will be evident immediately from the test by comparing the test results with the input sheet Additionally the user can use this test to make certain that the pump data are accurate over the particular range of temperatures flows etc that he or she typically uses and then modify the data if necessary Exiting the Edit Add Heat Pumps Module After editing or adding heat pumps and calculating all necessary coefficients the user should make sure that the pumps are saved by clicking the Save button on the Pump Series control bar When the pumps are securely saved the Save button will become disabled Click
101. 2 gpm Fig 6 7 Minimum Circuit Flow Rate Section of the Fluid Panel GLD uses this information in conjunction with the system flow rate to establish the maximum number of parallel circuits The flow rates required for non laminar flow for several antifreeze solutions are included as a table in the Fluid Properties set Exact values for a particular mixture may need to be determined independently by the designer Note once again that changes in the inlet source temperature or the system flow rate will cause an automatic update of the selected pumps Page 172 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Design Method Fixed Temperature Inlet Temperatures 55 0 sE 36 0 E Fig 6 8 Inlet Temperature Controls in Expanded User Interface Results There are several significant differences between the Surface Water Design module s Results panel and the Borehole Design module s Results panel These differences relate to the nature of the calculations as well as to the inclusion of the head loss calculation results Figure 6 9 shows a typical view of the Results panel Figure 6 10 shows the results display in the expanded user interface Figure 6 11 shows the Calculate button in the expanded user interface Again there are two lists shown on the Results panel one for heating and one for cooling Although all of the numbers resulting from both sets of calculations are valid the side with the lo
102. 20 below indicating that the loads data in the Average Block Loads module is powered by an hourly data set Design Day Loads 7 0 Days Week 7 Hourly Data Fig 3 20 Hourly Data Check Box Because the hourly data set is so extensive it is not possible to review the data set hour by hour from within GLD However it is possible to view the hourly data organized into a monthly data format by hitting the Monthly Loads button on the Average Block Page 76 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Loads module after importing the hourly data This can be seen in figure 3 15 Note that when viewing the hourly data in the Monthly Data framework the Update button is deactivated indicating that the hourly data cannot be modified from within the GLD framework If the designer wishes to modify the hourly loads data set the designer must do so from within his or her energy simulation program Importing Monthly and Hourly Loads From Excel and Spreadsheets Monthly Loads Data There are three ways to import monthly loads data from Excel or another spreadsheet into the Average Block Loads Module All three methods require the loads data to be in the following format Each row of data is for one month of the year with the first populated row representing January loads and the last populated row representing December loads Cooling Total Cooling Peak Heating Total Heating Peak kBtu kBtu hr kBtu kBtu hr 55287
103. 231 232 241 247 249 262 267 268 273 284 285 288 334 335 344 348 349 Printing 53 66 94 158 175 176 177 224 239 352 Printing Reports 158 175 224 239 352 Program Feature Comparison Program InstallatiON o ooooocconoccnocncocccoonncnnnonns Project reports 33 130 158 175 177 178 179 194 Properties window 244 277 280 315 Pump power calculator ooooooociocccncncnnnno 91 Pump Selection 21 24 51 53 54 58 59 60 61 68 69 PUM plist 22224000202 eects 14 15 41 47 48 Pumplist gld cc cccsccssseeeseeseees 14 15 41 47 48 Purge Mode iii 264 269 Purging flow rate 106 241 245 260 261 262 269 341 342 343 344 347 Purging PUMP crios 343 Purging velocity o oooooccccoconocncoocononnnonnnonnnos 261 262 Q 117 122 R Regional Air Temperature Swing 145 170 Re Installation ooonnnnnnnicicccnnnanannncnos 14 15 16 Renewable Heat Incentive 189 194 195 223 Replacement ii 189 191 195 201 205 222 Reports 19 20 21 26 33 34 36 53 56 86 89 109 111 113 115 120 130 132 150 158 160 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 190 191 198 221 224 225 227 228 230 232 234 236 239 244 246 352 353 Return 42 59 60 68 91 95 140 164 165 167 168 222 223 240 241 242 243 244 251
104. 27 fe 12916 EDU FEA T TT ETA 34701 U Circuit 06 i 2 25 ft s 2 25 Rje 12814 3E GHX Header Section 06 i 1 4 2 2 65 ft s 4 07 ft s 19033 U Circuit 07 s E 2 23 ft s 2 23 ft s 12654 2C GHX Header Section 07 a 3 14 ft s 4 75 ft s 14242 U circuit 08 f 2 00 ft s 2 00 ft s 11372 Fig 11 95 An Optimized and Auto Sized Reverse Return Headering System The designer can now return to the Fluid panel to view the required purging flow rate for this now auto optimized system The flow rate of 74 1 gpm can be seen in figure 11 96 below Fluid Information Peak Load Flow Rate gpm 30 0 Installed Capacity Flow Rate gpm 60 0 Y Auto Adjust Y Auto Size Minimum Maximum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 0 5 0 Fig 11 96 74 1 gpm Will Purge The Optimized System Purging Flow Rate gpm 741 Adding Circulation Pumps The designer has the option of adding one or more circulation pumps into his or her piping system By adding circulation pumps the CFD module can not only keep track of them individually by can keep track of their cumulative pump power kW requirements This is useful because the circulation pumps for an optimized piping system should ideally consume no more than 10 of the total power consumed by the full system Page 348 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Remember that in GLD 2014 the piping system calculations do not include heat pump pressure drop In this section we will exp
105. 280 281 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 304 311 315 316 322 325 327 328 330 335 342 343 344 345 346 Supply Return Runout 242 243 253 254 255 256 257 273 284 285 286 288 289 292 293 294 296 297 299 300 301 302 304 311 315 316 328 330 Swing Temperature ccesseeeeeee 145 170 184 System flow rate 37 61 70 91 106 107 111 113 116 120 146 150 162 171 174 T Table 35 44 102 143 166 169 171 182 183 184 185 186 187 202 203 204 230 VU gi eh 189 191 194 222 Tax CreditS ooooooncccccccccccccnnncncnononononnnnnns 194 222 Temp vs LN Time ooooooonocccocccooconocnnonnconnnonononos 230 Testihg acoso ii 46 200 226 Tf 33 117 122 Theory 26 29 36 37 109 114 115 119 228 Thermal conductivity 13 18 32 33 34 36 100 103 104 105 130 144 145 158 181 184 226 227 228 229 230 232 234 235 237 239 Thermal Conductivity Module 181 227 228 229 Thermal diffusivity 91 93 104 144 184 233 235 236 Thermal resistance ooonnnnnnncnnnnnnnacinccccninnno 29 100 Transfer Program to New Computers 17 Trench 24 28 29 30 131 134 135 136 137 138 139 147 150 Trial versi naoin eass asii iei 16 Typical Operation 88 133 161 162 193 230 245 U Ultra Manifold
106. 335 382470 1060 46953 345 150525 1105 106020 831 98665 745 194889 1008 37332 325 323767 1066 11014 115 424979 1252 291 22 567918 1325 0 0 516207 1260 0 0 381425 1245 61574 87 204515 938 98623 225 69766 377 144339 200 52249 347 206000 897 The first way to import the loads data is the copy paste method Select ONLY the 12 x 4 block of loads data and copy it Ctrl C In the Average Block Loads module click the Monthly Data button and figure 3 13 will appear Hit the Excel icon as shown in figure 3 13 and the data will be copied automatically into the Average Block Loads module Page 77 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones The second way to import the loads data is to save the Excel file as a csv file into the Loads Files Monthly Data Files folder To import this csv file the user can click on the Import button at the top of the Average Block loads module It looks like this 2 Navigate to the csv file of interest and import it into GLD The third way to import monthly data from an Excel file is by using the Import Loads command found in the Design Studio Loads menu Select Import Loads and an Import Loads window similar to that in Fig 3 17 will appear GLD expects the Excel data to be in the above order and format To import the Excel data simply highlight the four columns in the Excel spreadsheet and copy them onto the clipboard Ctrl C Note highlight only the numeric data DO NOT highlight the column and r
107. 4 to 15 per foot of bore range The Equipment Costs sub panel can be seen in figure 9 5 below Subsurface Equipment System Type Geothermal Heat Pump Fuel Type Electricity Installation 10 00 ft 2 Maintenance 0 10 ft 2 yr Controls 1 00 ft 2 Replacement 21 yr Fig 9 5 Equipment Costs Sub Panel The Equipment sub panel contains inputs enable the GSA module to calculate costs related to the mechanical systems inside the building These costs include equipment and controls installation costs system maintenance costs and equipment replacement costs Typically designers and engineers specify these costs on a per square foot of the total conditioned space square footage basis The GSA module can take these values into account in conjunction with the total structure floor space in the average building costs section when calculating the annual and NPV lifetime costs associated with different HVAC systems The system type dropdown menu enables designers to select one of eight different types of systems including geothermal heat pumps boilers furnaces air source heat pumps gas fired heat pumps air cooled chillers water cooled chillers and unitary air conditioners The fuel type dropdown menu enables designers to select one of several different fuel types for the system type that the designer selected above Each of these system type fuel type combinations has four optional cost parameters asso
108. 50 259 260 261 262 265 266 267 269 272 273 294 333 334 338 341 342 343 344 347 349 Fluid 12 25 26 29 31 33 34 35 88 106 107 108 109 111 113 115 116 117 120 122 134 146 147 148 150 152 163 169 171 175 181 183 187 216 217 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 249 250 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 267 272 8 274 277 280 282 285 286 288 289 290 291 294 296 297 334 339 342 343 344 347 350 Fluid Properties table ooooooocinccincccooccoooncoonoon 183 Fluid Table ocio 185 186 187 188 Fuel inflation rate oooooooccnncccioconocccoonconnncnnncnnnnos 207 Fuel type 191 198 201 203 205 206 207 208 212 218 219 Full load hours 56 57 66 83 84 209 G General Information o ococonnnnoconcccnncnnnnnnns 43 273 G FUNCHION cita 28 GHX Circuit 287 289 292 301 GHX Module 241 243 250 251 252 255 260 262 268 270 281 282 284 285 286 287 288 289 Page 356 Index Index of Terms 290 292 294 296 297 299 300 301 302 304 311 312 314 315 320 321 322 323 325 328 329 330 333 335 337 340 341 342 344 346 GLD System Requirements oocooocccccoocccconcccnanacananns 13 Graphing Module 68 114 116 117 118 121 230 233 235 237 Graphs 19 20 34 35 117 121 122 131 150 152 168 181 182 183 190 223 227 230 233 234 235 237 GridBuil
109. 88 0 987 2 38 6 586 193 683 ojojo jo o oO O O In the above formats one hour of cooling heating data is in each row The three blank rows after the top title row are critical and must be included to ensure import fidelity Save the file as a csv file into the Loads Files Hourly Data Files The csv file can then be imported using the import button Page 79 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Importing Loads Into the Zone Manager Loads Module Importing loads into the Zone Manager is a simpler proposition because the Zone Manager uses only Design Day and annual energy loads data for its calculations at present time Monthly and hourly data sets are not used by the Zone Manager for design work Users can import commercial loads programs data by clicking on the Import button found in the Zone Manager loads modules and import Excel files data by using the Import Loads command from the Design Studio Loads menu Importing Design Day Loads From 3rd Party Programs Users can import Design Day and annual energy loads from the Trane Trace program for example one zone at time if desired The user first can select a zone of interest see description of Zone Manager above and then can hit the import button 2 This automatically opens the file dialog box in the Loads Files folder and displays several subfolders from which files that can be imported When the user selects a valid import fi
110. APTERS icencaccnsadns atacadas 50 LOadS ANd ZONES viii ie easan aa aiana anaa Aka aa eaaa Sasain Ena 50 The Ground Loop Design Loads Model cccccecscessessscesscesecesececeaecaeescecaeeeneeeaseneeseresereneeneeeaees 50 Lone Filesi nnn ws Meise es tends ei ista 51 The Zone Manager Loads Module cccceccsssesseeseeeseeeeceecesecesecaecaecsaecaeeeaeseceeeeeeeeesereneeneenaees 52 Managing Zones in the Loads Tabbed Panel cceeceescceseeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeerenseensees 53 New and CP a Pe 53 Remove ind Clin iio 54 REID e EEEE 54 Summary View Toggle Button cccccesccsseesseeseeesceesceeeeeeeeeeessecsaeenseeeeeaeenaes 54 Entering Loads ii A ee eee eae RS 55 Design Day Loads sci ia 55 Annual Equivalent Full Load HoOUSS ooococcoccnocononinononononononnnonncnnonn nc nononc nono noo 56 Equivalent Hours Calculator ccccccesccsseesseesceesceeeceecesceeeenseenseenseenaeenaeeneees 57 Days per Week ics 2eccs dt iz 58 Pump Matching and Selection ii in 58 AULO SClECt ent dec cat le lech eh e e ol tae lla e nl ty 59 Manual Selects isin rad e de teta Do o ied ae 59 Details 2 citer O NS 60 ON 60 Custom Pump Customization ccccesccesecesecssecseecseeesseeeeeseeeeeeeereneeeneenteenaees 61 Automatic Heat Pump Selection Options for the Entire Zone Set 61 Auto Select All Pumps misil dels 61 Update Reselect Current PUMPS cccceecceseceseceseceseesecesecseecaeeeaeeeseeneeensesrens 62
111. B 9 MonthlyData_07 20 2010_18 55_57 txt a Graph Data Average EWT Monthly Data 159 T T T 80 Power I T Borewall rT 70 F Average Exit WT Y Average EWT F Minimum EWT I Maximum EWT Temperature F 2 e M Show Title V Show Legend 40 L 1 L 1 72 108 Time Months Figure 4 23 The Graphing Module The new Graphing Module in GLD Premier 2014 is much more powerful than the graphing functions in previous versions of GLD In the new module users can left click the mouse and drag a box around an area of interest in the graph Users can then release the mouse button to zoom in on the area of interest This process can be repeated multiple times Users can right click the mouse at any time to zoom out to the original view Within the graph the designer can choose which data to view save and or print Options include Q heat transferred to or from the ground heat pump power consumption borehole temperature Tf the average temperature of fluid in the borehole calculated as the average of exiting and entering temperatures average exiting water temperature average entering water temperature and minimum a variation of the average calculated from the application of short term heating loads and maximum a variation from the average calculated from the application of short term peak cooling loads entering water temperatures The designer can also add a title and legend
112. Circulation Pump After the user deletes the circulation pump the record for the particular circulation pump will be deleted from the Circulation Pumps tabbed panel as well Note that if the user manually added a circulation pump directly into the Circulation Pumps panel and not through the Layout Manager Workspace then the user must manually delete the circulation pump from the Circulation Pumps panel as well Page 352 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Printing Reports Both a CFD piping report and a circulation pump report can be exported from GLD and into a csv file format for easy review and subsequent use in spreadsheet programs The process for doing so is as follows Exporting a Piping Report To export a piping report the user must first complete a design and go to Review mode An example can be seen in figure 11 101 below Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Al B Name Pipe 1 Size i Pipe 2 Leng Pipe 1 Flow Rate Pipe 2 Flow Rate GHX Module Supply Return Runout 2 2 200 0 ft 200 0 ft 90 00 gpm 90 00 gpm U Circuit 01 300 0 ft 11 37 gpm 11 37 gpm 25 GHX Header Section 01 20 0 ft E 78 63 gpm 11 37 gpm U Circuit 02 300 0 ft 11 27 gpm 11 27 gpm 36 GHX Header Section 02 20 0 ft 67 36 gpm 22 64 gpm U Circuit 03 300 0 ft 11 20 gpm 11 20 gpm 35 GHX Header Section 03 20 0 ft 56 16 gpm 33 84 gpm U Circuit 04 300 0 ft 11 16 gpm 11 16 gpm 2 GHX Header Section 04 20 0 ft A 45 0
113. Dongle Installation is Complete ccecccssccsseesseeseeesceeeceeenseenseceaeeaeeaeceeeaeeenes 17 How To Transfer the Program Between Computers cc ccccceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeennees 17 Dongle Activation for Apple Macintosh Computers 00 0 0 cccesseeseceeeeeceseeeeeseceeeeeeneeeres 17 CHAPTER e EE E E 18 Ground Loop Design Overview cccceseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 General Program Features ui A td 18 New in Premier 2014 Edition 0 ec eecesesssssecseeseceeeeeeeeceeeeeceaecseesecaeveeenaeeeeeaecaeeaecneeetenee 18 The Design Studio A A a eR ee E 19 Customization ia A tate eae ea heal 20 CUSTOM LOBOS ii dd ceovtaabe 20 Metric English Uli E Be 20 InternationaliZ O o aii 21 Heat Pump and Zone Loads Modules Introduction c cccesceeseeseceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereneeenteensees 21 Heat Pump Module iii A a Rae 22 Z nes Loads Modules ci o Ra ee eats 23 Zone Manager Loads Module ccccescesseeseceneceseceeeceeeseeeeeeseeeereeereneeenseenaees 23 Page 2 PREFACE Contents Average Block Loads Module ccccccecscesscessceeecesecesecaeecseeeseeseeeerenseeneeenrenren 23 Design Modules 2c 64 sca sie eet ton ee e ita rae ae 24 Borehole Design Modulesc 22 4 cc enchct eis eek Hohn td 25 Description Ae 25 Theoretical Basis caida acted oe aac vei Mio oa as eevee eases 26 Horizontal Design Module coord a ante 28 Description adi a cita 28 Theoret
114. EATING COOLING HEATING F Borehole Design Project BoreholeSample Total Length ft 18848 5 18848 5 Peak Unit Inlet F 83 7 49 6 Borehole Length ft 342 7 342 7 Peak Unit Outlet F 93 3 46 1 Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Results Fuia Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kW Information Calculate Monthly gt COOLING HEATING Calculate EX Total Length ft El COOLING HEATING Oren N DAR Y 4 Total Length ft 18848 5 18848 5 Borehole Length ft Prediction Time 10 0 years Borehole Number 55 55 Ground Temperature Change AS Length ft i 342 7 342 7 Peak Unit Inlet F P a E Ground Temperature Change F N A N A Peak Unit Outlet F Fixed Length Peak Unit Inlet F 83 7 49 6 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr Aone ni Peak Unit Outlet F 93 3 46 1 Peak Load kBtu Hr nr Mis Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 1330 5 750 0 Peak Demand kW Peak Load kBtu Hr 1330 5 750 0 Heat Pump EER COP Borehole Length 343 ft Peak Demand kW 89 9 53 9 Seasonal Heat Pump EER COP E Heat Pump EER COP 14 7 4 1 Avg Annual Power kWh E 2 90E 4 Seasonal Heat Pump EER COP 18 7 4 4 System Flow Rate gpm y 187 5 mios il Avg Annual Power kWh 4 12E 4 2 90E 4 A pean pene eee Borehole Number 55 Optional Hybrid System O Rows Across 11 System Flow Rate gpm 332 6 187 5 Cooling Heating Rows Down 5 Optional Hybrid System Off Separation 20 0 ft Cooling Heating Update j 0 09 Reset 0
115. ER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Return Piping Style This section stores information related to direct and reverse return systems Return Type Return type is locked at direct return since reverse return Manifolds are rarely if ever used Section Outlet Information The section outlet information refers to how the outlets in the Manifold connect to GHX Modules via the GHX Module Supply Return Runouts Section Outlet Number Here the user enters the number of outlets there are in the Manifold Vault that connect to GHX Modules via the GHX Module Supply Return Runouts Section Outlet Separation Here the user enters the distance separating the section outlets in the Manifold Vault Section Outlet Pipe Size Here the user enters the outlet size connecting to GHX Modules via the GHX Module Supply Return Runout s Supply Return Runout Information The Manifold Supply Return Runout information refers to the pipe pair that is the parent of the Manifold Vault For example in an in building Manifold system the Supply Return Runout information would likely pertain to the pipe pair going to from the Manifold and to from the circulation pump house or equivalent One Way Length Here the user enters the one way length of the supply pipe The return pipe will default to the same length Page 256 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Pipe Size Here the user enters the Supply Retur
116. ER 4 The Borehole Design Module Exporting an APS file If a designer imported an hourly APS file from the IES lt VE gt for use in GLD the designer can export an APS file as well for use in the lt VE gt The user can do so by Design a borefield with the APS loads file Run a one year hourly simulation Go to the File menu gt Export gt Export APS file The APS file will be exported to the APS Files folder Printing Reports Reports of the active project can be printed at any time from the Design Studio using the toolbar print button or from the File menu gt Print Two project reports and four monthly hourly inlet temperature reports are available In the concise and detailed reports information printed includes all of the input parameters from the design module along with the associated results In the concise and detailed reports the zone and loads information is not included with the report and must be printed separately from the Loads panel The filename of the zon file associated with the project report is also listed on the reports The other four inlet temperature reports offer different combinations of input parameters loads and monthly inlet temperatures that designers can choose among depending on their reporting needs More information on reports can be found in Chapter 7 References Francis E Editor Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 3 Edition Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute p 186 Prentice
117. GLD may have new reference files and new versions of FluidTables html SoilTables html or PipeTables html If this is the case then any custom changes to these files made by the user may be overwritten during a new installation Although the linked files will remain the user is advised to make backup files of all customized reference files before new GLD installations or updates Concluding Remarks The reference files in GLD are added entirely for the user s convenience Designers should find the customizable geothermal Design Studio an ideal and familiar environment in which they can conduct their work with the highest levels of efficiency and confidence V gt Page 189 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module This chapter describes how to use the Geothermal System Analyzer Module a module that models both hard and soft costs associated with geothermal and standard HVAC systems All of the calculations fundamentally are based on data provided by the designer providing for the greatest range of flexibility and accuracy The Geothermal System Analyzer Module is a major update to the GSA module found in previous versions of GLD Overview When designers architects and building owners are deciding whether or not to install a ground source heat pump system they must consider a variety of factors including cost Cost means different things to different people Some t
118. GLD2014 for any reason existing work files pumps and zone files will not be affected However the pumplist gld file will be overwritten and any customized data reference files need to be protected see below Note The file Pumplist gld in the GLD pumps folder will be overwritten upon re installation Ifthe user has added pumps other than those originally included with the program this file should be copied or moved to a backup directory prior to removal and re installation After re installation the Pumplist gld file can be returned to the GLD Pumps folder or the desired contents can be added to the contents of the new Pumplist gld file using a simple text editor like Notepad exe The format of the file is provided below Pumplist gld Pump List File Number of Manufacturers Integer First Manufacturer Name Text Street Address Text City State Zip Text Country Text Telephone Number Text Number of Different Series for this Manufacturer Integer Example 2 Series 1 Name Text Series 1 filename without hpd extension Text Date Entered Text Example 2001 10 05 Series 2 Name Text Series 2 filename without hpd extension Text Date Entered Text Example 2001 10 06 Second Manufacturer Name Text Street Address Text Alternatively any pump files not included with the setup package may be added from within the program itself using the method described in Chapter 2 und
119. GSA module breaks the conventional system analysis into separate heating and cooling systems analysis If a user wants the program to estimate maintenance costs for a roof DX gas boiler system the user must first select the unitary air conditioner choose a fuel type and then enter the maintenance costs associated with the DX system The user must then select a boiler choose the appropriate fuel type and then enter the maintenance costs associated with the gas boiler This system while slightly more labor intensive for the user provides for the highest degree of analysis flexibility Experienced HVAC engineers also may have a good rule of thumb estimate for the per square foot controls costs for a variety of HVAC systems Users can enter per square foot controls costs values for the different systems following the methods outlined above Finally experienced HVAC engineers also may have a good idea about the replacement time period for different types of equipment There is a fairly wide consensus within the industry that geothermal heat pumps have 22 23 year replacement time periods ASHRAE publishes some data on equipment life expectancies in its Handbook but much of this data is from the 1970s and may lack statistical validity In addition ASHRAE has a website http xp20 ashrae org publicdatabase that while difficult to navigate has some more recent data If a designer is doing a financial comparison and not getting any output results
120. Germany Page 225 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Cane D et al 1997 Survey and Analysis of Maintenance and Service Costs in Commercial Building Geothermal Systems Caneta Research Inc for the Geothermal Heat Pump Consortium RP 024 Chiasson A 2006 Final Report Life Cycle Cost Study of a Geothermal Heat Pump System BIA Office Bldg Winnebago NE Feasibility Studies and Life Cycle Cost Analysis Oregon Institute of Technology Dohrmamn D R and Alereza T 1986 Analysis of Survey Data on HBVAC Maintenance Costs ADM Associates Inc for ASHRAE Transactions 92 2A Page 226 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module V CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module This chapter describes how to use the GLD thermal conductivity module a module that enables designers to quickly analyze test data collected from thermal conductivity test units such as the GeoCube Overview For commercial vertical and horizontal heat exchangers an accurate assessment of soil thermal properties soil temperature conductivity and diffusivity is essential Even a small percentage error in thermal property estimates can lead to either excessive installation costs or system underperformance Consequently in many cases in situ thermal conductivity tests are well worth the investment Until recently two modalities have dominated conductivity testing In the first designers and engineers have outsourced conductivi
121. LTS The Review Panel displays results in a classic view that is quick and easy to understand Users can access Review Panel results by using the Review icon button which is the middle button in the image below Calculate B When a user pushes the middle button a screen similar to the one in figure 11 88 will appear results expanded manually for ease of viewing Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Tp Peak Load Nape Pipe 1 Velocty Ripe ua Alphabetic Categorized O Circuit 01 U Greuit 02 i Diritto Rouan U Circuit 03 88 FRY El Fittings Supply U arcuit 04 E Flow Rate U Circuit 05 El General U Circuit 06 88 ft E Pipe 1 Supply U Circuit 07 89 fu El Pipe 2 Return 90 ft s El Pressure Drop Pipe 1 Pressure Drop ft hd 1 9 Pipe 2 Pressure Drop ft hd 1 9 Return Fitting 1 Pressure Drop 0 00 Supply Fitting 1 Pressure Drop 0 00 Total Branch Pressure Drop ft 6 8 z Total Child Pressure Drop ft hc 3 0 Name Pipe 1 Veloci Pipe 1 Reynold s Number Total Local Pressure Drop ft h 3 7 M Circuit 01 0 90 ft s 5091 E Reynold s Number U Circuit 02 0 89 ft s Pipe 1 Reynold s Number 22307 A 3 Pipe 2 Reynold s Number 22307 U Circuit 03 0 88 ft s O U Circuit 04 0 88 ft s Pipe 1 Velocity ft s TT U Circuit 05 0 88 ft s Pipe 2 Velocity ft s 2 17 U Circuit 06 0 88 ft s E Volume U Circuit 07 0 89 ft s U circuit 08 0 90
122. Log Conductivity Calculator Page 105 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Diffusivity Calculator For the designer s assistance GLD includes a Diffusivity Calculator that can be used to determine the actual diffusivity 1f all the soil parameters are known It requires knowledge of the thermal conductivity the dry specific heat and density and the moisture level in the soil An image of the diffusivity calculator is shown in figure 4 13b Diffusivity Calculator lol xi r Thermal Diffusivity Calculator Thermal Diffusivity 0 ft 2 day Soil Rock Specific Heat Dry Btu deg F lbm Thermal Conductivity 1 30 Btu h ft deg F Poza Mar Soil Rock Density Dry Ibfft 3 Moisture 0 20 200 Close Fig 4 13b Diffusivity Calculator Modeling time Period In GLD ten years is used as a standard length of time for the ground temperature to stabilize although longer time periods may be entered if desired When excessive ground water movement is known to occur one year is sometimes used as the modeling time period In this case it is assumed that the ground temperature stabilizes in a single year due to the neutralizing effects of the ground water movement The modeling time prediction time period can also be viewed and modified in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 14 X t gt Page 106 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Calculations Calculate
123. NT End User Agreement CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE BY USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU ARE AGREEING TO USE THE SOFTWARE SOLELY IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS INTENDED USE AND YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS END USER AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS END USER AGREEMENT PROMPTLY RETURN AND DO NOT USE THE SOFTWARE Single User License Subject to the terms and conditions of this End User Agreement Celsia LLC doing business as Gaia Geothermal Gaia and its suppliers grant to you Customer a non exclusive non transferable dongle based license to use the GROUND LOOP DESIGN software program in object code form and all related materials included herewith including written materials binders and other containers hereinafter the Software on supported operating systems Use Upon a receipt of full payment by Gaia or a Gaia authorized reseller of the applicable license fees Customer will be able to use this Software pursuant to the limitations set forth herein Limitations Customer s full use of this Software is limited to the number of authorized licenses Customer has purchased Customer agrees to use reasonable efforts to protect the Software from any unauthorized use modification reproduction distribution and publication Customer may not transfer any of the rights granted to Customer hereunder unless Customer receives prior written authorization from Gaia and only if Customer transfers all of
124. Projects E E O 191 DA a La E E esa ns E o E 192 Importing Data from an Open Heat Exchanger Design Project oo o 192 EXI a Ko e n E E A T 193 Saving Projects ui ET A A 193 Typical Oper eener n i i E E E T A i ai 193 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels ccecccescceseesseesseesceeeeeeeeeeeceseeeseceseceaeesaecaaecseeeaeenaeeaeenes 194 Incentives Tax Depreciation and RHI esssseesssesessesersreseesssstseessesresreseeseeseeresseeeessee 194 Emissions Costs rconoir i KE EOR O Ra 198 Average Building Costs si sicccscccccascesccccete cee idee idee a a R a 199 System Related Costs iii as 200 Utility Costs ini A ri 206 Rates for Common Fuel imc ae 206 Annual Inflation Rates cinc ira aaa 207 Conventional ica aaa 207 Alternate It ita aaa 208 System Det Sicilias 209 E wanes ra Re ee 209 Equivalent Full Load Hours ccscssccsssssesessconscsssensesnsenseenseensens 209 Equipments PE a 209 Power Sour E eiii tii 209 Installed Capacity aoe E E E eee 209 ERCE Y e e E E E RO ees 210 Extra PO We iii 210 Installation Ara ii aa 210 Water Usage Rate ss scvscsccrsdecssceeteesanesenadendscavsdsorsivayectovtsvensstoviiessavessets 210 J aA ni aY ANET ESS E EEE E EE ERES 210 Equivalent Full Load Hours 0 c cccceeeseeseceseeeeceeecseeeseeeseeseeeneeneeees 210 Equipment Type seee e N EEn EN eaa 210 Power SOULE its dla 211 Installed Capacity innen a e aas 211 SN 211 Extra PO WE to
125. SDR11 y C Double Flow Type Turbulent y Radial Pipe Placement Borehole Diameter C Close Together Borehole Diameter 5 50 in A pret eae Backfill Grout Information T Along Outer Wall Thermal Conductivity 1 08 Btul htferor Ecco Fig 4 10 U Tube Panel Contents Pipe Parameters The pipe parameters are entered in the Pipe Parameters section They include the pipe resistance and pipe outside diameter followed by the configuration and placement of the pipe in the bore GLD calculates the convective resistance using the Dittus Boelter correlation for turbulent flow in a circular tube Incropera and DeWitt 1990 The calculations use average values of the Reynolds number to represent the different types of flow with values of Re 1600 3150 or 10000 for laminar transition and turbulent respectively The calculations also use average values of viscosity and the Prandtl number for water taken at a temperature of 70 F gt x Page 102 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Using the standard expression for resistance of a hollow cylinder Incropera and DeWitt 1990 the program can calculate an approximate value for the pipe resistance It assumes HDPE pipe with a conductivity of 0 225 Btu h ft F The pipe resistance varies with the pipe style and flow The user can select the size and type of pipe from the appropriate selection boxes If another pipe diameter is
126. Section The surface water report has five sections The first deals with the circuit pipe and includes the total length the length for one circuit the number of circuits and the maximum allowable number of parallel circuits shown in red If the maximum allowable number of parallel circuits exceeds the actual number of circuits the actual number of circuits may be increased in the Piping panel to reduce the individual circuit lengths and thus reduce head losses However this type of reduction is not always necessary or desirable Other ways of increasing the maximum allowable number of parallel circuits include changing the system flow rate or the minimum circuit flow rate for non laminar flow The second section lists different temperature variables The first two of these are Source inlet and outlet temperatures The final variable is the approach temperature which is the difference between the pond temperature and the desired inlet source temperature Note In surface water heating applications although the solution within the pipe may not freeze the freezing temperature of the body of water is generally 32 F If the heat pump outlet temperature is too far below this value the water may freeze on the pipe greatly reducing its heat transfer characteristics and potentially leading to system failure The designer must always pay attention to the outlet temperature value for this reason As with the Borehole Design module the third se
127. Sending Data Third Light from Left ooooconiconincnociconinnnoonnonnconocononononnnonnncnnnonno 72 Broken Connection Rightmost Light ooooonconinnnnnniccnoonnonnconocnnconnocnnonnnonnnonnnnos 72 Importing Loads Data From External Programs oooooconncnocnccnncnonconononononncnnnononnnonn conocio nono nnncnn cinco 72 Page 4 PREFACE Contents Importing Loads Into the Average Block Loads Module oonconnconicniccicccnocnoonconnconoconocnnons 73 Importing Monthly and Hourly Loads From 3rd Party Programs 00 73 Monthly Loads Data ici 73 Hourly Loads Dita Heke Ae 75 Importing Monthly and Hourly Loads From Excel and Spreadsheets 76 Monthly Loads Datars cc ccc ced td 76 Houtly Loads Dita n i ice 77 Importing Loads Into the Zone Manager Loads Module 0 cc eeesseeeceseeeeeeceeeeeeeeres 79 Importing Design Day Loads From 3rd Party Programs essseseeseeeeeneees 79 Importing Design Day Loads From Excel and Spreadsheets o ooconcinn 80 From Excel Spreadsheets 0 ccccescesscessecesecesecseeeseeeeeeseeeseeseeeeneeeeeees 80 When Imported Data is Not Detailed Enough ooonconiccooniccnoocnonnconcconccnncnnnonnno 81 Review of Design Day Loads Entry in GLD Q eee eecceceeeseesecesecesecneceeecaeesaeeeaeeeeeeeeesreneeneenaees 83 Design Day Loads eer osni e aces RT E il oli ae 83 Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours cccccscecssesssessessceesceescesceeseceseesec
128. Swing temperature and phase shift are used in a sinusoidal equation The program determines the depth of each pipe in the chosen configuration and then calculates the expected temperature at that depth Regional Air Temperature Swing This is the temperature swing for the location of interest It is a measure of the average temperature variation of the region during Page 146 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module the warmest and coolest months as compared to the yearly average temperature Regions with temperate climates have a lower temperature swing than regions that have large differences between summer and winter temperatures Coldest Warmest Day in Year These are the actual days of the year on a 365 day scale when the temperature is usually coldest or warmest For example if February 3 is approximately the coldest day of the year the value entered will be 34 31 days in January plus 3 days of February Fluid The circulating fluid parameters may be entered in the Fluid panel A sample input screen is shown in figure 5 12 In the expanded user interface fluid temperatures can be viewed and modified at any time as seen in figure 5 13 Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures The heat pump inlet fluid temperatures are included in the Fluid panel The designer can input the desired inlet source temperatures for both heating and cooling here When changes are made to these values the heat pumps in all zones
129. above Page 306 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Required Induded Total Circuit Length ft 0 0 0 0 Total Circuit Number 0 o Calculate B EJ Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Add New Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New GHX Module Add New Manifold Add New Ultra Manifold Fig 11 47 Manually Adding a Pipe Pair The user can select Add New Pipe Pair and then a pipe pair will appear at the top of the Layout Manager Workspace as can be seen in figure 11 48 Page 307 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Peak Load a Alphabetic Categorized Fittings Return Fittings Supply Flow Rate General Pipe 1 Supply Pipe 2 Return Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Fig 11 48 A New Pipe Pair Component Has Been Added The user can proceed to add another pipe pair by repeating the process The result will look like figure 11 49 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Pipe Pair Fig 11 49 Manually Adding a Second Pipe Pair Page 308 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Adding a New GHX Circuit Following the methods outlined for adding new pipe pairs the user can add a new GHX Circuit independent of other piping components
130. ad kBtu Hr Peak Demand kW Average Heat Pump EER COP System EER COP Avg Annual Power kWh Page 123 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module COOLING Design Day Monthly Hourly 15624 0 15624 0 60 60 260 4 260 4 1 1 82 4 92 4 941 7 755 9 53 4 14 1 14 1 HEATING Design Day Monthly Hourly 15624 0 15624 0 60 60 260 4 260 4 1 1 39 8 33 9 810 7 810 7 63 3 3 8 3 8 Equip Flow Rate gpm System Flow Rate apm Figure 4 28 The Design Dashboard Design Compare Window Hybrid Design Options Hybrid systems or systems that utilize both geothermal and conventional mechanical systems to meet the heating and cooling requirements of a building are growing in popularity for several reasons geothermal loopfield load balancing loopfield capital cost savings and geologic space constraints that preclude a full geothermal system for a particular project In many instances the first two reasons are complementary Geothermal loopfield load balancing is a design strategy that helps ensure that the load going into the ground is the same as the load coming out of the ground year after year Achieving a load balance reduces the loopfield to the shortest possible length while generally enhancing loopfield reliability and performance With the shortest possible length drilling requirements drop and thereby result in reduced capital costs as well In some instances of course a desi
131. ader s and up to one level of branching off the Page 165 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module primary header s The heat exchanger circuits actually dominate the heat transfer but if the supply and return lines are long or exposed to different design conditions care must be taken with the header heat transfer The input screen for the piping circuit panel is shown in figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 is a view of the piping controls in the expanded user interface Figure 6 5 is the input screen for the piping header panel E Surface Water Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping l Surface Water Extra kW Information Circuit Circuit Parameters Circuit Pipe Size E in 25 mm Number of Parallel Circuits Cooling 11 Heating 15 Circuit Style C Coil Slinky Circuit Head Loss per 100 feet Cooling 0 9 ft Ad Heating 15 ft hd Extra Equivalent Length per Circuit 33 ft Fig 6 3 Piping Circuit Panel Contents Pipe Layout Number of Parallel Circuits fa 1 Circuit Style C Coil Slinky Page 166 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Fig 6 4 Piping Controls in Expanded User Interface Circuit Parameters Circuit Pipe Size This is the size of the pipe used in the primary heat transfer circuits Although larger pipes offer better heat transfer designers generally prefer smaller sizes 3 4 1 because of ease of handling and lower pipe costs Nu
132. age 303 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module To understand more clearly how the CFD Module displays reverse return systems an example will be explored Figure 11 45 is a three GHX Circuit reverse return system Figure 11 46 is an example of how the system is modeled in the Layout Manager Workspace GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section 2 C C GHX Header Section 1 B B t l B E 2u Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Fig 11 46 Basic Reverse Return Loopfield in Layout Manager Workspace Can you find the parallel flow paths in figure 11 46 Remember parallel flow paths are vertically stacked The following paths are in parallel Page 304 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB are in parallel coming out of supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB are siblings that share the supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA as a parent Circuit 2 and supply pipe C of GHX Header Section CC are in parallel coming out of supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB Circuit 2 and supply pipe C of GHX Header Section CC are siblings that share the supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB as a parent Can you find the serial flow paths in figure 11 46 Remember serial flow paths are stacked with indentation and for reverse return systems c
133. ageo com webresources htm Page 50 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones V gt CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones All of the calculations performed in GLD fundamentally are based on loads provided by the designer This chapter describes the unique GLD loads system and how to enter the loads in both the Zone Manager and the Average Block loads modules In GLD Premier 2014 designers can use 8760 hourly data in the Average Block loads module for precise design control A description of how to prepare and use these data is included Additionally it explains the pump matching capabilities and operation both in automatic and in manual modes At the end of the chapter there is an explanation of how to import external loads files as well as a brief review of the program s loads input methodology The Ground Loop Design Loads Model The intrinsic flexible nature of the GLD Geothermal Design Studio appears again in the loads models the software employs the user is not limited to a single style of loads input Similar to the design modules a designer can choose between different types of loads input schemes based on the level of complexity he or she desires and the time he or she wishes to invest These loads modules are then linked to one or more design modules using the GLD Studio link system Currently two loads modules are available the Zone Manager Loads module and the Average Block Loads module Page 51 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones The Zone Ma
134. al relationship between peak and total loads over many designs and over many years Note that when using a Monthly loads profile the total loads slider affects only the months in which the peaks have been shaved For example if a 10 peak load shave affects only the months of July and August then only the total loads in July and August will be impacted by the total loads slider This is logically consistent with the loads profile and helps ensure a reasonable hybrid loads model When one or more of the LoadSplitter sliders are active and the Update button is pushed the loads displayed in the linked loads module are updated as well as can be seen below in figures 4 31 4 32 and 4 33 Hybrid Design Day Loads 7 0 Days Week Po loak Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses 7 Hourly Data kBtu Hr kBtuHr Transfer 8 a m Noon 452 5 810 7 Noon 4p m 599 6 438 1 Calculate Hours 4p m 8 p m 604 7 531 5 Monthly Loads Sp m Sam 23 72 9 Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours 781 457 Fig 4 31 Hybrid Loads Displayed in the Average Block Loads Module Page 127 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Untitled zon Hybrid Monthly Load Data ae Cooling date Total Peak Total Peak Cancel kBtu 2 kBtu hr l kBtu 21 kBtu hr 2 January February March April May June July August September October November December 4 3 0 0 TER Hours at Peak
135. al component in the figure is listed below Supply Return GHX Circuits Pipe Pairs ApA A A le 1 1 1 1 B B B B 2 2 2 fy 2 2 Cr C C C r 33344334 De D D D 4r4 45 4 4 Note that each supply return pipe pair consists of four subcomponents and each GHX Circuit consists of five subcomponent as mentioned above in the basic description of the two components the pipe pair and the GHX Circuit Figure 11 42 is the identical layout in the CFD module Page 298 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section 1 C C r A Cc C i EA e CI 2 o cleo cn ak a A 4 NE 7 s li H TI Pipe Pair B B Pipe Pair D D 4 ki Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Circuit 4 Fig 11 41 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 2 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bl SS GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A U Circuit 01 E Pipe Pair B B U Circuit 02 GHX Header Section C C U Circuit 03 E me Pipe Pair D D U Circuit 04 Fig 11 42 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 2 in Layout Manager Workspace Note that although figure 11 41 looks somewhat complicated the layout consists of nothing more than a combination of the two components the Pipe Pair and the GHX Circuit In this example however the two components are hooked up in a different way two GHX Circuits in series Circuit
136. al harm to Gaia that could not be remedied by the payment of damages alone Accordingly Gaia will be entitled to preliminary and permanent injunctive relief and other equitable relief for any breach of this Section Limited Warranty Gaia warrants that the Software will substantially conform to its published specifications for a period of thirty 30 days from the later of receipt of the Software or receipt of access to the Software Gaia further warrants that the media on which the Software is contained will be free from defects for a period of thirty 30 days from the later of receipt of the Software or receipt of access to the Software This limited warranty extends only to Customer as the original licensee Provided that a Customer has notified Gaia of such substantial non conformance or defect during the applicable warranty period and b Gaia has confirmed such Software or media to be substantially non conforming or defective as Customer s sole and exclusive remedy and Gaia s and its suppliers entire liability under this limited warranty Gaia will at its option repair replace or refund the Software free of charge Except as expressly provided in this End User Agreement the Software is provided AS IS without warranty of any kind Gaia does not warrant that the Software is error free or that Customer will be able to operate the Software without problems or interruptions Gaia reserves the right to charge additional fees for repairs
137. al load factor in both cooling and heating modes If obtained from the list of available pumps detailed information is also available including the manufacturer and series name the pump type and the inlet load temperatures Figure 3 6 shows the pump selection section of the zone data window with sample data matched to the loads data of figure 3 4 Several buttons can be found in the pump selection section These include Auto Select Select Details and Clear A checkbox is also included to indicate when the pump is a custom pump or a pump not included in GLD s internal list of pumps Page 59 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Heat Pump Specifications at Design eae and Flow Rate Pump Name Custom Pump Eyo48 48 E a Cooling Heating Auto Select Capacity MBtu Hr 46 7 47 6 Power kw 3 74 311 ssi EER COP 125 45 Details Flow Rate gpm 11 5 95 Clear Partial Load Factor 0 98 0 80 Fig 3 6 Sample Pump Selection Section with Data Auto Select This option is by far the easiest method of matching a pump to the loads in a particular zone By clicking the Auto Select button GLD utilizes the information stored for the active pump series and determines which pump within the list is best suited to the zone in question If the listed pumps are too small for the zone loads the software increases the number of pumps of each size until an acceptable match is achieved The pump selection proces
138. alanced and unbalanced loads on loopfield performance and length requirements This second theory is Page 27 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview popular throughout Europe and growing in popularity for its unique strengths In some academic and institutional circles and it is now included so that users can directly compare the two models results using an identical input data set Although the outputs of the two models do not always agree they do give the designer more information on which to base a final system design The vertical bore length equations used in the primary model in the Borehole Design module are based upon the solution for heat transfer from a cylinder buried in the earth The method was developed and tested by Carslaw and Jaeger Carslaw and Jaeger 1947 The solution yields a temperature difference between the outer cylindrical surface and the undisturbed far field soil temperature Ingersoll suggested using the equation and its solution for the sizing of ground heat exchangers in cases where the extraction or rejection occurs in periods of less than six hours where the simple line source model fails Ingersoll 1954 The borehole module s equations include the suggestions of Kavanaugh and Deerman who adjusted the methods of Ingersoll to account for U tube arrangement and hourly heat variations Kavanaugh and Deerman 1991 It also employs the borehole resistance calculation techniques suggested by Remund and Pa
139. an be found in the series sibling relationships The following paths are in series e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Supply Pipe B of GHX Header Section BB Circuit 2 e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Supply Pipe B of GHX Header Section BB Circuit 2 Supply Pipe C of the GHX Header Section CC Circuit 3 e Return Pipe of Circuit 1 Return pipe B of GHX Header Section BB Return pipe C of GHX Header Section CC Return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA e Return Pipe of Circuit 2 Return pipe C of GHX Header Section CC Return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AN e Return Pipe of Circuit 3 Return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA When looking at the details reverse return system are quite complicated Luckily does not need to remember much of this Indeed the intuitive systems employed by the CFD Module make it quite easy to build piping systems perform simulations and review results Now we will learn how to build piping systems in the Layout Manager Workspace Page 305 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Building Piping Systems In this section we will explore how to build a GHX Field using both manual and automatic tools and techniques A number of these tools and techniques can be utilized in both the manual and automatic d
140. an be accomplished by hitting the Calculate button again When more than one nested component family 1 e more than one GHX Module a GHX Module and a Manifold etc is present in a design the designer will benefit from displaying the Group Name option The Group Name option allows a designer to sort and resort a large system by Group Name when he or she clicks on the Group Name column The Group Name column can be seen in figure 11 90 Page 341 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Design and Optimization Name p p p pe O i pe 1 Reynold s Number Pipe GHX Module Supply Return Pipe 5 U Circuit 01 35 GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 C GHX Header Section 02 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 03 GHX Module 01 2C GHX Header Section 03 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 04 GHX Module 01 25 GHX Header Section 04 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 05 GHX Module 01 2C GHX Header Section 05 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 06 GHX Module 01 C GHX Header Section 06 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 07 GHX Module 01 2C GHX Header Section 07 GHX Module 01 U Circuit 08 GHX Module 01 o i U Circuit 01 GHX Module 02 2C GHX Header Section 01 GHX Module 02 U Circuit 02 GHX Module 02 35 GHX Header Section 02 GHX Module 02 U Circuit 03 GHX Module 02 2C GHX Header Section 03 GHX Module 02 U Circuit 04 GHX Module 02 35 GHX Header Section 04 GHX Module 02 U Circuit 05 25 GHX Header Section 05 U C
141. and are based on the EWT values calculated or entered during the design process It is important to not confuse the horizontal temperature graphs with the vertical borehole temperature graphs which use a more detailed loads profile to predict borehole and fluid temperature evolution over time Hybrid Design Options Hybrid systems or systems that utilize both geothermal and conventional mechanical systems to meet the heating and cooling requirements of a building are growing in popularity for several reasons geothermal loopfield load balancing loopfield capital cost savings and geologic space constraints that preclude a full geothermal system for a particular project In many instances the first two reasons are complementary Geothermal loopfield load balancing is a design strategy that helps ensure that the load going into the ground is the same as the load coming out of the ground year after year Achieving a load balance reduces the loopfield to the shortest possible length while generally enhancing loopfield reliability and performance With the shortest possible length drilling requirements drop and thereby result in reduced capital costs as well In some instances of course a designer might not aim for a full load balance Instead the designer may desire to reduce the loopfield so that it can fit in an available area at a project site The loopfield may still be cooling or heating dominant but it may be a smaller loopfield that it
142. and hourly inlet temperatures for the design if monthly hourly loads data have been input into the Average Block loads module The Horizontal Design Module In fixed temperature mode this module determines the length of piping required for a horizontal trench bore slinky exchanger system In fixed area mode it models the inlet temperatures for a user defined area and piping excluding slinky configuration Additionally the horizontal design module can now calculate and graph inlet temperature evolution based off of design day loads The Surface Water Design Module This module determines the length of piping required when a closed loop of pipe inserted into a body of water acts as the heat exchange medium Page 25 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview All three modules utilize the same loads module formalism and are linked to loads modules using the Studio Link system All three modules also include an expanded user interface function as can be seen in figure 1 2 By double clicking on any of the tabbed panels Results Fluid Soil U Tube etc an expanded calculation view appears which enables the designer both to see the calculated results immediately after any parameter has been modified and also to access the parameters that are most commonly adjusted during the design optimization process F Borehole Design Project BoreholeSample lea Lengths Temperatures COOLING H
143. and maximum target velocities impact the final result When a user selects the Auto Adjust option as mentioned above the Auto Size checkbox also becomes available This can be seen in figure 11 14 When a user checks both boxes adjusts the minimum and maximum flow rates as necessary returns to the Layout panel and hits Calculate the CFD module will automatically adjust the pipe sizes across the GHX Module runouts and GHX headers to minimize the purging flow rate and pressure drop while ensuring that the target purging velocity range is achieved throughout the piping system In other words when a user selects both Auto Adjust and Auto Size the CFD module designs a new piping system or modifies an existing piping system for optimal purging flow The tool that performs this calculation is called the GHX Header Design Optimizer and it is explained in great detail at the end of this chapter Some designers wonder about the purpose of the maximum target velocity The maximum target velocity impacts the auto piping sizing selections in the following way if the user specifies a low maximum target velocity say 5 ft s the auto sizing function has flexibility to choose a larger pipe diameter that offer slower flow rates and lower pressure drops If the user specifies a higher maximum target velocity say 50 ft s the auto sizing function will tend to be limited to smaller pipe diameters that enable faster velocities and also higher head loss This wi
144. arallel and in the same direction down Only at the last GHX Circuit does the return flow actually begin flowing in the return up direction to return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout Again this can be seen in figure 11 34 in which the return pipes B and C of the GHX Headers flow in parallel with the supply flow in supply pipes B and C until the last GHX Circuit 3 at which point the return flow reverses course and flows through the return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return runout and heads into the return direction A straightforward way to think about how CFD Module models reverse return systems is as follows In reverse return systems GHX Circuits are like relays that send the flow farther down the GHX Module It is only at the last GHX Circuit where the flow heads back up to where it started Remember that direct returns are different In the direct return systems the GHX Circuit is like a U turn that sends the flow back up to where it started Design for Purging When a reverse return system is optimized for purging the GHX Header system is composed of a series reducing header pipe pairs Reducing header pipe pairs maintain the flow velocity ft s necessary to purge air effectively Reverse return systems are very different from direct return systems when it comes to the design of the GHX Header reductions GHX Header pipes reduce all the way down on the supply following a calculated optimal pipe r
145. are described in chapter 11 Concluding Remarks There are no data in GLD that are not expressible in a printed form The designer can organize and share information both during the developmental stages of a project and after the design is complete Page 182 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files V CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files This chapter covers the tables and reference files of GLD It starts with a description of the included files and then explains how the user may add customized files to the existing set Overview Favorite references are like a comfortable pair of worn in sneakers Although this software package provides some useful information in the included tables 1t may never replace the old standards Rather than trying to impose a particular system onto the users of the software GLD employs a technologically sophisticated system that allows the user to customize the reference files as much as he or she desires With this system a new pair of shoes feels comfortable immediately The reference files included with GLD are minimal consisting of a few tables and graphs that should aid in the selection of requested parameters All files are written in open HTML Hypertext Mark up Language files The designer can edit and add to them as he or she desires to create a customized reference library within the Design Studio environment As with the heat pump and loads models the reference files model is another cus
146. arent child sibling nomenclature needs to be modified and augmented for reverse return systems While reverse return header components have parent child and sibling relationships like they do in direct return systems as can been seen in figure 11 29 reverse return systems have two unique additional relationships based on the same components These can be seen in figure 11 36 and are described below Page 291 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module parent child relationship 1 parent child relationship 2 parent child relationship 3 series sibling relationship sibling relationship reverse child parent relationship Fig 11 36 Reverse Return Component Relationships in the Layout Manager Workspace Series Sibling Relationships In reverse return systems like the one seen in diagram 11 36 above the supply pipe of Pipe Pair A is the parent of both Circuit 1 and the supply pipe of Pipe Pair B Circuit 1 and the supply pipe of Pipe Pair A are siblings As such the flow into the siblings from the parent is in parallel just like it is in direct return systems However between these two siblings there is another flow path This is one in which the return pipe of Circuit 1 flows into the return pipe of Pipe Pair B In other words even though Circuit 1 and Pipe Pair B are siblings there is a series flow from one sibling to another With reverse return systems sibling relationsh
147. ased on the system shown in the Layout panel all he or she has to do is check the Auto Adjust box and input a target minimum purging velocity Doing so will activate the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer tool which is described at the end of this chapter As can be seen in figure 11 13 when the user selects the Auto Adjust box the purging flow rate input box deactivates and the target velocity flow rates activate When only the Auto Adjust box is checked and the Auto Size box is unchecked the maximum purge velocity has no impact on the calculations and therefore is deactivated Note that for purging a system with water water is the standard fluid for purging and the fluid utilized automatically by the CFD module a minimum velocity of 2 ft s throughout the system to be purged is optimal After a user hits the Calculate button in the Layout panel the calculated required purging flow rate will update in the purging flow rate box in figure 11 13 the flow rate is calculated to be 68 3gpm based on the system in the Layout panel lv Auto Flow Auto Size Minimum Maximum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Purging Flow Rate gpm Fig 11 13 The Auto Adjust Option Page 262 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Auto Adjust and Auto Size Option Designers have an even more advanced control at their disposal in the CFD module the auto size option With this option both the minimum
148. ast component in a flow path play the role of parent component Child a component that has a directly connected upstream parent component Most child components except the last one in a flow path play the role of parent as well to one or more downstream components Fluid flow from parent to child is in series Sibling a component that along with one or more other components shares the same parent Fluid flow from parent to two or more siblings is in parallel This parent child sibling nomenclature can be explained through the below figures Figure 11 28 is a schematic drawing of a direct return three GHX Circuit GHX Module Figure 11 29 is a screenshot of the same design in the Layout Manager Workplace with component relationships added GHX Header Section 2 C C A GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A E GHX Header Section 1 B B p Bi B Ci wa B B A C N 1 1 2 C cC A 3 2 VU 1 2a Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Fig 11 28 A Sample Direct Return GHX Module For Reviewing Nomenclature Page 283 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module parent child relationship 1 parent child relationship 2 parent child relationship 3 sibling relationship 1 Fig 11 29 Direct Return Component Relationships in the Layout Manager Workspace The components in the system in figure 11 28 have the following titles which can be seen gra
149. ation performed is based on an advanced computational heat transfer theory Incorporating a dimensionless g function this methodology calculates the evolution of the borehole wall and fluid temperatures over time The hourly model works only in fixed length mode The Calculate panel is divided into two sections On the top is the reporting section which presents the calculation results The lower Optional Hybrid System section is included to assist in determining the appropriate loads balance between geothermal and hybrid technologies and in sizing the geothermal and hybrid systems This is a powerful and convenient toolset for hybrid type designs which may be desirable when the cooling length exceeds that of heating or when the heating length exceeds that of cooling Hybrid designs are discussed towards the end of this chapter Design Day Results Results Subsections Fixed Temperature Mode In fixed temperature mode where the designer selects target EWTs and the program calculates borehole depths the reporting section is separated into five subsections A sample screen for fixed temperature design day results can be seen in figure 4 17 The two lists on the Results panel are for heating and cooling Although all of the numbers shown are valid and respond to changes the side with the longer required length is printed in bold type so that it stands out The Page 110 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module non dominant side
150. ation Schedule provides two choices Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System MACRS and Geothermal Depreciation straight line The MACRS system utilized by GLD is the USA five year property class depreciation schedule IRS publication 946 If a particular geothermal project follows a straight line depreciation schedule deselect the MACRS check box and enter the number of years of straight line depreciation for the project If a project uses an accelerated depreciation schedule but does not use the USA MACRS schedule one option to approximate a different MACRS schedule is to deselect the MACRS check box and enter a value in the straight line depreciation input box Entering a short term value such as three five or seven years for example will roughly approximate the depreciation from an alternative MACRS schedule The Conventional Depreciation Schedule input box allows the user to enter the depreciation period for the conventional comparison equipment At present time in the USA conventional equipment has a 39 year straight line depreciation schedule The Salvage Value Calculations check box allows the designer to choose whether or not to include loopfield and equipment salvage values in the lifecycle analysis At present time there is no universally accepted way of determining the salvage value of the loopfield portion of a geothermal system Therefore the GSA module uses a 50 year straight line depreciation method for calculating residual
151. ation and Extra kW panels are identical to those included in the Borehole Design module described in Chapter 4 so the reader is referred there for detailed information See Chapter 3 for a discussion of Loads entry Configuration Information pertaining to the trench pit bore configuration is in the Configuration panel This includes fixed area mode the trench pit bore layout the pipe configuration in the trenches pits bores and the modeling time The input screen is shown in figure 5 2 Trench number separation depth and width options also are visible and adjustable in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 5 3 Fixed Area Mode In GLD2014 the designer can define an area and a trench pipe configuration and then have the program calculate the inlet temperatures To use this mode first check check the On Off button and then enter a width and length for the area available for the horizontal system Next enter the number of trenches rows of pipe horizontal bores As the number of trenches rows bores goes up the separation distance will be calculated automatically based on the user defined width and number of trenches rows of pipe Page 135 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Note that fixed area mode does not work with slinkies at present time Note that the horizontal module can be used for trenches rows of pipe in pits and horizontal bores as well Trench Layout This is the section where the user enters all para
152. ault configuration to the bottom of the Layout tab to provide more horizontal room for the Layout Manager Workspace The designer can do this by hitting the Toggle View button which can be found in the bottom right corner of the Layout panel When the user hits the Toggle View button the screen will shift as can be seen in figure 11 20 In this view the Layout Manager Workspace extends to the right edge of the CFD module and the Properties Window is underneath the Layout Manager Workspace For systems with large GHX Modules this is an excellent technique for viewing the entire GHX Module on one screen Page 271 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module b Piping Module s 98 a Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Fig 11 20 The Toggle View Button Extends the Layout Manager Workspace The user can hit the Toggle View button at any time to switch back and forth between the two views 3 The designer can drag the Property Window to the right or left to provide more or less Layout Manager Workspace area as needed To do so the user needs to be in the primary Toggle View as can be seen in figure 11 19 The user can then move the mouse to the vertical bar that separates the Layout Manager Workspace from the Property window and click and drag to move the bar either left or right An example of such an adjustment can be seen in figure 11 21
153. ay The average annual power consumption is calculated by summing up the monthly heat pump power draw over the design lifetime and dividing by the number of years Including the system loads the dynamic fluid temperatures and the dynamic heat pump performance there is no more accurate way to estimate the power consumption of a geothermal design Designers may find it interesting to see the impact of borehole spacing changes on average annual power consumption Finally the system flow rate is listed in its own subsection The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the flow rate in gpm ton chosen on the Fluid panel It represents the flow rate from the installation out to the buried pipe system The Graphing Module Users also can view a range of monthly data results using the new Graphing Module In the expanded user interface a graphing icon button will appear after hitting the Calculate button as seen in figure 4 22 Remember the user can access the expanded user interface by double clicking on any of the tabs Monthly ias Figure 4 22 Monthly Data Graphing Button Page 117 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Users can also access the graphs from the Tools dropdown menu selecting the Graph Data option and then importing the data of set of interest into the Graphing Module Figure 4 23 is a screenshot of the Graphing Module a 3 Graph of Results ice a
154. ayout Manager Workspace To modify a particular component the user first clicks on the component with the mouse and then adjusts the parameters in the Properties Window For example in figure 11 63 below the first pipe pair has been selected As can be seen in both the Layout Manager Workspace and the Properties window the pipe pair name has been changed from the default name GHX Module Supply Return Runout to Main Supply Return Runout Pipe Pair In addition the Pipe 1 supply and Pipe 2 return lengths have been set to 100 feet with 3 diameter pipe When setting up a system manually users have control over name group name and individual pipe name group name will be described later length extra length size type as well a similar level of control over pipe fittings The user is encouraged to explore the fittings as well as other options in the Properties Window Note that properties that display calculated results such as velocity will be set to 0 0 until the Calculate button is pushed Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El E Peak Load a Main Supply Return Runout Pipe Pair alphabetic Categorized U Circuit 01 B GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit GHX Header Section 02 Fittings Return Fittings Supply Flow Rate U Circuit 03 E General Group Name GHX Module 01 Name Main Supply Return Runout Pipe Pai E Pipe 1 Supply Pipe 1 Diameter Inner i Pipe 1
155. ayout Panel the user can either add circulation pumps in the Circulation Pumps panel or can add circulation pumps directly in the Layout Panel as required to cover the pressure drop in the piping system Remember that these calculations in version 2014 do not include heat pump pressure drops They may be added in a future version At the top of the panel is a summary of the total circulation pump power and the total number of circulation pumps These numbers update automatically as the user adds removes circulation pumps from his or her design Managing Circulation Pumps The buttons along the top of the Circulation Pump Manager are used to add and modify circulation pumps A closer view is shown in figure 11 3 Fig 11 3 Circulation Pump Control Buttons The five buttons on the left side are circulation pump editing controls and they include New Copy Remove Renumber and Clear A Summary view of all the pumps may be obtained by hitting the sixth or Summary View toggle button this feature not available in all versions G New and Copy A new circulation pump may be added at any time by clicking the New button Identical pumps may be created from any existing pump by bringing up that pump s data window and clicking the Copy button iaj 5 Remove and Clear Pumps also can be deleted from the list Any zone can be removed from the list by bringing up the pump s data window and pressing the Remove button To delete all of the p
156. be replaced without the purchase of a new license If the dongle is not attached to your computer GLD will function as a trial version which is functional except for a few design parameters that are locked at certain values When you insert the dongle into a free USB port on your computer for the first time your computer most likely will recognize the dongle and after a few seconds the dongle light will turn on When it turns on your license will activate However if your computer indicates that the dongle is new hardware you have two options for installing the dongle driver How to Install the Dongle Driver Windows 8 7 Vista XP and Windows 2000 users with internet access If your computer has access to the internet your computer can automatically install the drivers Follow along with the Windows new hardware wizard to install the drivers The process takes a few minutes When the installation is complete the dongle light will turn on Page 17 PREFACE Before You Begin All other users Via Windows Explorer navigate to Main Drive Program Files Gaia GeothermalGLD2014 Extras In the Extras folder you will find a HASPUserSetup exe program Run the program to install the dongle driver When the installation is complete the dongle light will turn on After Dongle Installation is Complete Now that the dongle is installed you can access the full functionality of the GLD version that you purchased If you remove t
157. be 138 Pat Layouts e e iii eee 138 Horizontal Bore AVON r aaraa aaraa ean nee a asiaa eiae aeaa aein aose aani 139 Modeling time Period esinin s eer a aa r E aE E Set 141 PIPE P E ETA ETA E tn RTE de E E 142 Pipe tarea a TAE A TE o dd 142 OU EEES EE S A A E AN 144 Page 6 PREFACE Contents Soil Thermal Properties iaa 144 Diffusivity Calculatot ci tit tia 145 Ground Temperature Corrections at Given Depth oooonconnnnninnincnicnoccnocnconoconoos 145 Regional Air Temperature SWINB oococccoonnonnconnonnconnonnconncon nono nonnnonnnnos 145 Coldest Warmest Day in Year cccecccceesseescessceseceneesseeneeeeeeseeeeeees 146 Elida a a 146 Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures ooconnnicnnnnnonocononncnonnnononncnncnncnnon 146 Design System Flow Rate iii ctas 146 Solution Properties aida iia 147 Results cias id dea 148 Reporting Sec ci hah REA ate ae 150 Average Entering Water Temperature Graphs 00 c ce ccceseeceeseceeeeeeeecaeeeeneeeees 150 Hybrid Design Optio iia 152 Cooling Hybrid iii E E la E n 152 Heating Hybrid ui ance ian EE E E EE R ER 152 Cooling and Heating Hybrids 0 cceccceseesseesseeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeceeeeseenseenseeneensees 153 The Hybrid LoadSplitter Tool sssssessannnnns eae noo 153 Printing Reports iia 158 References ti bo chanced AE aioe Oe 158 CHAPTER GS na ad 159 The Surface Water Design Module oococonnnnnncccccccnocennnnnananaccnnnenonennnnanancnnes 159 OVEIVICW
158. by the total loads slider This is logically consistent with the loads profile and helps ensure a reasonable hybrid loads model When one or more of the LoadSplitter sliders are active and the Update button is pushed the loads displayed in the linked loads module are updated as well as can be seen below in figures 5 19 5 20 and 5 21 Hybrid Design Day Loads V Hourly Data Days Week TO ys Time of Day Design Day Loads Transfer 8 a m Noon 452 5 810 7 Noon 4p m 599 6 _Calcuiate Hours 4p m 8p m 604 7 Monthly Loads Sp m Sam 2 3 Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours Heat Gains Heat Losses kBtu Hr KBtu Hr 438 1 531 5 729 Fig 5 19 Hybrid Loads Displayed in the Average Block Loads Module Page 155 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Untitled zon Hybrid Monthly Load Data ETE Cooling ak Total Peak Total Peak Cancel ketu ketu hr 2 ketu kBtu hr 2 January 4 February March vi April May June July August September October November December Total El Hours at Peak Flow Rate 3 0 a Unit Inlet F Fig 5 20 Hybrid Loads Displayed in the Average Block Loads Module Notice that the cooling peak loads in May through September have been capped at 605 by the LoadSplitter Hybrid Design Day Loads Design Day Loads Days Week Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses per Week Btu Hr kBtu Hr
159. ciated with it These parameters include installation costs per square foot of conditioned space controls costs per square foot of conditioned space maintenance costs per square foot per year and replacement time period years The replacement cost time period years is based on the life expectancy of the equipment Rooftop cooling units for example have shorter life expectancies than geothermal heat Page 202 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Average installation cost Maximum installation cost Minimum installation cost pump systems When the user enters replacement year values the program can calculate when and how much it will cost to replace the equipment over longer lifecycle cost analyses Note that 1f the user conducts a ten year lifecycle analysis for example and the equipment replacement time periods are greater than ten years replacement costs cannot and will not be reported Experienced HVAC engineers oftentimes have a good rule of thumb estimate for the per square foot installation costs including capital equipment for a variety of HVAC systems For geothermal systems costs vary greatly depending on the geology drilling conditions type of heat exchanger utilized etc This makes it a bit challenging to have a rule of thumb for geothermal installation costs That being said some research has been published comparing commercial geothermal system installations costs to those of more standard sys
160. contains information relating to the working zone including a zone name the loading information and the information about any heat pumps selected for that zone Selecting a different zone name in the zone list changes the working zone Using the list the designer can bring up and modify any particular zone by clicking on its name An essentially equivalent but more compact summary of the input data can be obtained in the Summary View obtained by clicking on the Summary View toggle button Different representations of zone data can also be printed as reports Managing Zones in the Loads Tabbed Panel The buttons along the top of the Zone Manager are used to work with the zones A closer view is shown in figure 3 2 B smal 2 9 9 Fig 3 2 Zone Manager Control Buttons The five buttons on the left side are zone editing controls and they include New Copy Remove Renumber and Clear A Summary view of all the zones can be obtained by hitting the sixth or Summary View toggle button The next three buttons are the Open and Save buttons for opening and saving the zone files and the Print button for printing various zone reports The next button is the Import Loads button a description of which can be found towards the end of this chapter under Importing Loads Data from External Programs The final two buttons on the far right are for pump selection across the entire set of zones and include Auto Select All and Update Reselect
161. course if the rooftop space has no commercial value per se 1t would be reasonable to decrease the input square footage value Water Usage Rate The user can enter the water usage rate for the cooling tower here 0 3 gpm ton is a reasonable starting point for many systems Heating In this section the user can enter details about the hybrid component of the geothermal heating system s Equivalent Full Load Hours The user can enter the equivalent full load hours here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Note that by default the equivalent full load hours value in the hybrid panel matches the full load hours in the geothermal panel If the user changes the value in the geothermal tabbed panel the value in the hybrid component panel changes as well The user does have the option though of changing this value in the hybrid tab so that it does not match the value in the geothermal tabbed panel Hybrid Type At present time the user has the option of selecting a boiler Fuel Type The user can select from among seven fuel options Page 220 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Hybrid System Capacity Here users can enter the installed capacity of the hybrid system This value automatically is entered when the user imports a heat exchanger design project that is a hybrid system design into the GSA module Hybrid Unit Efficiency The user can enter the boiler
162. cropera and DeWitt 1990 The calculations use average values of the Reynolds number to represent the different types of flow with values of Re 1600 3150 and 10000 for laminar transition and turbulent respectively The calculations also use average viscosity values and the Prandtl number for water taken at a temperature of 70 F Page 143 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module y Horizontal Design Project HorizontalSample Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW Information Pipe Parameters Pipe Resistance 0 156 h ft F Btu Pipe Size Lin 25 mm Outer Diameter 12 in Inner Diameter 108 in Pipe Type sorR11 y Flow Type Turbulent y Check Pipe Tables Fig 5 9 Piping Panel Contents Using the standard expression for resistance of a hollow cylinder Incropera and DeWitt 1990 the program calculates an approximate value for the pipe resistance It assumes HDPE pipe with a conductivity of 0 225 Btu h ft F The pipe resistance varies with the pipe style and flow The user can select the size and type of pipe from the appropriate selection boxes If another pipe diameter is required it can be entered directly into the text boxes as needed Note By pressing the Check Pipe Tables button the Pipe Properties tables will open If the user wants to enter an experimentally determined pipe resistance or requires more precise calculations he or she can enter these
163. ction lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and the demand of all the equipment followed by the calculated heat pump and system efficiencies The peak load is the maximum determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel Care must be exercised when equipment energy requirements listed in the Extra kW panel refer to only heating or only cooling types of equipment In these cases the pump efficiency could be fine but the system efficiency might be incorrect The fourth section lists the total head loss calculation results as well as the individual losses for the header and circuit pipe It does not include any losses for the heat pump equipment which must be considered separately This section is convenient for determining the optimum pumping arrangement for the system Finally the system flow rate is listed along with the flow rates in the primary and branch headers as well as the flow in the individual circuits Page 175 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the system flow rate in gpm ton as given on the Fluid panel The primary header flow rate is calculated from the system flow rate divided by the number of primary headers and the branch flow rate is obtained from the pri
164. cuit Separation ft 20 0 0 0 Header Pipe Size SDR11 2 in 50 mm Fig 11 7 Details Information Panel Contents Supply Return Runout Information This section stores information regarding the Supply Return Runout pipe pair supply pipe and return pipe that links the GHX Header with a Manifold Vault etc Page 254 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module One Way Length Here the user can enter the one way length from the Manifold Vault to the first GHX Circuit The return pipe will default to the same length These lengths can be modified later as necessary Pipe Size Here the user enters the Supply Return Runout pipe size Both the Supply and Return Runout will be the same size but they can be adjusted independently 1f necessary an explanation of how to do this comes later Manifold Details related to an individual Manifold can be seen in the Manifold tabbed panel in figure 11 8 Note that a Manifold also can be thought of as being a Vault Manifold and GHX Module Automation Presets GHX Module Manifold Ultra Manifold Pipe Sizes Return Type DiretRetun gt Section Outlet Number Section Outlet Separation ft ET 0 0 Section Outlet Pipe Size SDR11 2 in 50 mm Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 3 in 80 mm Fig 11 8 Manifold Information Panel Contents Page 255 CHAPT
165. d purpose built U bend GHX Header Connection points between Supply Return Runout piping and GHX Circuits GHX Headers are buried in the ground adjacent to the GHX Field and are comprised of an assembly of fusion welded fittings and pipe Fittings and pipe are manufactured using HDPE resin and are connected using heat fusion butt fusion socket fusion or electro fusion Supply Return Runout Supply Return Runout refers to the high density polyethylene HDPE piping installed to connect the GHX Circuit piping to the Pump House header The Supply Return Runout has both a supply pipe and a return pipe Page 243 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module GHX Manifold Connection point for Supply Return Runout piping from GHX field A GHX Manifold is typically located inside a building or in a geothermal Vault located away from the building GHX Module Completed assembly of GHX components including GHX Supply and Return Runouts GHX header and GHX Circuits GHX Field Assembly of all GHX Modules connected to a single building or group of buildings via GHX Manifold s Vault s General Features To aid in the piping optimization process the CFD module in Ground Loop Design consists of a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables efficiently For example parameters related to fluids are listed on the Fluid panel while options related to the automation of the pip
166. d Dynamics CFD Module The Manifold Vault Builder The Manifold Vault Builder is a powerful tool that automatically builds Manifolds Vaults Note that conceptually in the CFD module Manifolds and Vaults are identical The Manifold Vault Builder can be accessed from within the Layout Manager Workspace in the Layout Panel The user can right click the mouse while inside the Layout Manager Workspace to see the menu in figure 11 75 appear Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Add New Pipe Pair Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 75 Accessing the Manifold Vault Builder After the user selects New Manifold the Manifold V ault Builder will open as can be seen in figure 11 76 Page 327 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module GHXModule and Manifold E Group Name Manifold 01 Return Type Direct Return Section Outlet Number 5 Extra Section Outlet Separation ft y 0 0 Section Outlet Pipe Size SDR11 y 2 in 50 mm v Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 3 in 80 mm OK Cancel Fig 11 76 The Manifold Vault Builder The Manifold Vault Builder is broken into fiv
167. d design or 1f the user desires to Page 64 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones calculate monthly and or hourly inlet temperatures or if the user wishes to estimate the benefits of the thermal recharge battery from a system for a borehole design the Average Block loads module is a better option than the Zone Manager and in the case of monthly and hourly inlet temperatures the only option The required input consists of only a single set of loads which represents the entire installation This single set of loads data optionally can be entered in a new month by month loads screen for inlet temperature calculations Hourly loads data can be imported using a csv file or a proprietary file type from one of several energy simulation tools that now interact bi directionally with GLD Premier 2014 The pump matching model in the Average Block module is slightly different from the model for the individual zones A single pump type is selected from the GLD Heat Pump Database to approximate the average pump characteristics of the installation For example if the designer is planning to use the highest efficiency pumps a pump in a series with a higher coefficient of performance COP might be chosen over a lower efficiency pump If specific pump characteristics are required they can be input directly overriding the automatic functions Two views of the Average Block Loads Module are shown in figures 3 10 and 3 11 Although it resembles a single zone in t
168. d system is utilized to balance the loads out Page 111 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Y Borehole Design Project BoreholeSample fo o Es Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Calculate Design Day v COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 16003 6 9484 3 Borehole Number 60 60 Borehole Length ft 266 7 158 1 Ground Temperature Change F 1 4 2 4 Unit Inlet F 90 0 40 0 Unit Outlet F 100 1 34 1 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 1008 4 810 7 Peak Load kBtu Hr 755 9 810 7 Peak Demand kW 56 4 Heat Pump EER COP 13 4 System EER COP System Flow Rate gpm Optional Hybrid System Off Cooling Fig 4 17 Results Panel Contents Fixed Temperature Design Day The third subsection of the report lists the heat pump inlet and outlet temperatures of the circulating fluid The fourth subsection lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and demand of all the equipment and the calculated heat pump and system efficiencies The peak load is the maximum and is determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel Finally the system flow rate is listed in its own subsection The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the flow rate in gpm ton chosen on the Fluid panel
169. d to model horizontal bores if the user specifies an appropriate horizontal separation between the two pipes Three Pipe Vertical Alignment In this arrangement the user defines three pipe layers The number of pipes chosen defines how many layers will be included 3 6 9 etc Each vertical layer is separated from the one above or below by the given vertical separation Y If the Offset box is checked every layer will be shifted from the layer below by one half the given horizontal separation X 2 SLINKY PIPE CONFIGURATIONS In the case of the horizontal and vertical slinky configurations the user Pipe Configuration in Trench ol Ss Loop Pitch P 10 0 in Loop Diameter D 36 0 in Fig 5 4 Slinky Variables may define the pitch and diameter of the Slinky Because of the limited model employed the pitch must be between 10 and 56 inches and the diameter must be 36 inches See figure 5 4 Vertical Slinky In this arrangement the slinky is placed vertically within a trench and is resting at the bottom The trench may be as narrow as the pipe and soil allow Page 138 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Horizontal Slinky In this arrangement the slinky is placed horizontally at the bottom of the trench The minimum trench width depends on the slinky diameter Pit Layout Because the horizontal module calculations rely on the relationship between and among pipes the pro
170. der ooooococcocccnccnnos 28 92 94 95 96 Ground Temperature 91 93 103 105 110 112 114 119 141 144 145 170 232 233 236 AA 27 36 100 102 103 130 158 Head Loss 31 91 160 162 166 167 168 169 172 174 183 262 344 Header 31 160 164 167 168 169 170 171 174 175 241 242 243 252 253 262 276 281 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 299 300 301 302 304 311 313 314 341 342 343 344 345 346 Header desig niinn tdt 284 Heat pump 15 16 18 19 21 22 23 27 29 31 33 36 37 38 39 40 42 43 45 46 47 48 51 52 53 54 58 59 61 62 63 64 67 70 90 106 107 111 113 115 116 117 120 122 146 147 150 168 169 174 182 189 201 202 204 205 207 210 211 215 216 217 224 225 247 348 Horizontal bore 131 134 135 136 137 139 140 201 213 Horizontal separation 136 137 140 141 Hourly data 50 51 64 75 78 79 81 86 118 119 120 121 122 Hourly mode Hours at peak 68 116 120 Hybrid 12 90 109 110 149 189 190 207 213 214 218 219 220 221 Import iii 23 28 50 53 66 67 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 192 227 229 230 234 Imported data oooocconoccnnnoccccconcccnonnccnno 73 74 79 81 Importing 53 68 72 73 75 76 77 79 80 117 121 192 211 229 Importing Loads c ceeeeeees 53 68
171. design module which makes transfers in from or out to the loads module as necessary Since the information is now held in the design module it is possible to add multiple design modules with only a single loads module open When studio links are established the information shown in the loads module will correspond to the active design project Page 71 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones As long as a link is active design modules retain information about the type of link and the filename of the associated zone zon file This information is stored in saved project gld files so that the appropriate loads module can be opened and loaded when a project file is opened 32 Making a Link The most direct method of making a link between a loads and a design module is to open both modules to be linked activate click on the design module and then press the Link button on the toolbar Another option is to choose Link from the GLD Loads menu If there is only one type of loads module open a link will be established with that module If more than one type of loads module is open GLD will query the user for his or her linking preference Alternative systems for linking exist but they are more indirect For example if only one unlinked design module is present a link may be established from any open loads module since GLD automatically recognizes the user s intention If more than one unlinked design module exists however p
172. designer can specify in the CFD module which types of pipe he or she does not want the program to use when auto optimizing the piping system For example if a designer cannot use 2 1 2 pipe for whatever reason he or she can navigate to the Automation tab and then click on the Pipe Sizes tab The designer can then de select any pipes he or she he wants to exclude from the auto designer s database For example in figure 11 94 pipe sizes 2 1 2 and 3 1 2 have been de selected and therefore will not be used in any of the auto designs Page 346 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Manifold and GHX Module Automation Presets GHX Module l Manifold l Ultra Manifold i List of Available Pipe Sizes 3 8 1 tee 5 8 3 4 1 1 1 4 1 1 2 2 21 2 3 3 1 2 4 5 6 Je g 10 Pa 14 16 18 20 KAK K K K K K K K KK Fig 11 94 Selecting Pipes to Exclude From the Design Optimizer Calculating Results with the GHX Header Design Optimizer The designer may now return to the Layout tab select the Purge Results Type from the dropdown menu and hit the Calculate button again Results from the 8 GHX Circuit GHX Module described in figure 11 87 above are available for view in figure 11 95 below Notice how now the circuits and header sections all have velocities that are at 2 ft s or higher Also notice that the header pipe sizes have changed In the previous example and before the GHX Header
173. determine how much heat is transferred from the header pipe to the soil or vice versa Once the amount of heat transfer from or to the soil is known the circuit pipe length calculated from the surface water data can be modified to provide fluid with the desired inlet source temperature to the heat pumps The Soil panel input screen is shown in figure 6 6 Page 170 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module E Surface Water Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kW Information Undisturbed Ground Temperature Ground Temperature 62 1 F Ground Temperature Corrections at Given Depth Depth of Header in Soil 4 0 ft Soil Type Wet X Regional Air Temperature Swing 22 0 F Winter Summer Coldest Warmest Day in Year 34 225 Corrected Temperature F 48 1 76 8 Check Soil Tables Fig 6 6 Soil Panel Contents Ground Temperature Corrections at Given Depth Depth of Header in Soil This is simply the average depth in the soil between the water s edge and the installation at which the primary header or branches will be buried Soil Type The soil type can have one of three values wet dry or average GLD uses this to assign an approximate diffusivity value to the soil used in the temperature model Regional Air Temperature Swing This is the temperature swing for the location of interest It is a measure of the average temperature variation of the region during
174. directory They have a general format that can be read into any loads module and they can be used simultaneously in different design modules However if this is done it may be wise to save any changes under different filenames Both loads modules are stand alone entities The files are entirely independent of project design files This means that an entire installation loading design can be entered matched with pumps optimized and saved without ever opening a design module This is valuable for users who wish to keep the loads entry and pump selection completely separate from the studio s geothermal design modules Now users can work on designs and load inputs at different times and can use the same loads files for various projects styles of project New zone files can be created by clicking the New button in any loads module or by clearing all of the current loads information with the Clear button followed by the New button The designer provides a filename when the zone file is saved Page 52 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Zone files can be opened and saved using the Open and Save buttons on the Loads panel IA The Zone Manager Loads Module For commercial non centralized installations it is often necessary to divide loads into separate zones that individually are served by specific heat pumps This type of system has many advantages including lower installation and service costs as well as a highly accurate method of
175. dule and Renewable Heat Incentive as can be seen in figure 9 2 below The GSA Module offers a much greater range of controls compared to previous versions of the software Information pertaining to tax incentives for geothermal systems can be found in the Tax Incentives section If incentives are available users can enter the incentive as an investment tax credit percentage or as an absolute tax credit For example in late 2008 the U S Congress passed H R 1424 which authorizes up to 2000 in federal tax credits for residential systems and 10 federal tax credits for commercial systems Incentives are reported on the Tax Incentives line on the Results tab Information pertaining to depreciation for both geothermal and conventional systems can be entered in this section The Tax Rate is the corporate tax rate of the owner of the geothermal system The tax rate is critical for calculating all depreciation values accurately The user can enter a rate from 0 to 100 1st Year Bonus Depreciation enables the geothermal system owner to depreciate a percentage of the investment immediately Currently in the USA there is a 100 bonus depreciation benefit in effect through the end of 2011 For 2014 the Page 195 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module bonus depreciation in the USA is 50 To account for any potential first bonus depreciation enter a first year bonus deprecation rate ranging from 0 to 100 The Geothermal Depreci
176. e Purging Flow Rate Knowing the appropriate purging flow rate is essential for proper purging of a GHX Module or a GHX field prior to start up Failure to purge a system properly can result in decreased system performance Calculating a purging flow rate for a particular system can be a time intensive process In addition many designers prefer to engineer a GHX Module headering system to ensure ease of purging Such engineering can require significant effort As a result many engineers design the same system over and over again without exploring potentially more efficient design scenarios The new CFD module can automatically size the headering system save time and provide designers with a new way to experiment and innovate Manual Entry of Purging Flow Rate In the default configuration that can be seen in figure 11 12 the user can enter a purging flow rate of interest After doing so the user can see how Page 261 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module the designed system performs in the Layout panel In general for purge flow rates designers will be looking at the velocity in the GHX Circuits headering sections and run out pairs Purging Flow Rate gpm Purging Target Velocity ft s Fig 11 12 Purging Flow Rate Data Entry Automatic Purging Flow Rate Calculations Auto Adjust Option If the designer wishes to have the CFD module calculate an appropriate purging flow rate for the GHX Circuits b
177. e 01 GHX Header Section 01 GHX Module 01 Ag zs GHX Header Section 02 GHX Module 01 2 2 GHX Header Section 03 GHX Module 01 2 2 GHX Header Section 04 GHX Module 01 the 2 GHX Header Section 05 GHX Module 01 1 1 2 1 1 2 GHX Header Section 06 GHX Module 01 1 1 4 1 1 4 GHX Header Section 07 GHX Module 01 F E Pipe 2 Size Fig 11 32 Optimized Direct Return Reducing Headers System Name____ Group Name _ Pipe 1 Size Pipe 2 Size Pipe 1 Reynold s Number Pipe 2 Reynold s Number UAEM 01 E 5801 5801 U Circuit 02 GHX Module 01 1 i 5486 U Circuit 03 GHX Module 01 1 1 5246 U Circuit 04 GHX Module 01 1 1 5072 U Circuit 05 GHX Module 01 1 1 4956 U Circuit 06 GHX Module 01 1 1 4756 U Circuit 07 GHX Module 01 1 1 4570 U Circuit 08 GHX Module 01 1 1 4403 Fig 11 33 Imbalanced Reynolds Numbers in an Optimized Direct Return Reducing Headering System For the GHX Header system described in figure 11 32 the GHX circuits are described in figure 11 33 Notice how the Reynold s Numbers decrease from 5801 in circuit 1 down to 4403 in circuit 8 a reduction of nearly 25 It is quite clear that the different length flow paths in direct return systems result in unbalanced systems Reverse Return Systems Page 288 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Reverse return GHX Headers generally are more complex to design although not with the
178. e 01 1 1 4 25 GHX Header Section 07 GHX Module 01 3 4 Fig 11 37 Optimized Direct Return Reducing Headers System For comparison in a direct return system the header pipes reduce identically all the way down the cascade on both the supply and return side as can be seen above in figure 11 32 t circuit 01 GHX Module 01 SSeS E U Circuit 02 GHX Module 01 ya U Circuit 03 GHX Module 01 1 U Circuit 04 GHX Module 01 q U Circuit 05 GHX Module 01 ade U Circuit 06 GHX Module 01 1 U Circuit 07 GHX Module 01 pe U Circuit 08 GHX Module 01 y Fig 11 38 Balanced Reynolds Numbers in an Optimized Reverse Return Reducing Headering System As mentioned previously reverse return GHX Header systems are inherently flow balanced This can be seen in figure 11 38 above which shows the eight GHX Circuits that branch off of the seven GHX Header Sections in figure 11 37 above Notice how the Reynold s Number drop off symmetrically from the central GHX Circuits Circuits 4 and 5 Also note how the Reynold s Numbers vary only by 12 between the center Circuits 4 and 4 and outer Circuits 1 and 8 GHX Circuits Compare this to the 25 difference in Reynold s Numbers in the direct return case above and it becomes clear that reverse return systems provide Page 294 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module significant flow balancing benefits notice that the direct and reverse return designs
179. e detailed monthly and hourly loads data Design Day Loads The Design Day heat gains and losses are simply the average hourly peak demands of the installation over the different periods of the day Although the program could include all 24 hours of the day separately it instead uses three 4 hour periods and one 12 hour period to simplify input These average hourly loads can be entered directly into the corresponding entry box The soil resistance models employed by the program actually use this data to determine the daily and monthly transfer of energy into the soil This is because the model assumes that Page 84 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones there are different resistances associated with the annual monthly and daily pulses of heat being transferred If an installation is not being used at night for example the demand for the 12 hour period might be set to 0 Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours Because complete loads entry could be extensive especially in applications with more than a few zones GLD limits the necessary data by compacting all of the monthly loads into a single number the Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours This number effectively represents all of the monthly total loads data KBtu or kWh in terms of the peak demand value KBtu hr or kW The advantage is that a single value is used instead of twelve one for each month of the year The full load hours calculation procedure is straightforward Simply sum the
180. e 11 57 is an example of a nested component family The nested components combine to form one GHX Module made up of 8 GHX Circuits seven GHX Header sections and one GHX Module Supply Return Runout As can be seen through the GHX Module there are a number of boxes with minus signs The user can click on any of these boxes to hide all the components that are children of the selected box When a user closes the top box in a nested component family the entire family is hidden This can be seen in figure 11 58 This option to hide and display components and nested component families can be useful when a designer is working with a large system and wishes to focus on one area of the system without distraction Page 312 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B SAS GHX Module Supply Return Runout PY Circuit 01 E GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 E GHX Header Section 02 leo U Circuit 03 GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 E GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 E GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 E GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 E GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 57 Click on the Minus Box To Hide The Entire GHX Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B E A 4 GHX Module Supply Return Runout Fig 11 58 The Entire GHX Module is Now Hidden Deleting Pipe Pairs and Circuits
181. e 9 8 The Geothermal panel is divided into two sections a summary panel and two details tabbed sub panels Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives Geothermal System sooo length COOLING HEATING TOTAL ft area horiz Geothermal Power 25986 8 kWh 8978 4 kWh 34965 3 kWh Hybrid Power 0 0 kWh 0 0 kWh 0 0 kWh Total Annual Power 25986 8 kWh 8978 4 kWh 34965 3 kWh Water 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons Other None None Primary Geothermal Hybrid Component HEATING Eqv Full Load Hours 1107 hr 623 hr Peak Capacity 373 5 KkBtu hr 197 7 kBtu hr Average Heat Pump Efficiency 16 8 EER 4 4 COP Circulation Pump Input Power 1 2 kw 1 2 kw Circ Pump Power 1 5 hP 1 5 hP Motor Efficiency Additional Power Mech Room Installation Area Fig 9 8 Geothermal Panel Contents Geothermal Project Power Summary Panel The top third of the Geothermal panel displays several features of the geothermal system including the length of the bore or pipe or area of the system the energy usage and fuel type for the geothermal system This can be seen below in figure 9 9 Page 213 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module 9000 length COOLING HEATING TOTAL ft area horiz Geothermal Power 25986 8 kWh 8978 4 kWh 34965 3 kWh Hybrid Power 0 0 kWh 0 0 kWh 0 0 kWh Total Annual Power 25986 8 kWh 8978 4 kWh 34965 3 kWh Water 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons 0 0 Gallons Other No
182. e also three primary ways of reviewing results These include Properties Window results Layout Manager Workspace results Review Panel results Each is described in turn below PROPERTIES WINDOW RESULTS After the fluid dynamics for a particular system have been calculated the user can review the results for every component one at a time in the Properties Window For example in figure 11 82 below the Peak Load Flow Rate set at 30 gpm in the Fluid tab has been selected and results for the GHX Circuit 4 Pressure Drop Reynold s Number and Velocity are displayed as follows Pressure Drop 2 5 ft hd Reynold s Number 4997 Velocity 0 88 ft s Remember that these results are for the Peak Load Flow Rate and for the selected fluid which is water in this example If a user changes the flow rate or the fluid type results will change as well CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Page 335 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El E Peak Load al E pb ne le Supply Return Pipe Alphabetic Categorized Circuit 01 5 B 32 GHX Header Section 01 Fittings End U Circuit 02 Httings Pipe 1 E E GHX Header Section 02 Hetings paz U Circuit 03 Flow Rate E 26 GHX Header Section 03 General U Pipe 1 E S GHX Header Section 04 Pipe 2 U Circuit 05 E Pressure Drop E 936 GHX Header Section 05 End Fitting 1 Pressu
183. e branch lines If there are no branches the number of branches should be set to zero The Surface Water Design module starts with only a single primary header GLD uses the header information so that the heat transfer losses or gains are taken into account The software then uses this corrected value iteratively to modify the length of the circuit loop piping so that the desired entering water temperature for the heat pumps is provided These calculations depend directly on the header depth surface water and soil temperatures obtained from the Surface Water and Soil panels Additionally the program calculates the average head losses of the system when provided with the head losses per 100 ft for each type of pipe in the system These values vary with pipe size antifreeze and flow rate Several graphs are provided with the program to help determine these values for pure water and standard solutions but the designer is ultimately responsible for making sure the appropriate values are entered These head loss calculations also require the one way length of the header which is doubled within the program to account for both the supply and return lines Because the inputs to headers and branches are similar they are described together below Number of Lines This is the number of header or branch lines in the system Pipe Size This is the size of the pipe used in the primary header or branches For pumping reasons the size of the primary
184. e building process are listed in the Automation panel The idea is that everything related to a single piping optimization project is presented simultaneously and is easily accessible at any time during the design process The tabbed panels can be seen in figure 11 1 below Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Fig 11 1 CFD Module Panel List The CFD module includes several additional features e GHX AutoBuilder o Direct or reverse return systems More than one bore per parallel circuit option Double GHX Circuit systems Manifold Vault builder Ultra Manifold Vault builder Pipe size exclusion control Flow rate determination for purge velocity Auto supply return headering for purge velocity optimization o Integration with design modules o Circulation pumps Updated fluids database Fittings database for manual fittings selection A range of wizards for design and modification Customizable design workspace 000000 0 Page 244 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Customizable results displays Detailed properties window Metric and English unit conversions Printed reports A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations Quick importation and modeling of systems designed in the vertical horizontal and pond modules Theoretical Basis The CFD module applies an innovative approach to finding the solution to complex fluid dynamics problems associated with a nearly unlimited range of GHX fie
185. e designer enters the one way length of the supply return pipe pair that connects the GHX Module with its parent component in the design typically a Manifold Vault or circulation pump house The user also enters the supply return pipe diameter here Note that the GHX Module Builder is pre populated with design parameters These default parameters can be updated modified as necessary in the Automation Panel and on the GHX Module subpanel OK and Cancel Buttons After the designer has reviewed and modified the parameters he or she can hit the OK button and the GHX Module will be auto built in the Layout Manager Workspace An example of an auto built reverse return GHX Module can be seen in figure 11 74 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bl E m GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 E S GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 E 25 GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 E 26 GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 8 2S GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 8 2S GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 26 GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 2S GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 74 An Auto Built Reverse Return GHX Module At this point the designer can make copies of the GHX Module if so desired using the copy paste functionality In addition the designer can add to or change the module using the manual techniques outlined above Page 326 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Flui
186. e energy input For example heat recovery units require additional energy that can be recorded in this box so that it can be used in the overall calculation of the System EER COP In the Circulation Pumps section the Required Input Power is calculated from the Pump Power required by the pump s for the system in question and the average Pump Motor Efficiency It is not possible to edit the Required Input Power values directly However if the pump motor efficiency is set to 100 the Pump Power and Required Input Power will be the same Borehole Design Project verticalsampleforManual Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kW l Information Circulation Pumps Required Input Power Pump Power Pump Motor Efficiency 85 Optional Cooling Tower Pump Fan Required Input Power 02 kw 13 kw Power D2 hp 15 hp Motor Efficiency 85 85 Yo Additional Power Requirements Additional Power 10 kw Pump Power Calculator Fig 4 3 Extra kW Panel Contents If an optional cooling tower is used for hybrid applications the demands of the pump and fan may be included on this panel The tower pump is selected based on the water flow and the total head these also determine the horsepower The required fan horsepower and motor efficiency may also be entered to include the demand of the fan Generally cooling tower inputs are left at zero initially and then modified once th
187. e in the Layout Manager Workspace that is identical to the GHX Module in figure 11 34 It shows how the Layout Manager Workspace displays direct return systems The flow paths have been added to enhance understanding As can be seen in figure 11 35 reverse return GHX Header sections and pipe pairs are represented by this symbol Page 290 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module E a E E Ld E E a E E fluid supply flow paths fluid return flow paths Fig 11 35 Fluid Flow Paths of Reverse Return GHX Module The colored and dotted fluid supply and return flow paths for the reverse return system can be seen in figure 11 35 Note that why the supply flow path identical to that in the direct return system the return flow path is very different Recall that in the direct return systems the GHX Circuit which looks like the letter u is like a U Turn that receives a downward flowing supply flow and shifts it into a upward flowing return flow note that down and up refer to the top and bottom of figure 1135 and not to physical directions In reverse return systems the GHX Circuit is more like a relay that sends the flow cascading farther down all the way to the last final reverse return GHX Header section C in figure 11 35 To explain this difference additional reverse return specific terminology is required Parent Child and Sibling Component Relationships Revisited The p
188. e monthly loads into the design day format following the calculations described on pages 65 66 Hourly Loads Details pertaining to importing hourly loads can be found later in this chapter in the section entitled Importing Loads Data Into the Average Block Loads Module Graphical View of Loads Users can graphically view the loads profile by pushing the graph button AE This button can be found in the Average Block Loads module as can be seen at the top of figure 3 13 Pump Selection Although the selection process is identical to selection in the Zone Manager loads module the results are slightly different Figure 3 16 shows the result after selecting a pump and then modifying the partial load factor to 0 9 on the dominant load Heat Gains side Design Day Loads 7 0 Days Week Transfer Calculate Hours Monthly Loads Page 69 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Design Day Loads Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses kBtufHr kBtufHr 8 a m Noon 0 0 300 0 Noon 4p m 500 0 200 0 4p m 8p m 200 0 0 0 8p m 8am 0 0 00 Annual Egivalent Full Load Hours Heat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate Custom Pump Select Details Clear Pump Name Cooling Heating Capacity kBtu Hr 555 6 566 3 Power kW 4445 41 01 EER COP las les Flow Rate gpm 125 0 750 Partial Load Factor 0 90 0 53 Fig 3 16 Average Block Loads Pump Selection In this case an ave
189. e program suggests the cooling tower size and flow rate The Additional Power may be included as necessary Page 91 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module 4 Note To make a kilowatt entry in the Pump Power box switch to metric units enter the kilowatt value and then return to English units Pump Power Calculator If the pump efficiency system flow rate and head loss are known or have been calculated in the CFD module the Pump Power Calculator can be used to determine the pump power The new CFD module makes it straightforward to calculate system head loss and thereby estimate the pump power with a degree of accuracy An image of the pump power calculator is shown in figure 4 4 f Pump Power Calculator Oj x Pump Power Required Pump Power hP Pump Head 50 0 ft hd Flow Rate 100 0 gpm Pump Efficiency 80 0 Fig 4 4 Pump Power Calculator Pattern Information pertaining to the ground field arrangement is in the Pattern panel This includes the vertical boreholes pattern the borehole separation the optional selection of external grid files export to AutoCAD the number of boreholes per parallel loop and the fixed borehole length design option The input screen is shown in figure 4 5 Pattern borehole separation and external grid file data also are visible and adjustable in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 6 On the Pattern tab is a built in and g map
190. e requirements of the Line Source analysis methodology The Power vs Time and Flow vs Time graphs are included for test quality control purposes Upon initial CSV data file importation only the raw data are graphed as seen below in figure 10 8 After the Calculate button is pushed in the Results tab the Page 238 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module data are analyzed and the calculated line is graphed as an overlay This can be seen in figure 10 9 The overlay calculated line depends on the user specified calculation interval specified in the Results tab Users can adjust this calculation interval and recalculate as necessary to bring the raw data and calculated lines as close together as possible This is useful for determining the optimal calculation interval For example if a user finds that the over the 12 to 40 hour time interval the two lines do not overlap closely the user might view the power vs time graph If the power vs time graph indicated a power supply instability between hours 35 and 38 the user could change the calculation interval to 12 to 34 hours recalculate the line and then compare the raw data with the new line If the newly calculated line better matches the raw data then the user might reasonably use the calculated conductivity value for the 12 to 34 hour time interval rather than for the 12 to 40 hour time interval Hourly Data i rele ey T Py E 5 amp S a 5 re 10 Time Ho
191. e sections Group Name Return Piping Style Section Outlet Information Supply Return Pipe Information and the OK Cancel buttons Each section is addressed below Group Name The group name is a parameter applied to every component in a design For the Manifold Vault the user can use the default group name or select one of his or her choosing The group name becomes important during the design review process so it is therefore critical that each Manifold Vault in a system has a unique group name Return Pipe Style For Manifold Vault systems the return piping style is locked at direct return since Manifolds Vaults are always direct return systems Section Outlet Information Page 328 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module A Manifold Vault will have two or more outlets connecting typically to GHX Modules via the GHX Modules Supply Return Runouts The Manifold Vault is a parent to the GHX Modules Details pertaining to these outlets including the number of outlets the separation between each outlet in the Manifold Vault and the section outlet pipe size which is likely to be identical to the Supply Return Runout pipe size coming in from the GHX Modules Supply Return Pipe Information In this section the designer enters the one way length of the supply return pipe pair that connects the Manifold Vault with its parent component in the design In many cases the parent component of a Manifold or Vault will be a c
192. e thermal diffusivity relates to the density of the soil and its moisture content Typical values of thermal conductivity and diffusivity for sand clay and different types of rocks can be found in the Soil Properties tables However it is recommended that soil tests are performed to obtain these values The thermal conductivity in particular has a large effect on the calculated bore length and should be determined with care through in situ tests or comparison with other projects installed in the local vicinity GLD does not encourage the use of ex situ data Drilling Log Conductivity Calculator The layer calculator is a new feature in GLD2014 that enables designers to use a drilling log to produce a quick weighted average calculation for thermal conductivity and diffusivity While some non published empirical studies indicate that weighted average calculations offer conductivity results that are different from empirically derived thermal conductivity results some designers prefer to estimate conductivity from a drill log For commercial projects thermal conductivity tests are generally recommended Figure 4 13a is a screenshot of the layer calculator Soil Thermal Properties Y View Layer Calculator Thermal Conductivity 1 22 Btu h ft F Thermal Diffusivity 0 98 ft 2 day Name Layer 2 Layer Thickness 75 0 ft Soil Type Other Conductivity 0 95 Btu h ft F Diffusivity 0 86 ft 2 day Fig 4 13a Drilling
193. each party s successors and assigns provided that Customer may not assign or transfer this End User Agreement in whole or in part without Gaia s written consent This End User Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California United States of America as if performed wholly within the state and without giving effect to the principles of conflict of law No failure of either party to exercise or enforce any of its rights under this End User Agreement will act as a waiver of such rights If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable the remaining provisions of this End User Agreement shall remain in full force and effect This End User Agreement is the complete and exclusive agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof superseding and replacing any and all prior agreements communications and understandings both written and oral regarding such subject matter Conventions Used in This Document The following symbols are used in this document to highlight certain information and features included in the User s Guide and GLD software program This caution symbol notifies the user that care must be taken at the specified location This star shaped symbol highlights new features in GLD NEW Premier 2014 The round symbol highlights suggestions for using the program more effectively or for improving designs Page 1 PREFACE Contents Contents Cop
194. each section where each section is defined as the range from the starting point to each section s end point With an ideal data set all slopes would be the same The slopes of each section are compared to the overall slope If the slope varies by more than the user defined threshold the test fails The default value is 25 Water Flow Test The water flow test is similar to the above test but checks to see if consecutive slopes are decreasing which would suggest water movement and an invalid thermal conductivity measurement The default is 10 Graphs The Thermal Conductivity module automatically graphs conductivity test data after the CSV data file from a conductivity test is imported into the module These graphs are displayed in a new stand alone Graphing Module that enables designers to review graphs and calculated results simultaneously Note that in the new Graphing Module users can left click the mouse and drag a box around an area of interest in the graph Users can then release the mouse button to zoom in on the area of interest This process can be repeated multiple times Users can right click the mouse at any time to zoom out to the original view There are four types of graphs e Temperature vs Time e Temperature vs LN time e Power vs Time e Flow vs Time An overview image can be seen in figure 10 7 The Temperature vs Time graph and the Temperature vs LN time graph are graphed according to th
195. eaeenaecaeeneeeneeenes 84 Surface Water Design Loads cccccscesssessceseceecesecseecaeeeseeeneeseeeeeseeeesecnseeaecesecneeeaeeeaes 84 CHAPTER A ts 85 The Borehole Design MOdull cccccssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeensesenenees 85 OVINA A eee lead de vn tae a 85 General Features 20 ia A OE 85 Opening Projects minini rini ier ia Ea a EEE EE e KSEE E i e aE 87 New Projects cion A E e aN 87 Existing Projects incoada E 87 Saying Projects son a E E E ERO E nee A A A R E 87 Typical O EAE A E ESS 88 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels oooooonocnnncnnncnnccnocnnocnnonconnconoconocnnnon nino E A EEE 88 II as 88 Ed pa 89 Pump Power Lala a 91 Pd ia 91 Vertical Grid ATM a 92 Separation between Vertical Bores ccccccseesseeseeesceseeeeceeeceeseeeeeeeeseenaeeaeeaes 92 The G Map BUON it lr 93 The Grid Bullet a 94 A ON 95 O ON 95 A O 96 REVIEW ictericia o abet A cat 96 O NO 98 G Function Calculator tii a 99 Export to AutoCAD Export IDF FileS oooooconoconoconocioonooonoocnonnnnononnncnnncnnncononnnno 99 Boreholes per Parallel Loop 0 ecccescceseceeesceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeenseenseenaeeeeeseensees 100 Fixed Length Mode eiii eta 100 DTD dd e cases cl A testa tly 100 Pipe Parma lo e ote adela ado 10 101 Borehole Diameter and Backfill Grout Information oooonocnocioonnonmmmmmmm o 103 OM Beek satis aks ROO CN 103 Drilling Log Conductivity Calculator ccecccccesecsceesseeeeeec
196. eat exchanger system It is for this reason that the designer would necessarily want to view and consider this information apart from the specific heat exchanger details For example if the design is a building the zone Page 179 CHAPTER 7 Reports reports will cover everything within the building while the project report essentially will contain information about everything outside or external to the building A zone report is printed from the Loads panel of the Zone Manager or directly from an Average Block Loads module by clicking the printer button in the controls A dialog window appears giving the designer the list of available report styles After the making a choice click OK to bring up the report window There are five different zone reports included with GLD e Detailed Form e Concise Form e Equipment List e Loads List e Names List Detailed Form The Detailed Form zone report is the most detailed zone report It lists all of the information included in every zone along with full explanations of the listed parameters The format is open and easy to read However as with the project reports the detailed form produces a much longer printed report than any of the more compact version reports Concise Form The Concise Form zone report contains most of the detail of the long report but it is packed into a smaller space It does not include zone names occupation days detailed pump information manufacturer s
197. ed capacity Note that in general the installed capacity for conventional systems exceeds the peak capacity of geothermal systems This is because conventional mechanical equipment is usually significantly oversized compared to the equipment in a well designed geothermal system Efficiency Here users enter the expected overall system efficiency for the selected heating equipment Note that the measurement units vary depending on the selected system 1 e efficiency for boilers and COPs for air source heat pumps Extra Power Here users enter extra power requirements for the system such as circulation pumps etc Installation Area In this section users enter the floor space square footage required by the selected heating equipment For example if a central boiler system is selected and it requires 1000 ft of mechanical room space the user can enter 1000 ft here Water Usage Rate If the selected heating equipment consumes water the user can enter the water usage rate here Geothermal In this section users enter parameters and values pertaining to the geothermal system As mentioned previously users have the option of importing relevant data Page 212 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module for the financial analysis from an open heat exchanger design project Conversely users can manually enter the geothermal project data directly into the GSA module An overview of the Geothermal panel is shown in figur
198. eduction profile However on the return side the pipe reduction is reversed Indeed on the reverse side pipe diameters increase in size as the return pipes of the GHX Header get closer and closer to the return pipe of the Supply Return Runout This can be seen via an example in figure 11 37 which is a sample auto sized reverse return GHX Module with eight GHX circuits and reducing headers this figures are part of the CFD Module display controls and are Page 293 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module explained in great detail later in this chapter For now they are included for illustrative purposes Notice how the pipe sizes reduce down from 2 all the way to 3 4 on the pipe 1 supply side ofthe GHX Header system On the pipe 2 return side of the system the pipe sizes expand in diameter as they get closer and closer to the return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout In this example the supply pipe 1 and return pipe 2 sides of the GHX Header system are palindromes Optimized reverse return systems also can be called Palindromic Reverse Returns Name Group Name Pipe 1 Size Pipe 2 Size GHX Module Supply Return Runout GHX Module 01 ao 2 25 GHX Header Section 01 GHX Module 01 26 GHX Header Section 02 GHX Module 01 26 GHX Header Section 03 GHX Module 01 25 GHX Header Section 04 GHX Module 01 26 GHX Header Section 05 GHX Module 01 1 1 2 2S GHX Header Section 06 GHX Modul
199. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeneees 104 Diffusivity Calculator ccecceeccescceseceecesecceeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeseeneenseenaecerenaeenaees 105 Modeling time Period r ra r a nana t ias a aaea Aeae daaa 105 Page 5 PREFACE Contents A NN 106 Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures oooonconcnnnnncnocnnncnnnnononcnncnnnoncnnninnos 106 Design System Flow Ratini e eeren i e aei ar 106 Solution Properties iu ia E EEOAE o 107 RE e O od ale rt a a oo 108 Design Day Results en dt ET 109 Results Subsections Fixed Temperature Mode ooooconncnnncnnocnoonconncononancnnocononnnoo 109 Results Subsections Fixed Length Mode oococonoconncnnocinonoonnonnnonnconnonnncnnoconocnnoo 112 Monthly Data Results 0 ccccesccesecseeeseeesceseceecesecnseceseceaecnaecaaecaeecaeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeaees 114 Results Subsections Fixed Length Mode cccecccsseesseesseeeceeeteeseeeeeneeeneensees 114 The Graphing Module ccccecccssecsseeseeesceseeeesceseceseceseceaecaecaaecaeeeaeeeaeeeeesereeeeeneeneensees 116 Hourly Data Results ceccccccsseessessceesceesceseceseceaecsaeceaecseeeseeeseeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeseeeaees 118 Results Subsections Fixed Length Mode cccecccssesseeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeteeneees 118 The Graphing Module cccccesccsseesseeseeseceseeeesceecescceseceaecnaecaaecseeeaeeeneeneeeeeeeeeseneeneenaees 121 The Design Compare Button c csccesccesceseceeceseceecseecaeeeneeeeeeneeeeseeerenerensees 122 Hybr
200. eehee 247 Reme iii bedi citi ena keine 247 Summary View Toggle Button cccecceccceeseeeseeesceeecesecesecsseeseeeaeenees 248 Circulation Pump Detalla iia 249 Automation ii di di 250 GHX Module iris dai efi a 251 Retumi Piping Styles cc ck hod ae n a e Ei 251 Circuit Informa tons so cick sachets siies ii ee ia 252 Headers Informati n sne e E 253 Supply Return Runout InformatiON o oonocnnnnonocnnonnconnconcnnncnnnonnnonnos 253 Manifold triaren ena e a RK R STEERER EI 254 Return Piping letal 255 Section Outlet Informati0N ooonconinnnnnninnnoonnonnconnconconnonnnon ccoo nonn conocio 255 Supply Return Runout InformatiON oooononnnnnncnocnnonnconoconcnnncnnnonnnonnos 255 Ultra Manifold dE 256 Return Piping leticia 257 Section Outlet Informati0N ooonooninnnnnnnncnocnnonnconnconccnnonnnonrnnnnonnnonnnonno 257 Supply Return Runout InformatiON ooononnnnnncnoonnonnconnconccnnonnnonnnonno 257 Pipe SIZE Seose eee eras A anne nee 258 List of Available Pipe Sizes 0ooooooconncnocnnoconononononnnonncnnncnnn cono c noc nocn noo 258 RO caren reer oer 259 Fluid Informations e ieee a eaa a e e Ri 260 Solution mi B0 01S M A I SAE T E E E 262 j E LOI EEE EAE o EE A 264 Section One Calculate and Results Display Buttons oooooncnincononincniononnnonnss 264 Section Two The Layout Manager Workspace ooooonoccoconocnconconnccnncnnconnonnnonnos 269 Customizing the Layout Panel 0 2 0 ceccesessecesecesecseeese
201. eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeaees 269 Section Three Flow Type Selection ccccsccesseesesseeesceeeceseceeeceseesaeeseeeeeenes 272 Section Four The Properties Window ccccesceesesssceseeeeeceseceseeseesseeneeeneeenes 272 Section Five The Circuit Confirmation Calculator c cccesceeesseeteeeteeneeeees 274 The GED Piping Lanas e a a cititaeness 275 Piping Components ii did 275 Piping Components Summary cccecceesceesceescesecesecseceeecaeecseeeseceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeenteesseenaes 281 Basic Piping Grammar sineira i R EEE E E EE E ae 281 CONCEPT ONE Component Families o ooonconnnnnnnincnncnnocnconnnonconnconoconono nono neos 281 CONCEPT TWO Parent Child and Sibling Component Relationships 282 CONCEPT THREE Parallel and Serial Flow Paths oooooononnnnnnnninnnonnconmmmmo 283 CONCEPT FOUR Direct and Reverse Return GHX Headers oooococccoccconconos 284 SAMPLE LOOPFIELD LAYOUTS osian aoran i A RA E a 294 BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 1 ononionicniciconincnoninccnninnos 294 BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 2 oocooconoccccconconcnnninnonncnnos 297 BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 3 conconcnicnicicononcnoninncnninnos 300 BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 4 ooonccniccccnoccnnninanccnninnos 301 BASIC REVERSE RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT lonconcnicnconicnnoninncnninnos 302 Building Piping Systems ci esac A ad ec 305 Manual Methods io 305 Adding a NewBipe Pati sit 305 Adding a New GHX Circle
202. eholes in the design and then defining the borehole length fixing the total design length After entering these data as well as the other design parameters the software calculates results such as the inlet and outlet temperatures and the coefficient of performance COP etc based on the input data The fixed length feature is well suited for designing when land resources are limited when a designer wishes to quickly reverse engineer a system etc Additionally when the borehole design module is linked to an Average Block loads module that has monthly or hourly loads data entered the program can calculate and report monthly and or hourly inlet temperatures and COP EER values A more complete description about how to enter data and perform calculations in the Borehole Design module is provided in Chapter 4 Theoretical Basis To continue providing geothermal system designers with the widest range of flexibility two separate theoretical models now are included within the GLD framework The first model and the original one used exclusively in GLD versions 1 4 is based on the cylindrical source model and allows for quick length or temperature calculations based on limited data input The second is based on a line source theory but is more detailed in its ability to generate monthly and or hourly temperature profiles over time given monthly loads and peak data and or hourly loads data This second model is also able to model the impact of b
203. eiss wal Graph Data 200 l EA Monts H poets 500 I Geo Total Cooling Loads IV Geo Total Heating Loads IV Geo Peak Cooling Loads 400 IV Geo Peak Heating Loads 1504 I Hyb Total Cooling Loads IV Hyb Total Heating Loads IV Hyb Peak Cooling Loads i Y S S L Y Hyb Peak Heating Loads 100 Y Show Title Show Legend Peak Loads kBtu hr Y Ss S Total Loads kBtu 1000 100 1 E 0 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Time Months Fig 4 34 The hybrid loads graphing module The user can the hit the Calculate button in the borehole module to see how the reduced geothermal loads impact the geothermal borefield design The designer can repeat the process as necessary until achieving a desired design outcome When the user is satisfied with the design the user has the option of exporting the geothermal and hybrid loads via the File gt Export File gt Export Hybrid Data option as can be seen in figure 4 35 Exporting this data in a text file for further review and manipulation in a spreadsheet like Excel may be useful on some projects Page 129 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Ground Loop Design Premier Edition Units Tables Settings Window Help Upgrade AE Bl 8 View Loads HeatPumps Tools New Borehole New Horizontal New Surface Water New Geothermal System Analyzer New Thermal Conductivity New Piping Open Ctrl O Save C
204. ejection where the simple line source model fails Since a number of pipes may be buried in close proximity this model must be modified to account for all mutual pipe interactions A major benefit derived from using this model besides its ability to accurately assess heat transfer is that both the horizontal and the vertical design modules can operate under the same loads formalism In 1948 Ingersoll and Plass demonstrated that the Kelvin line source theory could be used to estimate the change in temperature of a buried pipe in which heat is being absorbed or rejected Ingersoll and Plass 1948 In a ground coupling system an apparent thermal resistance between the circulating fluid and the undisturbed ground dominates the overall resistance In 1985 in the ASHRAE Design Data Manual for Ground Coupled Heat Pumps Parker et al outlined a method by which this field resistance or soil resistance could be estimated and applied to determine piping and trench length requirements for a buried pipe system In the case of horizontal pipe systems located near the ground surface the mathematics necessitate the inclusion of mirror image pipes into the calculations These mirror image pipes are located the same distance above the surface as the buried pipes are below it In a multiple pipe system the soil temperature in the vicinity of any single pipe is determined by both the undisturbed earth temperature and by the thermal inte
205. emperatures were average peak temperatures By presenting absolute peak temperatures it makes it easier for the designer to compare results from the Design Day cylindrical source theory and the Monthly Data line source theory Some designers enjoy making this comparison because seeing similar results from two divergent heat transfer theories calculation methodologies enhances design confidence er Page 116 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module ad On the flip side results discrepancies between the two theories can enable designers to hone in on potential design issues Note that absolute peak temperatures are sensitive to the hours at peak input which can be seen in figure 3 13 The fourth subsection lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and demand of all the equipment the calculated seasonal heat pump efficiency the calculated design day efficiency and the calculated average annual power consumption The peak load is the maximum and is determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel In GLD Premier 2014 the calculated seasonal cooling and heating heat pump efficiency values over the design lifetime are quite useful for lifecycle cost and CO emissions analyses in the GSA module The design day efficiency is the predicated heat pump performance on the cooling and heating design d
206. ems Below is a table on maintenance costs adapted from Hughes et al HVAC System Type Maintenance Costs Air cooled chiller gas fired water boiler 0 94 m yr 0 088 ft yr Geothermal system 0 99 m yr 0 093 ft yr Water cooled chiller gas fired steam boiler 1 45 m yr 0 135 ft yr Water cooled chiller gas fired water boiler 2 01 m yr 0 187 ft yr Page 204 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Below is a table on maintenance costs adapted from Cane et al System Type Average Age Mean Maint Costs in 1997 dollars Geothermal system 5 1m7 yr 0 093 ft yr Water source heat pump 18 3 3m yr 0 31 ft7 yr Packaged air to air 2 5m yr 0 47 ft yr Split air to air 24 4m yr 0 37 yr Reciprocating chiller 2 4 40m yr 0 4 yr Centrifugal chiller 20 5 5m yr 0 52 4 yr Absorption chiller 29 8m yr 0 75 ft yr Below is a third table with data based off of an analysis conducted by Dohrmann and Alereza System Type Age of System years 0 2 5 10 20 Geothermal 2 2m yr 2 3m yr 2 4m yr 2 6m yr 2 96m yr system 0 208 ft yr 0 215 ft yr 0 226 ft yr 0 243 yr 0 277 yr WLHP 3 84m yr 3 92m yr 4 03m yr 4 21m yr 4 58m yr 0 36 4 yr 0 367 ft yr 0 378 ft yr 80 395 ft y
207. equirements vary smoothly but significantly for differing source inlet temperatures Three points taken along both the capacity vs temperature and power vs temperature curves are fit to a polynomial equation to model these variations The resulting calculated coefficients are then used to generate capacity or power values for any given source inlet temperature The basic polynomial equation used for fitting has the form y at bx cx where a b and c are the three coefficients calculated from the fitting routine For the capacity case y represents the capacity and x is the desired temperature For the power input determination y is the power and x again is the temperature Be aware that these coefficients do change for metric and English units The software stores coefficients for each pump and then uses the coefficients with the source inlet temperatures chosen by the designer to determine the unit capacity and power Flow Rate Page 39 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps To model the effect of the source flow rate on the calculated capacity and power data from a second flow rate are used Generally speaking with different flow rates the shape of the capacity and power curves does not change significantly but is shifted up or down by a constant factor This factor is determined for each of the three temperature data points and averaged over those input to obtain the linear flow factor which is show
208. er Adding Pump Sets Obtained from External Sources The actual original heat pump data files hpd will not be deleted unless their names are identical to those being installed Thus all data can be recovered even if the previous version of the Pumplist gld file is overwritten However this will A Page 16 PREFACE Before You Begin either involve editing the Pumplist gld file manually to include the customized data or identifying those files within the program itself In general if there are only a few pump sets to add working within the program may be best If there are many cutting and pasting from the old file using a text editor may prove to be more efficient Remember to modify the number of manufacturers if necessary If the user has created customized heat pump sets it may be wise to make a backup of all data files prior to removal and re installation Additionally customized data reference files should be backed up before any user modified GLD menu HTML documents are replaced The linked HTML documents themselves will not be overwritten Program Licensing This section describes the USB dongle and license transfer options available in GLD Premier 2014 Edition Software License Dongle Your GLD software license is stored on the USB dongle that came with your program This dongle enables you effortlessly to transfer GLD from one computer to another Please be careful not to misplace this dongle Lost dongles cannot
209. er Section CC and back through return pipe B of GHX Header Section BB and back through return pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA In other words in a direct return system the flow paths get longer and longer as the GHX Circuits go out farther and farther In figure 11 30 above it is clear that a molecule of water flowing through circuit 1 travels a shorter distance and returns faster to the circulation pump than a molecule of water flowing through circuit 2 or circuit 3 Page 286 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Figure 11 31 is a direct return three GHX Circuit GHX Module in the Layout Manager Workspace that is identical to the GHX Module in figure 11 30 It shows how the Layout Manager Workspace displays direct return systems The flow paths have been added to enhance understanding As can be seen in figure 11 31 direct return GHX Header sections and pipe pairs are represented by this symbol fluid supply flow paths fluid return flow paths Fig 11 31 Fluid Flow Paths of the Direct Return GHX Module The progressively lengthening flow paths can be seen via the dotted fluid supply and return flow paths The flow loop that reaches its end in Circuit 1 before working its way back up to return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout A is shorter than the full flow loop that ends in Circuit 2 before working its way back up through return pipe B of the GHX Header B before finally
210. er design project see below Importing Data from an Open Heat Exchanger Design Project If a designer wishes to perform a financial and emissions analysis of a vertical horizontal or pond project that he or she designed with GLD he or she can do so by following these steps 1 Open the project file vertical horizontal or pond of interest and make sure that the loads file zone manager or average block that is linked to the project file is open as well 2 Push the import button on the toolbar at the top of the GSA module It looks like this 9 3 A window similar to the image below will appear Page 193 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Finance Module Import Design Module Selection Select the design module from which you would like to import data Horizontal Design Project HorizontalSample Select the project design module of interest and click Ok 4 The relevant design parameters automatically will be loaded into the GSA module Please note that if a user imports a surface water project the user must manually enter equivalent full load hours into the geothermal tab This is because in GLD the surface water loads modules neither have nor require full load hours inputs see Chapter 6 and page 156 Existing Projects Existing GSA projects may be opened at any time from within the GSA module by choosing Open from the GSA module toolbar Saving Projects GSA projects ma
211. erface The two lists on the Results panel are for heating and cooling Although all of the numbers shown are valid and respond to changes the side with the longer required length is printed in bold type so that it stands out The longer length determines the installation size and for this reason the shorter length system results lose relevance The Results panel is divided into two sections On the top is the reporting section which presents the calculation results The lower Optional Hybrid System section is included to assist in the sizing of a hybrid system This is a convenient tool for hybrid type designs which may be desirable when the cooling length Page 150 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module exceeds that of heating or when the heating length exceeds that of cooling The hybrid options are discussed in more detail below Reporting Section The reporting section is further separated into several subsections The first deals with the trenches including the total length the number of trenches and the length for one trench A common way to adjust the trench length to a desired value is to change the trench number on the Configuration panel The associated pipe length both total and for a single trench directly follow the reported trench lengths The pipe lengths are a function of the selected configuration of pipe in the trench so the length of trench is always less than the length of pipe when anything other than
212. eries and type or full descriptions of the items listed It does however contain important information about the loads and the operational parameters of the equipment matched to those loads Equipment List The Equipment List lists only the equipment associated with each zone It provides detailed pump information including name number manufacturer series and type plus all of the operational data associated with that pump It is an ideal report for engineers or contractors who require equipment lists but do not necessarily need to know further details about the design Page 180 CHAPTER 7 Reports Loads List The Loads List lists only the loads associated with each zone It provides the Design Day loads at the different periods during the day in both heating and cooling modes For the Borehole Design module the Loads report includes the annual hours and weekly occupation information Names List The Names List is just a list of the full reference names of the different zones combined with the zone number pump name and number of pumps required for the zone It makes a convenient compact link between zone name and number and is especially useful when the project consists of many separate zones Finance Reports Finance reports are printed directly from the GSA module They include the project information and financial data presented in different formats Five different finance reports exist A finance report is pr
213. es Managing the Average Block Loads The buttons along the top of the Average Block Loads module are used to work with the single panel of loads information A closer view is shown in figure 3 12 cje slaja 2 Fig 3 12 Average Block Loads Module Controls The buttons on the left are zone editing controls and include only New and Clear To the right are the Open and Save buttons for opening and saving the zone files along with the Print button for printing various zone reports The last button on the right is the Import Loads button which is explained towards the end of this chapter Unlike the Zone Manager there are no Auto Select buttons k New A new set of loads data may be created initially by clicking the New button Since only one panel is allowed this button becomes disabled after a new set appears It is re enabled when the set is cleared 5 Clear To delete all of the current information press the Clear button Entering Loads The method of entering loads data into the Average Block is nearly identical to the method used in the Zone Manager There are two main differences The first is that the summed loads values may be larger than the smaller values used in individual zones Refer to the Zone Manager Entering Zones section or the end of this chapter for specific details about the Design Day Loads Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours and Days Occupied per Week sections Note that the Annual Equivalent Full Load Ho
214. es 11 70 and 11 71 GHX Module Runout A A GHX Header Section 1 C C MT Pipe Pair 1 B B Pipe Pair 2 D D Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Circuit 4 Fig 11 70 An Example of Two Circuits Per Parallel Loop Page 324 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bal GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 Pipe Pair U Circuit 02 26 GHX Header Section 01 El U Circuit 03 Pipe Pair U Circuit 04 Fig 11 71 An Example of Two Circuits Per Parallel Loop Circuits Per One Way Length Here the user enters the number of GHX Circuits he or she desires per one way length Put another way if a designer wants to have two GHX Circuits in parallel or in series for example in a single borehole the designer can enter a 2 here Examples of GHX Circuits in parallel and series can be seen in figures 11 72 and 11 73 below Layout Design and Optimization Calculate MEN 4 GHX Module Supply Return Pipe ooo Y Circuit 01 U Circuit 02 Fig 11 72 Two Circuits Per One Way Length Parallel Flow Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El E GHX Module Supply Return Pipe El U Circuit 01 UY HATE Fig 11 73 Two Circuits Per One Way Length Series Flow Page 325 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Supply Return Pipe Information In this section th
215. es the pump name Linked Component In this section the name of the component in the Layout panel that has the circulation pump associated with it is displayed here If the designer adds a pump directly from the Circulation Pumps tabbed panel and not through the Layout panel the linked component will be left blank Note that most designers find it more efficient to add pumps from within the Layout panel Required Pressure Drop In this section the designer specifies the required pressure drop for the pump Again if the designer adds the circulation pump from the Layout panel the required pressure drop automatically will be transferred from the Layout panel results which store the calculated fluid dynamics results Note that when the designer adds a circulation pump in the Layout panel the details of the pump are stored and updated dynamically in the Circulation Pump panel When the fluid dynamics are updated in the Layout panel the results are dynamically updated in the Circulation Pump panel as well Page 250 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Required Flow Rate In this section the designer specifies the required flow rate for the pump Again if the designer adds the circulation pump from the Layout panel the required flow rate automatically will be transferred from the Layout panel results which store the calculated fluid dynamics results Note that when the designer adds a circulation pump in t
216. es using the Pipe and Fitting Manager the designer can hit OK to save the updates into the design If the designer hits Cancel all updated information will be lost All updates made in the Pipe and Fitting Manager can be seen in the Properties Window Using the techniques and tools described in this Manual Techniques section a user can design and build a near infinite range of geothermal GHX fields After the design is complete the user can see how it performs Calculations and performance will be addressed later in this chapter Automatic Methods The CFD module also offers a range of tools for the designer who desires to have the module automatically build a wide range of piping systems These automatic methods provide the designer with tremendous power flexibility and time savings While manually building and optimizing a GHX Module using the manual methods described above could take anywhere from a couple of minutes to an hour to complete the automatic methods described below can complete nearly any task in a matter of seconds Automated system building tools include The GHX Module Builder direct and reverse return The Manifold Vault Builder The Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder The GHX Module Builder The GHX Module Builder is a powerful tool that automatically builds flow balanced GHX Modules of any size and complexity The GHX Module Builder can be accessed from within the Layout Manager Workspace in the Layout Panel
217. eseeeseeseeneenaees 229 Typical Operation minita db 230 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels ccccccesccsseesseesceeseeseceeecesecnseceseeaecaecsaecseecaeesaeeeeeaeeenes 230 DIM US dde Tepeaca sus 230 Powder ce bad e a Geek bet le Rs a 231 O NN 232 REET NE EE AEE A ea tn co dba e ca a dl e a 233 Calculation Intervalo td cd dl Lal 235 Calculation Results seco dida 235 Data Quilla ita tidad Js 236 Power Standard Deviation ooooonoccnonnooncononononnnonnnonnonononnnc nono nocn nono noo 236 PO WEE VA dia 236 A RO 236 ER e e ad eet 236 SA E 237 Water Plow Testi dd eke di de 237 A Dos enc ee ssata esha tose Saha MEANS AE Ase ee 237 Printing REPOrts e tl ediiehiteds Leeeni ud E 239 CHAPTER Td ai aia 240 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module ccccessssseeeeeeeeeeeees 240 OVERVIEW 2st Bote RIE EE EA aio keene 240 Nomenclatura tddi ae 242 General Features uni e oe 243 Theoretical Basisvs c scr nnn dla ees 244 Opening Projects iia acta 244 New Pro d 245 Existing Pro iii as oa cares Rev e e E neha ae 245 Saving Proein Se Ae Mee eee ai eens 245 Typical Operaatio Nesis asee e A nanan wae 245 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels s ss nensessenesseeeessesersreseesessteressesesseserseeseesessrerestenessreressese 246 Circulation PUMP ista 246 Page 10 PREFACE Contents Managing Circulation PUMPS sicrie E 247 Newand Copy ei cot scented ti 247 Remove and Cleat i4 sccchiisd abi olen t
218. esign modes Rather than introduce the tools twice in both the manual methods subsection and the automatic methods subsection many are described only in the manual methods subsection Therefore designers that intend to use only the automatic methods still will benefit from reading the entire section Manual Methods The CFD module offers a range of techniques and tool for the designer who desires to build manually a piping system from the ground up These techniques and tools include how to Add a new pipe pair Add a new GHX Circuit Drag and drop pipe pairs and circuits Copy and paste pipe pairs and circuits Hide and display nested component families Delete pipe pairs and circuits Modify parameters with the Properties Window e Modify parameters with the Pipe and Fitting Manager Each of these will be explored in detail below Adding a New Pipe Pair Adding a new pipe pair is typically the first step a designer will take when manually designing a system He or she can do so from the Layout Panel On the panel the user can move the mouse into the Layout Manager Workspace see figure 11 16 and then right click to bring up window as see in figure 11 47 Note that the reverse return pipe pair option is inaccessible at this preliminary design stage Manually building a reverse return flow system requires that a standard pipe pair act as a parent to the first reverse return pipe pair Reverse return systems are described in some detail
219. f detail that GLD can accept In these cases the designer or GLD must make modifications to the imported data to assure that the proper level of detail is retained In this way the program can be Page 75 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones certain to calculate the appropriate heat exchanger size These modifications are explained at the end of this chapter Figure 3 19 is an example of how GLD displays the monthly loads of figure 3 17 in the Design Day formalism found on the main page of the Average Block Loads module Design Day Loads Design Day Loads Days Occupied Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses per Week MBtufHr MBtu Hr 7 0 8 a m Noon 157 2 ay 4 Petre Noon 4p m 552 1 Transfer 4p m 8p m 157 2 Calculate Hours 8p m 8a m 1572 00 Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours 1559 Fig 3 19 Results of Importing Hourly Loads Data When the user selects a valid hourly loads import file the program automatically transfers the data into the active Average Block Loads module At present time GLD can accept hourly data files from the IES lt VE gt aps files and Trane Trace gt files software products as well as from CSV files If a user wishes to see GLD integrated with other 3rd party simulation tools please contact GLD support As mentioned previously when an hourly data file is imported into the Average Block Loads module the Hourly Data checkbox will be checked as can be seen in figure 3
220. f the manufacturer information is changed it will change for every series connected to that manufacturer Proceed or Cancel will return the user to the Pump Edit Pane x Delete Series Control The Delete Series control button deletes the current series If the series is the only series of a manufacturer the manufacturer also will be deleted automatically Note The actual heat pump file hpd will not be deleted from the pumps directory If necessary the series can be restored by creating a New Series The user need only provide the appropriate manufacturer and series name and use the deleted hpd filename for the pump set Filename Incomplete fields will be recreated from the hpd file If the original file no longer Page 43 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps exists the program creates a new hpd file Incidentally the same system can be used to add new pump sets obtained from external sources as described below General Information The General panel is the first panel a user sees when he or she decides to input data for a new pump It has an input box for the name of the pump and in the Pump Type area the user selects whether the pump should be classified as a water to air or a water to water pump An example of the pump General panel is shown in the lower right pane of figure 2 2 The General panel also now has recommended and minimum pressure drop and flow rate input boxes for each
221. f the parameters entered by the designer during the design process Parameters are placed into sections with names taken directly from the panels in the heat exchanger design modules The filename of the zone file associated with the project is listed under the Loads heading Loads This section contains all of the loads data entered in the Average Block loads module peak loads and monthly loads as well if entered This section is only available in borehole module reports since only the borehole module is capable of calculating monthly inlet temperatures based on the input loads Monthly Inlet Temperatures This section contains a summary section of the average and peak inlet temperatures followed by the month by month temperatures and other associated data Comments This section at the end of the report is reserved for any additional information that the designer would like to include with the project Zone Reports Zone or loads reports are printed directly from the Loads modules They include only the project information and data from the zones presented in different formats Five different zone reports exist containing complete or specific information about the zones Zone reports work in conjunction with project reports but are actually a separate entity They are representative of the actual installation rather than the heat exchanger portion of the system Zone delineation loads and equipment are separate from the h
222. filling out the form Note that to reduce repetitive data entry designer and company information can be entered in the Settings dropdown menu at the top of the design studio This information then automatically populates part of the Information panel Borehole Design Project verticalsampleforManual J x Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kW Information Project Information Project Name Borehole Design Sample Project Designer Name D B Engineer Date 10 5 2007 v Project Start Date 10 5 2007 v Client Name ABC Corp 1333 Any St Cd al Address Line 1 1333 Any St Address Line 2 Suite 2200 City Anytown Phone 555 555 1212 State Fax 555 555 1213 2p Boza Emal Comments This is a sample borehole project file for Ground Loop Design Fig 4 2 Information Panel Contents Extra kW Additional energy that is utilized by the system can be entered in the Extra kW panel The entry boxes are shown in figure 4 3 This panel is included for entire system average efficiency calculations The top entry box Circulation Pumps is for the energy required by the system circulation pumps The middle entry box Optional Cooling Tower is for the Page 90 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module energy required by a cooling tower if used The lower entry box Additional Power Requirements is for all other elements besides the heat pump units in the system that may requir
223. fluid types and flow rates are identical in all regards except for the return piping style and therefore the calculated difference is a valid theoretical result Modeling reverse return GHX Header systems mathematically in a non trivial task As a result reverse return GHX Header systems in the CFD module in the current version of GLD have certain requirements including Reverse return systems must include at least two reverse return pipe pairs and three GHX Circuit in one nested family of components Remembering these reverse return requirements will enable a designer to design more quickly Now that the four core concepts have been reviewed component families component relationships parallel and series flow and direct reverse returns we will examine five loopfield designs Four are direct return and one is reverse return SAMPLE LOOPFIELD LAYOUTS BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 1 Figure 11 39 is an illustration of a direct return two GHX Circuit GHX Module The Supply Return Runout GHX header section and their associated fittings are in black The GHX Circuits and their associated fittings are in red Note that pipe and fitting lengths within a single component do now have to be the same length For example the return pipe of the Supply Return Runout A is longer than the supply pipe of the Supply Return Runout A Between each connection a space has been added to visibly separate different sections of the system fo
224. for installation costs controls costs maintenance costs or replacement time periods 1t is worthwhile confirming that the baseline cost data have been entered If the data have not been entered results cannot be calculated Page 206 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Utility Costs Input parameters relating to utility costs are located in the Utility Costs panel as shown in figure 9 6 These include summer and winter utility costs for a range of fuel types the expected annual inflation rates for each fuel type and an overall discount rate that is used in the NPV calculations The Utility Costs panel is divided into two sections rates for common fuels and annual inflation rates Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives Rates for Common Fuels Energy Source SUMMER WINTER Electricity 0 11 Fuel Oil 4 00 Natural Gas 1 50 Propane 3 50 Wood 300 00 Coal 350 00 Biomass 300 00 Water 0 0038 kWh Gallon therm Gallon ton ton ton Gallon 0 11 kWh 4 00 Gallon 1 50 therm 3 50 Gallon 300 00 ton 350 00 ton 300 00 ton 0 0038 Gallon Annual Inflation Rates Fuel Inflation Rate Electricity y 4 Maintenance Inflation Rate Discount Inflation Rate as Fig 9 6 Utility Costs Panel Contents Rates for Common Fuels The rates for common fuels can be entered in the Rates fo
225. fore proceeding Note If data for only one flow rate are available only the first capacity and power requirement data must be included under the section entitled FLOW RATE 1 The data under FLOW RATE 2 can be left as zeroes and the program will ignore them leaving the flow factor as 1 0 Load Side Corrections Corrections resulting from variations in inlet temperatures and flow rates on the load side can be entered in the Load Temperatures and Load Flows tabbed panels of the Pump Edit pane If these corrections are not added the factors remain at 1 0 and input variations in load temperature or flow rate will have no effect on calculated capacities and or input power Time permitting however it is best to include as much information as possible from what the manufacturer provides Load Temperatures Panel The Loads Temperatures panel is where corrections for variations in the load inlet temperature are input Both the cooling and heating information taken at the average or standard source temperature and flow rate and the average load flow rate are entered on the same panel an example of which is shown in figure 2 5 The factors shown in figure 2 5 were calculated from a manufacturer s list of capacities provided for the different temperatures using the capacity at the selected temperature as the numerator and the capacity at 67 F for cooling 70 F for heating as the denominator The 67 F 70 F capacity values
226. ft s Fig 11 88 Viewing Results in the Review Panel In the Review Panel users can view the same results that can be viewed in the Layout Manager Workspace Some designers find the results in the Review Panel to be easier to review because of the vertical column format Users are able to calculate updated results from within the Review Panel review detailed results for a particular component in the Properties Window and adjust the viewed results as necessary using the same Display button Figure 11 89 below for example shows a variety results pipe size fluid velocity and Reynold s Page 340 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Number that would be interesting when reviewing design issues related to purging Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Name Pipe 1 Size i i i i ity Pipe 1 Reynold s Number Pipe 2 Reynold s Number GHX Module Supply Return Pipe e U Circuit 01 35 GHX Header Section 01 U circuit 02 35 GHX Header Section 02 U circuit 03 35 GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 35 GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 35 GHX Header Section 05 U circuit 06 36 GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 89 Viewing A Set of Results Well Suited for Purging Design Users have the option of sorting data by column by clicking on the top of any of the columns Reorganizing the data back to its original state c
227. g Use the buttons on the bottom of the window to toggle between the two On the right is the monthly partial load factor calculated by GLD The data can be modified directly in the Import Loads window or by hitting the Modify button the Page 74 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones user can open the file in the Equivalent Hours Calculator where the data can be edited as well The user can transfer the modified data into the Average Block Loads module by pressing the Transfer button When both the Calculator and the Import Loads windows are open the program first will ask the user from which window the Calculator or the Import Loads window he or she wishes to transfer data The program then prompts the user to decide to which loads heating or cooling the data should be transferred J Import Loads Import Data Filename Sample gt1 Generated By Trane Trace 700 g Total Peak Monthly kBtu kBtuyhr Load Factor January February March April May June July August September October November December Total Max 860778 0 Full Load Hours Close Cooling Heating Fig 3 18 Import Loads Window Since loads calculation programs express results in a number of different ways GLD edits the input data so that it matches the Design Day formalism used on the main screen of the Average Block Loads Modules Occasionally however the data from external loads programs do not have the hour by hour level o
228. generator A g map is a 3D graph that visually describes how the borefield layout and thermal diffusivity influence ground temperature changes over time assuming a steady state borehole temperature GLD Premier 2014 generates a g map demand for any possible Page 92 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module vertical borefield design just one of many unique features that GLD provides to designers The map enables the designer to visually understand how the boreholes in a system will interact thermodynamically and influence ground temperature changes over time In addition users can now lay out any possible loopfield design using the GridBuilder Module With the GridBuilder users no longer have to manually enter x y coordinate for non standard designs Instead the user can auto build a wide range of standard and non standard systems Vertical Grid Arrangement The standard Borehole Design module is configured to accept equally spaced borehole patterns based on an x y coordinate system For rectangular systems users can enter the pattern directly into the rows across and rows down boxes For non rectangular systems see external grid files below Separation between Vertical Bores This value is the center to center distance between adjacent bores For optimal use of space the current calculations allow only one spacing distance between vertical bores in either direction Y Borehole Design Project 1 bed E Ex Results Fluid Soi
229. gn Day Loads From Excel and Spreadsheets From Excel Spreadsheets There are two ways to import Design Day and annual energy loads data from Excel or another spreadsheet into the Zone Manager Loads module Both methods require the loads data to be in the following format Each row of data is for one month of the year with the first populated row representing January loads and the last populated row representing December loads Cooling Total Cooling Peak Heating Total Heating Peak kBtu kBtu hr kBtu kBtu hr 55287 335 382470 1060 46953 345 150525 1105 106020 831 98665 745 194889 1008 37332 325 323767 1066 11014 115 424979 1252 291 22 567918 1325 0 516207 1260 0 381425 1245 61574 87 204515 938 98623 225 69766 377 144339 200 52249 347 206000 897 The first way to import the loads data is the copy paste method Find the Import Loads command in the Design Studio Loads menu Select Import Loads and an Import Loads window similar to that in Fig 3 18 will appear GLD expects the Excel data to be in the above order and format To import the Excel data simply highlight the four columns in the Excel spreadsheet and copy them onto the clipboard Ctrl C Note highlight only the numeric data DO NOT highlight the column and row descriptions if any Then in the Import Loads window click on the Excel icon The data will be imported The data can be modified directly in the Import Loads
230. gner might not aim for a full load balance Instead the designer may desire to reduce the loopfield so that it can fit in an available area at a project site The loopfield may still be cooling or heating dominant but it may be a smaller loopfield than it would be otherwise without the use of the hybrid equipment Page 124 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Cooling Hybrids In any case where the calculated boring lengths for cooling are longer than those for heating the difference in the lengths can be eliminated through the use of a secondary cooling system tied in parallel to the geothermal ground loop This requires that either the cooling hybrid capacity is chosen such that both the peak load and the annual load to the ground are balanced or if a full balance is unnecessary a capacity is chosen that allows for downsizing the loop to an acceptable length Heating Hybrids Heating hybrid systems are similar to cooling hybrid systems except that they are added in order to reduce the overall heating load on the system Cooling and Heating Hybrids In certain circumstances a design may warrant a combined cooling and heating hybrid design The Hybrid LoadSplitter Tool To design a hybrid system properly 1t is essential that the designer has a detailed understanding of the relationship between the peak and total loads of a system The brand new Hybrid LoadSplitter tool enables the designer to understand this relationship quickl
231. gram does not care how the system is installed In other words from a calculation perspective a pit layout is functionally identical to a trench layout If the design calls for an excavated pit with rows of pipe along the bottom of the pit users can enter such parameters For the pit layout each trench can be thought of as a row of pipe at the bottom of the pit The number of rows of pipe in the pit may be modified at any time using the up down arrows Separation refers to the center to center distance between adjacent rows of pipe in the pit The program assumes all rows will be equal in separation length depth and width Since GLD2010 the minimum center to center distance between adjacent rows of pipe has been reduced to provide designer with greater flexibility for designs such as racetrack systems Note that these tightly packed systems require significantly more pipe for a given performance level and therefore generally are not recommended Figure 5 5 below demonstrates a sample pit design used fixed area mode note that fixed area mode does not have to be used for pit designs In the sample below the pit has dimensions of 100 ft x 500ft The pit is eight feet deep At the bottom of the pit are 20 rows of pipe with five foot separation between rows Page 139 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module W Horizontal Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW Information Fixed Area Mode
232. h each mode For the fixed temperature mode the entering water temperatures can be adjusted while for the fixed length mode the borehole length can be modified This can be seen in figure 4 9 c Fixed Length fes o gt 60 0 Borehole Length 300 Ft Fig 4 9 Design Method in Expanded User Interface U Tube The U Tube panel contains information related to the pipe and bore The main purpose of the panel is to obtain a value for the borehole thermal resistance BTR Calculated according to the method of Paul and Remund Paul 1996 the thermal resistance calculation takes into account the pipe parameters and positioning the borehole diameter and the grout thermal conductivity If desired an experimentally determined value of the BTR also may be entered into the textbox which then overrides all calculations In GLD Premier 2014 the updated Thermal Conductivity module can calculate BTR from empirical data The panel contents are shown in figure 4 10 Page 101 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Borehole Design Project verticalsampleformanual Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kW Information Calculated Borehole Equivalent Thermal Resistance Borehole Thermal Resistance 0 231 h ft F Btu Pipe Parameters Pipe Resistance 0 104 h ft F Btu Check Pipe Tables Pipe Size 1in 25mm Outer Diameter 1 32 in U Tube Configuration Inner Diameter 1 08 in Single Pipe Type
233. hare the parent supply pipe A of the GHX Module Reverse Return Runout The siblings are vertically stacked Can you find the serial flow paths in figure 11 43 Remember serial flow paths are stacked with indentation The following paths are in series Page 301 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 2 e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Supply Pipe B of GHX Header Section BB Circuit 3 e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Supply Pipe B of GHX Header Section BB Circuit 4 Each of these flow paths consists of a linear series of parent child connections BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 4 Figure 11 44 is the layout for another four circuit two GHX circuits per bore GHX Module The two circuits per bore or double U tubes according to some nomenclature are in series Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A E U Circuit 01 U Circuit 02 8 gt GHX Header Section B B E U Circuit 03 U iter Fig 11 44 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 4 in Layout Manager Workspace Can you find the parallel flow paths in figure 11 44 Remember parallel flow paths are vertically stacked The following paths are in parallel Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of the GHX Header Sec
234. he Design Studio File menu or toolbar The file automatically opens into a new Surface Water Design Project module If a loads file zon is associated with the loaded project the loads file will be loaded automatically into the appropriate loads module and opened along with the project file However if the associated loads file cannot be found the user will be notified and the automatic file loading will not occur Saving Projects Projects may be saved at any time using Save or Save As from the Design Studio File menu or by clicking the save button on the toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user if he or she would like to save the project file Typical Operation Page 162 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Although each user has his or her own style the typical operation of the Surface Water Design module would include the following steps e Enter Loads and select pump in either the Average Block Loads module or the Zone Manager module Form a link between the loads module and the design module Modify step by step the input parameters listed in each panel Perform initial calculation Modify various parameters and recalculate to determine the effects of the modifications Establish an optimal system e Save and or print the project and associated zone file Before You Begin The theoretical model which is based on experimental data and non laminar flow
235. he Layout panel the details of the pump are stored and updated dynamically in the Circulation Pump panel When the fluid dynamics are updated in the Layout panel such as well selecting a different flow rate the results are dynamically updated in the Circulation Pump panel as well Required Input Power The required input power is calculated automatically from the user defined pump power and pump motor efficiency It is anticipated that a future version of GLD will include a comprehensive circulation pump database that automatically calculates required input power Automation Input parameters relating to piping system design automation are located in the Automation panel as shown in figure 11 5 These parameters are divided into several sub tabbed panels including those related to individual GHX Modules Manifolds Ultra Manifolds and Pipe Size options available for use by the auto building algorithms The combined information stored in the Automation panel is used by the CFD module s algorithms to build and or auto size piping systems Figure 11 5 is an overview of the entire Automation panel Page 251 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module b Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Manifold and GHX Module Automation Presets GHX Module Manifold Ultra Manifold Pipe Sizes Return Piping Style Return Type Reverse Return Circuit Information Circuits Headers Number
236. he Loads tabbed panel of the Zone Manager loads module 1t has some differences there is an hourly data check box a monthly loads button there is no list of zones and the pump matching section has a different format Page 65 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Average Block Loads eye E ES Untitled zon Reference Label Design Day Loads 7 0 Days Week Design Day Loads Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses IF Hourly Data KBtu Hr kBtu Hr Tier 8a m Noon 0 0 om Noon 4p m 0 0 Calculate Hours 4p m 8p m 0 0 00 Monthly Loads 8p m 8a m 00 0 0 Annual Egivalent FulLoad Hours 0 o mHeat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate IV Custom Pump Pump Name Cooling Heating Select Capacity kBtu Hr 0 0 0 0 Details Power kW 0 00 0 00 EER COP 0 0 0 0 Flow Rate gpm 0 0 mep Partial Load Factor 0 00 0 00 Flow Rate Fae amin Unit Inlet F 85 0 50 0 Fig 3 10 Average Block Loads Module Average Block Loads r Monthly Load Data cooing 2 Heating E Update Total Peak zi Total Peak Cancel kBtu 2 kBtu hr 2 ketu 0 kBtu hr 2 A January February March April May June July August September October November December Totak 4 Hours a 3 Hours r Flow Rate 30 omon Otee 9 40 a Fig 3 11 Monthly Loads Input Boxes in Average Block Module Page 66 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zon
237. he Ultra Manifold Vault Builder After the user selects New Ultra Manifold the Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder will open as can be seen in figure 11 80 Page 332 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module GHXModule and Manifold Builde Group Name ultra Manifold 401 Return Type Direct Return Section Outlet Number Ss Extra Section Outlet Separation ft 6 0 0 0 Section Outlet Pipe Size SDR11 y 3 in 80 mm v Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 4 in 100 mm OK Cancel Fig 11 80 The Ultra Manifold Vault Builder Readers are referred to the Manifold Vault Builder section above for a description since the Ultra Manifold Builder and the Manifold Builder are nearly identical Using the techniques and tools described in both the Automatic and Manual Techniques sections users can design and build a near infinite range of geothermal GHX loopfields After the design is complete the user can see how it performs Calculations and performance will be addressed later in this chapter Calculating and Reviewing Results In this section we will explore how to calculate and review results Calculating Results After a user has built a piping system manually automatically a combination of both the designer can hit the Calculate button Figure 11 81 is an 8 GHX Circuit Page 333 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynam
238. he dongle the program will revert to demo mode If you reattach the dongle the program will reactivate again How To Transfer the Program Between Computers The dongle licensing system allows the user to transfer the license from one computer to another If a user decides to transfer GLD from one computer to another all he or she has to do is the following Install GLD onto the target computer After the demo version of the program is running on the new computer attach the dongle and follow the above instructions regarding dongle driver installation Dongle Activation for Apple Macintosh Computers Use this command in the Darwin Unix window of the Terminal Utility in the Utilities folder there is no need to restart the computer or Parallels Sudo launchctl unload Library LaunchDaemons com aladdin aksusbd plist Page 18 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview V gt CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview This chapter is an introduction to the GLD Premier 2014 Edition software package It introduces new features the Design Studio the Heat Pump and Loads Modules the Boreho le Horizontal and Surface Water Design Modules the GSA module the Thermal Conductivity Module the reporting functions and the data reference files There is also an explanation of the theoretical and experimental basis for the program s calculations General Program Features GLD Premier 2014 Edition is a Geothermal Design Studio
239. he per square foot construction costs of the building This input is multiplied by the square footage of the structure and the resultant value is added to the installation costs Therefore this input usually only is added for new construction projects rather than for retrofits The lease value is the market lease value of the floor space in per square foot per year terms Page 200 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module System Related Costs With GLD2014 system related costs are divided into two sections Subsurface costs and Equipment costs Subsurface costs refer to all costs related to the subsurface portion of the system Equipment costs refer to all costs related to the above ground portion of the system Each of these two sections can be found in its own sub panel The Subsurface sub panel can be seen below in figure 9 4 below Subsurface Equipment COSTS ES Cost per Area excavated trenched a Cost per unit Length 13 8 Fig 9 4 Subsurface Costs Sub Panel The Subsurface panel contains inputs that enable the GSA module to calculate the installation costs of the full subterranean system everything external to the building The user must first select one of the two satellite buttons Cost per unit Length or Cost per Area excavated trenched The Cost per unit Length option generally is for vertical and pond systems and the Cost per Area excavated trenched option generally is for horizontal sys
240. heat exchanger results are grayed out because in the actual installation heating and cooling installed lengths are identical In the results in fixed temperature mode non dominant side results are short looped compared to the actual installation are not applicable to the actual installation and therefore lose relevance For example in figure 4 17 the heating side borehole length is listed at 105 8 ft In reality when installed the boreholes will be 253 3 ft deep as per the cooling side requirements The presented results therefore short loop the heating side by 253 3 105 8 or 147 5 ft Consequently the other results on the heating side relate to a 105 8 ft deep borehole rather than a 253 3 ft borehole which in reality will not be the case The results are grayed out as a reminder to the designer The first subsection deals with the bores including the total length the borehole number and the borehole length for one bore A common way to adjust the borehole length to a desired value is to change the borehole number or pattern on the Pattern panel The second subsection presents the predicted long term ground temperature change with respect to the average ground temperature of the installation Remember that in the fixed temperature mode only the temperature change listed in bold has any relevance Note that both temperature changes will be equal if the cooling and heating loads to the ground are equal as in the case where a hybri
241. hese resources do not answer your question please contact your vendor for support References Bandos Tatyana et al 2009 Finite Line Source Model for Borehole Heat Exchangers Effect of Vertical Temperature Variations Geothermics 38 263 270 Carslaw H S and Jaeger J C Conduction of Heat in Solids Oxford Claremore Press 1947 Page 36 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview Eskilson P Thermal Analysis of Heat Extraction Boreholes Doctoral Thesis University of Lund Department of Mathematical Physics Lund Sweden 1987 Hughes P J and Shonder J A The Evaluation of a 4000 Home Geothermal Heat Pump Retrofit at Fort Polk Louisiana Final Report Oak Ridge National Laboratory TN ORNL CON 460 1998 Ingersoll L R and Plass H J Theory of the ground pipe heat source for the heat pump Heating Piping and Air Conditioning 20 7 July 1948 Ingersoll L R Zobel O J and Ingersoll A C Heat conduction with engineering geological and other applications New York McGraw Hill 1954 Jones F R Closed Loop Geothermal Systems Slinky Installation Guide Rural Electric Research National Rural Electric Cooperative Association Oklahoma State University International Ground Source Heat Pump Association and Electric Power Research Institute 1995 Kavanaugh S P and J D Deerman Simulation of vertical U tube ground coupled heat pump system ASHRAE Transactions Volume 97 pages 287 295 1991 Ka
242. hink of the hard costs the first costs associated with the design and installation of an HVAC system Others think of lifecycle operating costs In an increasingly green focused world still others think of environmental costs Finally some percentage think of the soft costs associated with HVAC systems the opportunity costs associated with large vs small mechanical rooms the varying maintenance costs associated with one system vs another and even the water consumption costs associated with some types of systems such as geothermal cooling tower hybrid systems Some of the new features in the 2014 Edition of the GSA Module include Standard MACRS and Bonus depreciation calculations Renewable Heat Incentive RHI calculations UK market Advanced Salvage Value calculations Subsurface Geothermal Installation cost calculations Controls cost calculations Equipment Lifecycle Replacement cost calculations Maintenance cost inflation rates Tax Credit Line Item in results tab Page 190 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Color Graphs An Analysis Tab with standard financial analytics The Geothermal System Analyzer GSA Module allows designers to model and estimate all of the aforementioned costs from expected future CO emissions costs to the annual and lifetime operating costs of geothermal hybrid and more standard HVAC systems Furthermore it enables decision makers to compare simultaneously the financial
243. hysical arrangement of pipe in the trenches in this section STRAIGHT PIPE CONFIGURATIONS In the case of the three straight pipe configurations the user also provides the total number of pipes and the horizontal X and vertical Y separation of the pipes in the trench An additional offset meaning a horizontal shift between adjacent vertical layers can be included if desired Single Pipe Vertical Alignment In this arrangement the user creates a single column of pipes The number of pipes chosen defines how many layers will be included Each pipe is separated from its neighbor by the given vertical separation Y starting from the bottom of the trench If the Offset box is checked each pipe layer will be shifted from the pipe layer below by the given horizontal separation X This arrangement can be utilized to model horizontal bores if the user specifies two pipes and an appropriate vertical separation between the two pipes Two Pipe Vertical Alignment In this arrangement the user creates two pipe layers The number of pipes chosen defines how many layers will be included 2 4 6 etc Each vertical layer is separated from the one above or below by the given vertical separation Y If the Offset box is checked Page 137 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module each pipe layer will be shifted from the pipe layer below by one half the given horizontal separation X 2 This arrangement can be utilize
244. ical Basis 0 td eat el en ist 29 Surface Water Design Module ccccecscesscsssceseeeeceseceeeeseecseeeseeeeeeeeeeenseenseeeseenaeenaeaes 30 DES CrptiOt cria e a ea ees 30 Theoretical Basis cass ac detestaw A a A 31 Geothermal System Analyzer Module cceeccesccescceseceseceeecseecseeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeenseetees 32 Thermal Conductivity Module sa sessirnir enee E E E EENE 32 Theoretical Basis 0 la rl ations 32 Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module cccccceessessseeseeeeceeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeseenaees 33 Additional Modules ii canes tot aban iat aan ania 33 O NN 33 Project Reports ir o wee hiattea eat eaves 33 Monthly and Hourly Inlet Temperature ReportS ooooooiocnnncincniononononononnnnanonnnconocnnoconncn noo 33 Zone REPO ii ii 34 Lifecycle Cost and COS Report aiii aa 34 Thermal Conductivity Reports ccccecscesscessceseeesecesecseecsecsaecaeecaeeeaeeeeeeseeereneeneeeeenaees 34 Computational Fluid Dynamics Reports cccceccessessecesecssecseeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeereeeeneeeeensees 34 Data Reference Files ii a ia 35 Program Help and Support ccccccesccesccssecssecsseeseeeseeseeeseeseceseensecesecaecsaecsaecaeecaeeeaeeeeeeneeserentenaees 35 References sis see s a ed ln sd Sse no fl cl se 35 CHAPTER ZA dd 37 Adding Editing Heat PUMPS oooononncccccccnnnnenononnnnnnnnnccnnonononnnnnnnnncnnrrr rre nnnnnnaannnnes 37 Heat Pump Mode A A ee 37 O ptit sannin e ee ce ge me E E S eee 37 Theoretical Basi
245. ics CFD Module reverse return GHX Module that will be used as an example for understanding results Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bal 4 GHX Module Supply Return Runout own U Circuit 01 E 28 GHX Header Section 01 i U Circuit 02 E GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 FE GHX Header Section 03 boo U Circuit 04 E S GHX Header Section 04 oom U Circuit 05 E 2G GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 E S GHX Header Section 06 bom U Circuit 07 E S GHX Header Section 07 i U Circuit 08 Fig 11 81 A Sample Eight GHX Circuit Reverse Return GHX Module Example for Understanding Calculated Results Reviewing Results Reviewing the initial results of a design is an enjoyable step in the piping design process First the user has to choose which results he or she wishes to see There are three general types of results Peak Load Flow Rate Results Installed Equipment Capacity Flow Rate Results Purge Flow Rate Results The user can switch between the three types of results by selecting from among them with the dropdown menu as can be seen below Peak Load Equipment Purge Page 334 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Note that all three results types are calculated when the user hits the Calculate button It is important for the designer to confirm that he or she is using the appropriate flow rate selection Besides having three general types of results there ar
246. id Design Optica ia 123 Cooling Hybrids ici aaa 124 Heating Hybrid sa 124 Cooling and Heating Hybrids ooononncnnoccnoconononononnonnnnnnonnnconnco nono nooo ncon nc nncnneos 124 The Hybrid LoadSplitter Tool ooooonnonncninnnoonnonnconconncnonononono nono nonnonancnnnrnoronoo 124 Exporting APS Filio iia 130 Printing Reports a 130 CHAPTER Dita 131 The Horizontal Design MOUIeO cccccccesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 131 O NN 131 General Edad a 131 OPA Pr rc 132 NG Ws Pri a 133 Existing PLA ii i n 133 SAVING Projects a a aa 133 Typical Operation ir idas 133 Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels cccccesccsseesseesseeseeeseeseceeeceseensceeseceaeceaecaecsaesaeenaeeaeeaes 134 cs sehen meee haem le nee 134 Fixed Area Mode iii eeg ep E NE EER EEE O 134 Trench Layouts ssena rs nte eshte 135 Pipe Configuration in Trench 0 ceecesecesecsceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeenseenseenseenseeeenaees 136 STRAIGHT PIPE CONFIGURATIONS ccceecsseeeseeseneeeeseneeseeeceeseeeeneenees 136 Single Pipe Vertical Alignment oooononnonincnicnnocnoonconnconoconccnnonnnonnnonnos 136 Two Pipe Vertical Alignment oooooccnnnnnncnnonnnonconnconocononncnnnconccn nono noo 136 Three Pipe Vertical Alignment o ooonconnnnnoninnnncnnonnnonononconnconoconocnnncn noo 137 SLINKY PIPE CONFIGURATIONS ccccceccssseesesseseeseneeseeeceeseeeceeseeeeneeaees 137 Vertical Sim iia wastes 137 Horizontal Since
247. ies designers already are looking at geothermal HVAC systems both as a source of emissions credits that they can sell in the growing carbon markets for a profit as well as an attractive application of the Kyoto Protocol Clean Development Mechanism CDM It is likely that the Kyoto Protocol will be superseded in the next few years by a new agreement that requires even more stringent CO emissions regimes Additionally local regional and national level emissions control regimes are becoming more common For these reasons the GSA module enables designers to determine the CO emissions reductions associated with a geothermal system compared to a more traditional HVAC solution The CO emissions rate is the carbon intensity per kWh of electricity generated This rate is based on the fuel mix coal hydro nuclear etc used to generate the electricity that will power the electrical geothermal HVAC systems This intensity data can be found fairly easily on state provincial national and NGO environmental protection websites As the emissions rate can vary greatly it is recommended that the designer spend a few minutes finding the appropriate rate for the project s region In the USA the national average is 1 34 lbs of per kWh Detailed information on each state or province can be found on the following websites http www eia doe gov oiaf 1605 ee factors html USA http www ec gc ca pdb ghg inventory_report 2005 report a9 eng cfm CANADA
248. ig 11 6 Basic Circuit Information Panel Contents Number of Circuits Here the user enters the number of GHX Circuits desired in a single GHX Module Circuit Separation Here the user enters the center to center separation between GHX Circuits This separation distance dictates the GHX Header length between adjacent GHX Circuits One Way Circuit Length Here the user enters the one way length of a single GHX Circuit Circuit Pipe Size Here the user enters the circuit pipe size for a single GHX Circuit Page 253 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Circuits Per Parallel Loop Here the user enters the number of GHX Circuits he or she desires per parallel loop Put another way if a designer wants to have two GHX Circuits in series on one parallel loop the designer can enter a 2 here Figure 11 30 is an example of 2 circuits per parallel loop Circuits Per One Way Length Here the user enters the number of GHX Circuits he or she desires per one way length Put another way if a designer wants to have two GHX Circuits in parallel or in series in the same borehole the designer can enter a 2 here Headers Information The Header tabbed panel stores parameters related to the basic headering system including circuit separation 1 e the headering piping length between boreholes and the headering pipe type and size This can be seen in figure 11 7 Circuit Information Circuits Extra Cir
249. ilTables html SoilTablesMetric html SoilTable1 html SoilTable1Metric html SoilTable2 html SoilTable2Metric html SoilTable3 html SoilTable3Metric html SoilTable4 htm SoilTable4Metric html PipeTables html PipeTablesMetric html PipeTable1 html PipeTable1Metric html PipeTable2 html PipeTable2Metric html PipeTable3 html PipeTable3Metric html To add a new file the FluidTables html the SoilTables html or the PipeTables html must be edited The user must create a link in one of the three aforementioned html files to the new file which contains the table graph or image that the user would like to have available in GLD Note GLD requires the FluidTables html SoilTables html and PipeTables html files and their metric counterparts Page 186 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files FluidTablesMetric html SoilTablesMetric html and PipeTablesMetric html as the initial files when opening the associated tables They can be edited but if they are deleted the associated tables cannot be opened at all HTML Files HTML refers to Hypertext Mark up Language It is the language used on web pages and commonly used in software to quickly provide linked information to users HTML files can be created with an HTML editor like those distributed with common browsers or with a simple text editor They must however follow a certain format and have a htm or html extension Editing Existing Files Existing files may be edited by
250. imultaneously and is easily accessible at any time during the design process The tabbed panels can be seen in figure 9 1 below Results Geothermal Conventional Utilities Other Costs Incentives Fig 9 1 GSA Module Panel List The GSA module includes several additional features e Analyses and comparisons are based on o Energy usage costs Page 191 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module CO emissions costs Water usage costs Maintenance costs Mechanical room lease value opportunity costs Installation costs subsurface equipment and controls Equipment replacement costs Depreciation Tax Incentives Salvage Value Adjustable inflation maintenance cost and discount rates 0000000068060 Metric and English unit conversions Printed reports of all input and calculated data A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations Quick importation and modeling of systems designed in the vertical horizontal and pond modules Stand alone financial analysis capabilities e Comparison of a geothermal system with up to four alternative systems e Graphical reporting of key results e An analysis tab that summarizes key results Theoretical Basis The GSA module analyzes a number of hard and soft costs associated with geothermal and other HVAC systems It models these costs both for a single year and for the building lifetime Many of the factors required for these analyses are user definable and the level of
251. in heat pump data files hpd files from external sources For example a heat pump set may be copied from a fellow designer or even downloaded from a participating heat pump manufacturer s website Since the original Pumplist gld file does not contain a reference to the externally obtained data set it must be added manually The procedure for this is as follows Place the hpd file into the GLD pumps folder Add a New Series a If the series belongs to an existing manufacturer choose the appropriate manufacturer b If the series belongs to an unlisted manufacturer choose New Manufacturer from the list Provide the Series Name and Manufacturer Name as required Under Filename type the existing filename of the series to be added Note the existing filename is the hpd file the user just put into the pumps folder in step 1 above Click Proceed GLD will open the heat pump file for editing and will include it in its Heat Pump Database Additionally if this is a new manufacturer any included manufacturer information will become visible for this pump set Since the Pumplist gld file has been modified it will register the new pumps for use in all modules opened afterwards Page 49 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps Other Resources For additional information and specific instructions on how to enter pump data step by step please visit the following website http www gal
252. in the body of water at the depth where the majority of the pipe will reside The Circuit Pipe refers to the main heat exchanger portion of the pipe and does not include the header pipe leading from the surface Temperatures in bodies of water naturally change from summer to winter Both temperatures at the circuit pipe depth should be included in this section Surface Water Temperatures at Average Header Pipe Depth These are the summer and winter temperatures at the average depth in the body of water where the submerged portion of the header pipes reside Header Pipe refers to the section of pipe leading from the surface to the main heat exchanger circuit portion of the loop Further distinctions are described below Primary Header This is the standard header which will most likely come either directly from the installation or from a Manifold that comes from the installation main supply and return lines Branches These will be any branches that split from the primary headers Generally they will be smaller in size than the primary header Details Reference Only The surface water details are not used in any calculations They are included for the designer s reference Several different types of water bodies are included but the designer can type anything in the selection box Piping The Piping panel contains all the information related to the circuit piping and the piping selected for the primary he
253. in which the designer builds modifies and reviews piping systems The Layout Manager Workspace is in many ways the heart of the enter CFD module Consequently it provides the user with significant flexibility and customization These customization features will now be introduced Customizing the Layout Panel Because piping systems can be quite large sometimes the designer will want to adjust the size and position of the Layout Manager Workspace to optimize its functionality Layout Manager Workspace Sizing Control There are three ways to optimize the Layout Manager Workspace area 1 The designer can adjust the size of the entire CFD module in one of two ways First the designer can maximize the module by hitting the maximize button in the upper right corner of the CFD module Second the designer can move the mouse cursor to one of the edges of the CFD Page 270 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module module and then click hold drag to expand the CFD module An expanded CFD module can be seen in figure 11 19 Compare this to figure 11 16 b Piping Module Ss w amp a Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Al E Peak Load x alphabetic Categorized Fig 11 19 An Expanded Layout Screen Provides More Room to Work 2 The designer can move the Properties Window the window on the right side in the def
254. ines to the equipment instead of providing ductwork or long load lines from a centralized source When considering geothermal applications the precision of the zone loads model is crucial because it relates directly to the extent of external heat exchanger installation Heat exchanger costs impact the overall costs of a project Additionally a unit that is called only when necessary or is well matched to a zone will be more efficient than a larger unit that may cycle more often Inputs for GLD s Zone Manager Loads module include peak load information for each of the zones in an installation at different periods during the day These loads data can be matched automatically to heat pumps stored within GLD s Heat Pump Database Therefore ideal and rapid sizing is possible As with the Average Block Loads module the annual running time also may be included for a buried heat exchanger This loading information can be simple or complex depending on the level of detail the designer desires To facilitate this model the zones can be viewed either independently or together on the summary panel Average Block Loads Module For quick estimates and general calculations there is no need to do a full zone analysis for a project In these cases designers can quickly enter data and consider approximate designs using the Average Block Loads module Page 24 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview The average block model takes peak data from up to
255. ing is incorrect then GLD will revert to the standard rectangular grid rows across and rows down When a gridfile is selected it is indicated in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 16 as well Page 99 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Y Use External File Borehole Number 26 Filename doubleL txt Fig 4 16 Use of External File Indicated in Expanded User Interface G Function Calculator The G Function Calculator is a built in function that generates a g function on demand for any loopfield configuration These g functions enable GLD to perform advanced monthly and hourly simulations Export to AutoCAD Export IDF files GLD 2014 can export a loopfield design to AutoCAD GLD can also export an IDF file for Energy Plus Trane Trace and other tools To export to AutoCAD or to export an IDF file the designer must be using an external grid file If the designer is designing a non rectangular loopfield then all the user has to do is the following Confirm that the grid file is selected Navigate to the File dropdown menu at the top of GLD e Choose the Export File option and export the AutoCAD file of choice or export the IDF file e GLD will export an scr file into the GLD2014 CAD Files folder that can be read into AutoCAD GLD will export the IDF file to the IDF Files folder If the designer is designing a loopfield using the rows across and rows down input boxes and not using a grid file the user m
256. ing the close button in the upper right hand corner of the lower pane closes the Pumps Edit Pane and clicking the close button in the upper right hand corner of the Edit Add Heat Pumps window closes the Edit Add Heat Pumps module Closing without saving edited data will initiate a dialog box that reminds the user to save the data before closing Heat Pump File Descriptions There are two types of files created by the Edit Add Heat Pumps module The first is the Pumplist gld file which maintains the current master list of Page 48 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps manufacturers and the series associated with those manufacturers The Pumplist gld file also includes the filenames without the hpd extension of the heat pump data files associated with the individual series The second type of file is the hpd heat pump data file for each individual series of pumps This file type keeps track of all the data input by the user as well as the pump names and the coefficients calculated within the module Since hpd files cannot be deleted by the program unless they are accidentally overwritten many difficulties usually can be overcome by just adding new pump sets or if necessary editing the Pumplist gld file directly The format of the Pumplist gld file is given in the Preface page 3 Adding Pump Sets Obtained From External Sources To provide the greatest amount of flexibility to the user GLD allows the user to obta
257. inted directly from the GSA module by clicking the printer button in the controls A dialog window appears giving the designer the list of available report styles After the making a choice click OK to bring up the report window There are five different zone reports included with GLD Concise Form Detailed Form Concise Inputs Form Detailed Inputs Form Financial Analysis Form Concise Form The Concise Form finance report is the simplest finance report It lists the fuel energy usage and costs on an annual and NPV lifetime basis for only the geothermal system Page 181 CHAPTER 7 Reports Detailed Form The Detailed Form finance report is the most detailed finance report It lists the fuel energy usage and costs on an annual and NPV lifetime basis for both geothermal and conventional HVAC systems Concise and Detailed Inputs Forms The Concise Detailed Inputs Forms contain lists of all of the inputs used in the financial analysis Financial Analysis Form The Financial Analysis Form finance report provides a useful financial comparison of the geothermal and one conventional system In addition it provides simple payback summary results Thermal Conductivity Report The Thermal Conductivity report is printed directly from the Thermal Conductivity module The report includes all inputs and calculated results including a number of color graphs Computational Fluid Dynamics Reports Reports related to the CFD module
258. ion The Horizontal Design module similar to the Borehole Design module allows the user to enter parameters necessary to describe a horizontal buried pipe and trench configuration Again the interface is arranged in panels corresponding to the type of input Key design parameters also can be modified quickly in the expanded user interface as well see figure 1 2 above After the user enters all parameters the software calculates results such as the required trench and pipe lengths the inlet and outlet temperatures the coefficient of performance COP etc based on the input data The input information is organized into seven panels as shown in figure 1 4 Page 29 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW Information Fig 1 4 Horizontal Design Panel List Using these seven panels Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW and Information the user enters the project specific information A more complete description about how to enter data and perform calculations in the Horizontal Design module is provided in Chapter 5 Theoretical Basis The horizontal trench length equations used in the Horizontal Design module are based upon the Carslaw and Jaeger solution for heat transfer from cylinders buried in the earth as described in the single vertical case above Again this method properly models shorter time periods of heat extraction or r
259. ion 02 comme U Circuit 03 E BE GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 E Manifold Pipe Section 02 E GHX Module Supply Return Runout boo U Circuit 01 FE GHX Header Section 01 peo U Circuit 02 E 28 GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 E S GHX Header Section 03 i buno Y Circuit 04 amp Manifold Pipe Section 03 ae GHX Module Supply Return Runout ome U Circuit 01 f GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 E S GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 2S GHX Header Section 03 boo Y Circuit 04 amp Manifold Pipe Section 04 E E 2 GHX Module Supply Return Runout U Circuit 01 f GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 26 GHX Header Section 02 owe U Circuit 03 E GHX Header Section 03 Y Circuit 04 Fig 11 78 A Manifold with Four Outlets Hooked Up to Four GHX Modules Page 330 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Note that each of the four GHX Modules has four GHX Circuits with reverse return headering The small four GHX Circuit GHX Modules are for illustrative purposes Real world Manifold systems would likely have more than four GHX Circuits per GHX Module Remember that systems in the Layout Manager Workspace are not drawn to scale The GHX Module Supply Return Runout coming out of Manifold Pipe Section 1 could be twice as long or half as long for example as the GHX Module Supply Return Runout coming out of Manifold Pipe Section 2 Of course great varia
260. ipe Information and the OK Cancel buttons Each section is addressed below Group Name The group name is a parameter applied to every component in a design The user can use the default group name or select one of his or her choosing The group name becomes important during the design review process so it is therefore critical that each GHX Module has a unique group name Page 323 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Return Pipe Style The designer can choose to build a reverse return GHX Module or a direct return GHX Module Because the flow characteristics of the two options are very different it is critical that the designer selects the correct return piping style Circuit Information In this section the user enters details pertaining to the circuits themselves Details include the number of GHX Circuits the separation between circuits the one way length of each circuit the circuit pipe size circuits per parallel loop and circuits per one way length Because these last two parameters circuits per parallel loop and circuits per one way length may sound unfamiliar they are described below Circuits Per Parallel Loop Here the user enters the number of GHX Circuits he or she desires per parallel loop Put another way if a designer wants to have two GHX Circuits in series on one parallel loop the designer can enter a 2 here A sample system with 2 circuits per parallel loop can be seen below in figur
261. ips are hybrids they have both parallel and serial flow characteristics This relationship is called the series sibling relationship If you will recall within the Layout Manager Workspace siblings are vertically stacked In direct return systems vertically stacked siblings are always in parallel flow In reverse return systems however vertically stacked siblings are in both parallel and series flow This series flow aspect in the series sibling relationship is responsible for the other relationship that is unique in reverse return systems the reverse child parent relationship Reverse Child Parent Relationships In reverse return systems fluid flows from the return pipe of one GHX Header pair to the return pipe of another GHX Header pair This is identical in the direct return systems except that in reverse return systems visually the return flow path is heading down rather than up In the direct return systems the return flow path is heading up As a result components in reverse return systems that are connected for return flow but actually flow in the down Page 292 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module direction are like the reverse of Parent Child relationships Hence they are termed reverse child parent relationships In the Layout Manager Workspace these reverse return child parent relationships become apparent in figure 11 35 Notice how the supply and return flows are more or less in p
262. ircuit 06 36 GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 36 GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 90 Using the Group Name to Sort Larger Systems Auto Optimization Tools The CFD module provides one more invaluable set of tools for the designer who desires to have the CFD module automatically optimize a piping system of interest These auto optimization tools provide the designer with tremendous power and will likely change the way engineers design GHX Fields in the future The auto optimization tools include The Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer The GHX Header Design Optimizer Both of these tools will be explored in detail below Note that both of these tools can be activated from the following button when in Purge mode The Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer Calculating the purge rate for a GHX Module etc is critical to ensure that an appropriately sized purge pump is available to properly purge a system Performing these calculations in the past has been time intensive and sometimes Page 342 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module nearly impossible and required the use of charts diagrams and a healthy dose of engineering knowhow and experience Now the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer instantly calculates the optimal flow rate in gpm or L s to ensure a user defined target flow rate is maintained throughout the GHX Circuits during the purging process Note that issues related to the headering pa
263. ircuit Note that the properties window also contains fluid dynamics results for each pipe pair These will be reviewed later b Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate El Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Fittings Return Fittings Supply Flow Rate General Pipe 1 Supply Pipe 2 Return Pressure Drop Reynold s Number Velocity Volume Fig 11 27 The basic pipe pair Direct return piping pairs consist in the CFD module are symbolized by the following image Page 281 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Reverse return pipe pairs are symbolized by the following image Differences in how the CFD module models direct and reverse return piping systems are described below Piping Components Summary Each of the two basic components the Pipe Pair and the GHX Circuit consist of a pipe pair and two or more connection fittings Each of these two basic components in turn are comprised of multiple sub components Each of these subcomponents is fully controllable by the designer For example in a Pipe Pair the supply side pipe can be a different length or diameter than the return side pipe This fine grained control is critical for optimizing direct return and reverse return GHX headers for example Also the Pipe Pair and GHX Circuit components are not limited to two and three fittings respectively Users can add as many f
264. irculation pump system Therefore the user may choose to enter the pipe distance from the Manifold Vault to the circulation pump The user also enters the supply return pipe pair diameter here Note that the GHX Module Builder is pre populated with design parameters These default parameters can be updated modified as necessary in the Automation Panel and on the GHX Module subpanel OK and Cancel Buttons After the designer has reviewed and modified the parameters he or she can hit the OK button and the Manifold Vault will be auto built in the Layout Manager Workspace An example of an auto built direct return Manifold can be seen in figure 11 77 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bal Ej 4 Manifold Supply Return Runout Manifold Pipe Section 01 E Manifold Pipe Section 02 Manifold Pipe Section 03 Manifold Pipe Section 04 Fig 11 77 A Manifold with Five Outlets At this point the designer can use the GHX Module Builder if so desired and auto build four GHX Modules and attach them to the four Manifold Page 329 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module pipe sections An example of a completed system can be seen in figure 11 78 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B E Manifold Supply Return Runout Ef Manifold Pipe Section 01 E S GHX Module Supply Return Runout bo U Circuit 01 26 GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 E 28 GHX Header Sect
265. irs are covered below in the Supply Return Header Design Optimizer The designer must first have designed a system in the Layout panel before he or she can use the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer After the designer has laid out a satisfactory first draft system the user can activate the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer from the Fluid Panel The user has to select the Auto Adjust check box indicating that the CFD module will auto adjust the purging flow rate to achieve the user defined purging target velocity and then define the minimum purging target velocity In figure 11 91 the minimum target velocity is set to 2 ft s the standard for purging with water Also note that the purging flow rate is deactivated when the designer chooses Auto Adjust This is because the program will automatically calculate and display the necessary purging flow rate here after the calculation is completed Note that when performing purging calculations the CFD module always uses water properties and ignores the fluid properties selected in the lower half of the Fluid panel Fluid Information Peak Load Flow Rate gpm 30 00 Installed Capacity Flow Rate gpm 60 00 Purging Flow Rate gpm 90 00 m Auto Flow Minimum Maximum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Fig 11 91 Activating the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer Calculating Results with the Purging Flow Rate Auto Optimizer The designer may now return to the Layout tab se
266. is assigned a nominal flow rate and the data is input as percentages of the nominal flow rate A sample Load Flows panel is shown in figure 2 6 To get a capacity factor at a flow rate of 80 percent of nominal for example the capacity of the unit at 80 percent of nominal would be divided by the capacity at the nominal flow rate The procedure is identical for the power factors Data is usually taken at standard Page 46 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps source temperatures and flows and at the standard load temperature Quite often the manufacturer provides lists of these variations that can be input directly Once again a minimum of three points is necessary for the coefficient calculations and 0 buttons are provided for quickly setting the unused rows to zero Remember boxes must be set to 0 if they are not used General Test Cooling Heating Load Temperatures Load Flows Flow Corrections LOAD Nominal Flow Rate CFM COOLING of Nominal Capacity Power Factor HEATING of Capacity Factor Nominal Factor Calculate Coefficients Power Factor Fig 2 6 Heat Pump Load Flows Panel Testing Input Data The Test panel is provided as a final check after a pump s data has been input into the Heat Pump module Without testing the data directly there is no way to know if mistakes were made during the input process A sample Test panel is shown in figure
267. its per parallel lo0p 253 323 324 Circulation pumps 89 210 211 219 220 241 243 246 247 248 257 347 348 350 353 Clear 41 42 51 53 54 58 60 66 69 96 247 281 285 287 293 297 299 343 C0213 32 34 116 120 190 191 196 198 199 222 223 Coldest Warmest Day in Year 146 171 Conductivity 13 27 32 34 100 102 103 104 105 143 144 145 184 226 227 228 229 230 231 233 235 236 237 238 239 Conductivity report ooooooocccnncccccoccccnanacinnnnno 181 239 Construction COSTS cconocococcconnncconcnnnnnnonannnnnnncnns 199 Control buttons occccccccccooo o 41 53 94 95 247 Controls 41 42 53 61 66 94 136 141 165 166 172 179 180 189 191 194 201 205 222 247 259 269 287 292 330 345 352 Conventional system 181 190 194 203 205 207 209 211 224 Conversions table ooonnnnnocicocccinannno 35 183 185 Cooling tower 12 88 89 90 189 202 206 218 219 Copyright Notice errana ann a ea 1 Correction FactorsS ccccccccccncccnnnnnnns 38 39 44 45 Costs13 23 32 52 100 162 166 180 181 189 190 191 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 213 216 217 221 222 225 226 240 344 CSV File 64 73 75 77 78 81 229 236 352 353 Custom PUMP nsee 58 61 63 69 70 Customization 13 18
268. ittings as necessary to each component This provides designers with unlimited flexibility and modeling accuracy Basic Piping Grammar Now that the two basic components have been introduced the basic piping grammar can be described The most straightforward way of doing so is by providing a general introduction via four core concepts and then studying several basic loopfield layouts Four Core Concepts CONCEPT ONE Component Families The first basic concept behind the grammar is that individual components are connected to one another piece by piece to form a cohesive and comprehensive system As individual components are strung together they form component families An example of a component family is a GHX Module Because the details of each piece in a component family are well understood complex systems consisting of numerous nested component families can be analyzed effortlessly by the CFD module algorithms The term nested is used because of how the component families are displayed in the Layout Manager Workspace they appear nested This will become clear shortly Page 282 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module CONCEPT TWO Parent Child and Sibling Component Relationships Parent Child and Sibling Definitions are as follows note that a single component can fulfill multiple roles Parent a component that has one or more directly connected downstream components All components except the l
269. ity Module The Thermal Conductivity module enables designers to quickly analyze thermal conductivity test data from the GeoCube a product from Precision Geothermal LLC as well as from other test units Outputs from this analysis include formation thermal conductivity diffusivity and borehole thermal resistance Theoretical Basis The standard line source model which assumes an infinitely thin heat source in a homogeneous medium and is considered to be the industry standard analysis technique is utilized by the Thermal Conductivity module to calculate thermal conductivity values and borehole thermal resistance values Page 33 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview See Chapter 10 for a full description of the Thermal Conductivity module Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module The Computational Fluid Dynamics module enables designers to quickly answer the following questions a What is the optimal piping configuration for purging and b What is the optimal piping configuration for efficient operations More information about this patent pending module can be found in Chapter 11 Additional Modules GLD s Design Studio has the potential for additional modules that may be included in later versions These modules would also be able to take advantage of the Design Studio s heat pump and loads models Reports GLD s reporting features allow the designer to make hardcopies of both the data entered and the resulting calc
270. ity flow rates and purging flow rates on system performance can be explored in the CFD module Page 107 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module ES Borehole Design Project verticalsampleformanual E ES Results Fluid soi U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Design Heat Pump Inlet Fluid Temperatures Cooling 85 0 oF Heating 50 0 oF Design System Flow Rate Flow Rate 3 0 gpmiton Solution Properties M Automatic Entry Mode Fluid Type 4129 oo Propylene Glycol Specific Heat Cp J98 Btuft F lbm Density rho 63 2 Ibfft 3 Check Fluid Tables Fig 4 15 Fluid Panel Contents Optimized systems generally operate in the range from 2 5 to 4 0 gpm ton while the ideal system flow rate is somewhere around 3 0 gpm ton Again if the flow rate is changed the selected heat pumps are updated in the loads modules Solution Properties Solution properties are also included in the Fluid panel These include the specific heat and density of the circulating fluid Also a reference label is included so that the designer knows the percentage of antifreeze and antifreeze type however this reference label is not currently linked to the other input parameters The specific heat and density values of the antifreeze are used for the calculation of the heat pump outlet temperature which in turn is used for the bore length calculation Page 108 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Results Additional
271. justified This can be seen clearly in figure 11 31 Although the reverse return pairs themselves do represent matched supply and return header sections and the circuits and fittings are standard the GHX Circuit when it returns to its piping header section it returns to the piping header component that is directly beneath it This is called the series sibling relationship as described above To counteract this discrepancy and maintain flow consistency the final GHX Circuit at the end of the system links back directly to the return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout This is best illustrated through an example This can be seen in figure 11 45 where the final GHX Circuit Circuit 3 links to the return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA On the supplypipe side fittings come before the pipe see As and A in figure 11 34 above On the return pipe side fittings come after the pipe see C and C f in figure 11 34 above This same formalism applies to both direct and reverse return systems in general supply side fittings come before the supply side pipe and return side fittings come after the return side pipe In the direct return example this can be seen in figure 11 28 where the return side fitting Bf comes after pipe B e The GHX Module Supply Return Runout does not use the reverse return symbol because the reverse return system technically begins with the first GHX Circuit and ends with the last GHX Circuit P
272. l U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Vertical Grid Arrangement Borehole Number 100 GMap Rows Across 10 Rows Down 10 Borehole Separation 25 0 ft F Use External File Create Filename No File Grid Builder Boreholes per Parallel Circuit Bores Per Circuit il T T 1 2 3 Fig 4 5 Pattern Panel Contents Page 93 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Grid Layout Use External File Borehole Number 30 Rows Across E Rows Down 5 Separation 200 Ft Fig 4 6 Pattern Data in Expanded User Interface The G Map Button When the user pushes the G Map button GLD will calculate and display a 3D borehole interaction map The map is sensitive to borefield geometry depth and soil diffusivity Figure 4 7 is an example g map The maps are useful for gauging the borefield layout and thermal diffusivity influence ground temperature changes over time Note that at present time G maps are calculated based off of a constant borehole temperature over time gt G Function 3D Map Sites Using the mouse Close Click _drag to rotate the i image or to move the color or legend E Hover to show tooltips 3 ose Shift Click drag to pan Ctrl Click drag up down to zoom Ctrl Shift Click drag to adjust xyz proportions Alt Click or ace to zoom unzoom Fig 4 7 A G Map for a Circular Loopfield Page 94 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module The Grid Builder For non rec
273. l is shown in figure 2 1 fa Edit Add Heat Pumps fm x New Series E Series Name y Pump Information New Manufacturer gt Manufacturer Information _ Series Information Manufacturer s Name Series Name Street Filename without extension pc ere City State Zip Entry Date J 7 27 2001 y Country m Phone Proceed Cancel Fig 2 1 Pump information Panel Page 41 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps After the user enters all the data and clicks the Proceed button all of the information for the series being added will be stored in the Pumplist gld file Note that the information marked with an asterisk must be included before the user is allowed to proceed Editing Pump Data Once the new pump series information is entered or an existing pump series is selected from the upper pane the Pump Edit pane will appear in the lower pane of the Edit Add Pumps module as shown in figure 2 2 There are two sub panes The left sub pane is a list of the pumps already included in the series The right sub pane is a series of tabbed panels that contain the data for each pump on the list In the case of a new series both the list and the panel section will be empty until a new pump is created The name of the current manufacturer and series are shown in the selection boxes in the upper pane Edit Add Heat Pumps foja 2 WaterFu
274. l comprehensive solution While the minimum target velocity is a familiar design parameter for many designers the maximum target velocity may be a new tool in the designer s arsenal The maximum target velocity impacts the GHX Header Design Optimizer in the following way 1f the user specifies a low maximum target velocity say 5 ft s the auto sizing function has flexibility to choose a larger pipe diameter that offer slower flow rates and lower pressure drops If the user specifies a higher maximum target velocity say 50 ft s the auto sizing function will tend to be limited to smaller pipe diameters that enable faster velocities and their concomitant higher head losses Page 345 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module In figure 11 93 both the Auto Adjust and Auto Size boxes are checked and the minimum and maximum purging target velocities are 2 ft s and 5 ft s respectively Fluid Information Peak Load Flow Rate gpm 30 00 Installed Capacity Flow Rate gpm 60 00 V AutoFlow V Auto Size Minimum Maximum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 5 0 Fig 11 93 Activating the Supply Return Header Design Optimizer Purging Flow Rate gpm 68 3 Pipe Type Controls There is one more optional step a designer can take before having the CFD module auto design the Supply Return headering system Many designers have certain pipe size preferences based on previous experience ease of purchase etc The
275. l as suggested uses for each type of report The Report Preview Window When a particular report is selected a report preview window opens to show a preview of the report Report preview windows have a zoom feature that allows adjustment of the magnification Additionally reports may be sent to a printer or exported as various file types including text and html Multiple reports may be opened simultaneously even if they originate from the same project Report preview windows do not react directly to metric English unit conversion Instead a report opens with the same units used by its parent design module If another system of units is required the user must first change the unit system of the design module using the Design Studio Units menu and then open a new report Page 177 CHAPTER 7 Reports Project Reports Project reports may be opened at any time from the Design Studio File menu by selecting Print An option dialog box appears displaying the six types of reports that are available concise detailed input data with loads concise temperature detailed temperature and full project The first two project reports are available in all three heat exchanger design modules Detailed reports contain full project information while concise reports limit the project information and exclude any comments Detailed reports generally require multiple pages while concise reports are designed for single page printouts The other fou
276. l pumps not included in the pre defined pump sets can be employed as required Another area where customization is possible is in the data reference files which are based on HTML With a simple HTML editor the user can include any tables data pictures graphs charts or any other useful information that meets the user s needs User added files can supplement or replace the data reference files already provided with GLD Custom Logos From the Settings dropdown menu users can enter general company and contact information that is repopulated in the various Information tabbed panels throughout the program In addition users have the option of loading in their own logo for inclusion in many of the reports that GLD produces These custom logos enhance the professional image a designer presents to clients These logos should be in bitmap format and have the following dimensions 101 x 33 Users that wish to take advantage of this feature must put a copy of the appropriately sized logo in the Gaia Geothermal GLD2014 Logos folder Metric English Units One of the intrinsic features in GLD is the English metric unit conversion capability The English metric option can be used not only to compare values but it also can be used to quickly make use of specific equipment or loads data supplied in only one format Page 21 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview Because the reports and data reference files automatically recognize the selected
277. late monthly inlet temperatures An Hourly Data button used to calculate hourly inlet temperatures For monthly and hourly simulations average annual energy consumption estimates e Page 87 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module e A Graphing button used to graph inlet temperature data within the Design Studio e A powerful new hybrid LoadSplitter tool for cooling and heating hybrid design Opening Projects There are two ways to open Borehole Design projects One is by using the New Borehole command from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar and the other is by opening an existing Borehole Design project gld file Files cannot be opened if other modules with the same name are already open As many files can be opened as the system s memory permits FF New Projects New projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Borehole from either the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar New projects open with standard parameter values that must be edited for new projects The module opens directly into the Information panel through which the designer enters information about the new project In new projects no loads files zon are loaded The user must create a new loads file or open an existing loads file into one of the loads modules Links may be established using the Studio Link system described in Chapter 3 Existing Projects Existing projects may be opened at any time fr
278. lculating the conductivity and estimating the diffusivity See the graphs section below for more information on the relationship between this interval and the graphed data Calculation Results The calculation results section displays the calculated thermal conductivity and slope of the line the average heat flux and average power the calculated borehole thermal resistance BTR the estimated thermal diffusivity estimate based off of calculated conductivity and user input soil values in the Diffusivity panel and the average flow rate note that if flow rate calibration data are not entered in the Flow tab the flow rate result may not be applicable If users adjust the calculation interval and hit the Calculate button again these results will be updated Note that the BTR calculation is extremely sensitive to the undisturbed ground temperature Designers are encouraged to determine the Page 236 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module undisturbed ground temperature with maximum accuracy prior to conducting the TC test and then manually enter the undisturbed ground temperature in the Bore tabbed panel If the user does not enter the temperature manually the module will automatically estimate the undisturbed ground temperature from the first two minutes of temperature data in the imported csv file BTR is also sensitive to the borehole diameter and thermal diffusivity Data Quality The data quality section reports on
279. lculations based on daily monthly and annual heat pulses In this type of situation GLD will use the peak demand and total monthly loads to determine a monthly partial load factor PLFm for the peak design month where PLFm actual run time per month run time if at full load per month Once the program calculates the PLFm it automatically determines the relationship between off peak period loads and peak period loads to assure that the monthly partial load factor matches that of the imported data The program assumes that the peak demand occurs during the top four hour period multiplied by the number of days in the month If the total heat gains or losses provided for the peak month still exceed this value the remainder of the total monthly loads are evenly split between the other time periods in the day making up the remaining 20 hours If not the Page 82 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones demands of all other periods are set to 0 The peak and its time block will be used for the daily pulse The monthly pulse utilizes the data in the off peak periods to recalculate the PLFm A sample PLFm calculation is presented below Assume the monthly calculation gives a total monthly load in January of 10000 KBtu kWh and the corresponding peak demand from noon to four p m is 30 KBtu hr kW In this case the monthly partial load factor is PLFm 10000 KBtu 30 KBtu hr 24hr 31 days 0 448 If this value is to be transferred
280. lculations can be viewed at any time on the Results panel After all data has been entered or any changes have been made the user can calculate interim or final results using the Calculate button The Calculate button is also available in the expanded user interface as see in figure 5 8 A sample screen for the Results panel can be seen in figure 5 14 Results are also displayed in the expanded user interface as see in Figure 5 15 Page 149 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW Information Calculate COOLING HEATING Total Trench Length ft Trench Number Single Trench Length ft Total Pipe Length ft Single Trench Pipe Length ft Unit Inlet F Unit Outlet F Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr Peak Load kBtu Hr Peak Demand kW Heat Pump EER COP System EER COP System Flow Rate gpm 4219 5 20 211 0 16878 0 843 9 90 0 100 1 1330 5 1330 5 104 3 12 8 12 8 332 6 5211 2 20 260 6 20844 6 1042 2 40 0 34 1 1193 7 750 0 58 4 3 8 3 8 187 5 r Optional Hybrid System Off Update Cooling Heating Peaks Reset 1 1 Totals Fig 5 14 Results Panel Contents Lengths 3 E i i Temperatures COOLING HEATING Total Trench Length ft 4219 5 5211 2 Single Trench Length ft 211 0 260 6 Unit Inlet F Unit Outlet F Fig 5 15 Results Display in Expanded User Int
281. ld designs This modular and patent pending approach involves building up entire piping systems from the following two foundational components a GHX Circuit with supply return pipes and one or more fittings inlet end outlet a supply return Pipe Pair with one or more fittings on each pipe These units can be linked together via drag and drop methods in the two dimensional Layout Manager Workspace As a designer links these components together the piping system expands in size and complexity Regardless of the complexity of the designed system the CFD module understands the relationship between individual components families of components and the overall GHX field The CFD module can then calculate a diverse range of fluid dynamics results or can auto size the system to satisfy a designer s requirements such as auto sizing a supply and return headering system that has a 2 ft s flow rate throughout it for purging effectiveness For a designer to competently engineer a system with the CFD module he or she will benefit from a familiarity with both of the above mentioned components as well as the simple grammar that describes the relationships between and among them This language is introduced later in this chapter Opening Projects There are two ways to open CFD projects One is by using the New Piping command from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar and the other is by opening an existing CFD project pip file from within the
282. le Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 16020 0 16020 0 Peak Unit Inlet F 80 5 53 5 Borehole Length ft 267 0 267 0 Peak Unit Outlet F 89 1 48 4 Fig 4 25 Hourly Data Results in Expanded User Interface The third subsection of the report lists the heat pump peak inlet and peak outlet temperatures of the circulating fluid These green numbers are absolute peak temperatures and not average peak temperatures By presenting absolute peak temperatures it makes it easier for the designer to compare Hourly Data results with Design Day and Monthly Data Results Note that these peak temperatures are not influenced by changes in the hours at peak control which can be seen in figure 3 13 This is because of the inherent detail in hourly loads profiles The fourth subsection lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and demand of all the equipment the calculated seasonal heat pump efficiency the calculated design day efficiency and the calculated average annual power consumption The peak load is the maximum and is determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel In GLD Premier 2014 the calculated seasonal cooling and heating heat pump efficiency values over the design lifetime are quite useful for lifecycle cost and CO emissions analyses in the GSA m
283. le However if the associated loads file cannot be found the user will be notified and the automatic file loading will not occur Saving Projects Projects may be saved at any time using Save or Save As from the Design Studio File menu or by clicking the save button on the toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user if he or she wants to save the project and associated loads files Typical Operation Although each user will have his or her own unique style the typical operation of the Horizontal Design module would include the following steps Page 134 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module e Enter Loads and select pumps in either the Average Block Loads module or the Zone Manager module Form a link between the loads module and the design module Modify step by step the input parameters listed in each panel Perform initial calculation Modify various parameters and recalculate to determine the effects of the modifications Add an optional hybrid system e Establish an optimal system e Save and or print the project and associated zone file Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels GLD s innovative tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Information Extra kW Configuration Piping Soil Fluid and Results panels The Inform
284. le the program automatically transfers the data into the current open zone of the Zone Manager Loads module Note that any previously existing loads will be overwritten At the same time the data is transferred into the Zone Manager Loads module an Import Loads window is opened showing the imported data in detail This window is shown in figure 3 18 and its corresponding Design Day loads entry is shown in figure 3 19 The Import Loads window in figure 3 18 displays the imported data the filename and the name of the program that generated the file Total loads and peak demand data are presented on separate screens for cooling and heating Use the buttons on the bottom of the window to toggle between the two On the right is the monthly partial load factor calculated by GLD The data can be modified directly in the Import Loads window or by hitting the Modify button the user can open the file in the Equivalent Hours Calculator where the data can be edited as well The user can transfer the modified data into the Zone Manager Loads module by pressing the Transfer button When both the Calculator and the Import Loads windows are open the program first will ask the user from which window the Calculator or the Import Loads window he or Page 80 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones she wishes to transfer data The program then prompts the user to decide to which loads heating or cooling the data should be transferred Importing Desi
285. le design module 24 25 26 33 67 83 85 Borehole diameter 100 103 233 236 Borehole thermal resistance 32 100 184 235 Branches 164 167 168 169 170 175 283 296 299 300 BU Reis vcaedonksintseasaccesesnaesiecenotedwssanaeneas 100 227 233 235 C Calculate 19 23 24 26 28 32 44 52 57 59 64 67 75 84 86 91 93 100 102 108 109 114 116 117 118 121 122 132 134 148 150 151 160 163 172 173 177 191 194 196 200 201 202 217 220 222 227 228 230 232 233 234 235 237 241 244 245 260 261 262 264 265 315 332 334 339 340 342 346 350 Calculate Results oooooonoiiosiiciniaccodid s ninciscianci ns 26 Calculation Interval 227 230 235 238 Calculator 24 57 66 74 77 79 81 84 91 99 104 105 145 264 274 275 344 Capacity 22 37 38 39 43 44 45 46 54 58 61 69 70 84 106 111 113 116 120 124 146 150 152 174 209 211 215 216 218 220 231 260 272 333 344 Circuit 30 31 100 162 164 165 166 167 168 169 171 174 175 241 242 243 244 252 253 254 264 266 267 268 273 274 275 276 277 278 280 281 282 283 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 308 309 310 311 313 317 319 322 323 330 332 333 334 335 336 337 342 346 Circuits per one way length 323 324 Circu
286. lect the Purge Results Type from the dropdown menu and hit the Calculate button again Results from the 8 GHX Circuit GHX Module described in figure 11 87 above are available for view in figure 11 92 below Notice how the GHX Circuit and not the GHX Header section velocities are all at 2 ft s or higher Compare these circuit velocities to those in figure 11 87 above Page 343 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Name a 1 Size ipe 2 Size Pipe 1 Velocity mge 2 vane Pipe 1 Reynold s Number uae 2 Reynold s Number 3 GHX Module Supply Return Pipe U Circuit 01 S GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 2S GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 35 GHX Header Section 03 U circuit 04 35 GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 35 GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 2 GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 35 GHX Header Section 07 U circuit 08 11590 44369 11483 38012 11412 31693 11377 25393 11377 19094 11412 12775 11483 6417 11590 Llao Yolo AA Silt Baria Ml Io ari RNANANANANANANn Fig 11 92 The Purging Flow Rate Has Been Calculated to Provide 2 ft s Velocities To see what Purging Flow Rate provides the 2 ft s minimum velocity the user may return to the Fluid tab From figure 11 92 it is clear that a flow rate of 68 3 gpm covers the minimum 2 ft s velocity required for purging air out of the GHX Circuits Fluid I
287. ll be explored in more detail later in this chapter 3 af v Auto Flow Purging Flow Rate gpm 90 I futo Size Minimum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Fig 11 14 The Auto Size Option Solution Properties Solution properties are also included in the Fluid panel These include the design temperature which impacts viscosity specific heat density and ev Page 263 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module dynamic viscosity of the circulating fluid Also a reference label is included so that the designer knows the percentage of antifreeze and antifreeze type however this reference label is not currently linked to the other input parameters New in GLD2014 is a significantly updated fluids database that enhances the CFD module simulation accuracy This new database provides fluid performance variables specific heat density and viscosity for a range of fluid types operating in a range of operational temperatures The new database works only with automatic entry mode In automatic entry mode the user first selects the fluid type and then selects a desired freeze point protection typically around 10 F below the minimum expected operating temperature The user then selects a design operational temperature for the fluid GLD then automatically displays the specific heat density and viscosity for the selected design temperature for the specified the fluid selection When the automatic entry
288. lore how to add circulation pumps to a design in the Layout Manager Workspace Adding A Circulation Pump To add a circulation pump the designer should already have built and tested his or her piping system After the designer is satisfied with the system he or she can add a circulation pump by right clicking on the component that will be attached to the circulation pump A screen similar to the one in figure 11 97 below will appear Layout Design and Optimization U Circuit 01 Add New Pipe Pair 5 2 GHX Header Add New Reverse Return Pipe Pair U Circuit Add New Circuit 2S GHX Hi E U Add New Ultra Manifold E ge Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Add Circulation Pump Remove Circulation Pump Fig 11 97 Adding a Circulation Pump After the user selects Add Circulation Pump a circulation pump will appear on the appropriate component as can be seen in figure 11 98 below Notice the red arrow that appears This red arrow is the CFD Module symbol for a circulation pump Page 349 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module i Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bl E 4 GHX Module Runout U Circuit 01 E 2S GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 E 2S GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 GHX Header Section 04 Y Circui
289. ly the viscosity of the solution may affect the flow type in the pipe which was selected on the U Tube panel The designer must be aware of any changes made The new CFD module models the impact of viscosity changes on system performance In automatic entry mode the user first selects the fluid type and then selects the desired freezing temperature GLD automatically displays the specific heat and density for the fluid selection When the automatic entry mode checkbox is marked the program is in automatic entry mode In manual entry mode the user manually selects and inputs the specific heat and density for the target solution as seen in figure 4 16 When the automatic entry mode checkbox is unmarked the program is in manual entry mode Solution Properties M Automatic Entry Mode Fluid Type 235 Propylene Glycol v Specific Heat Cp 0 96 Btu F lbm Density rho 64 0 lbffto3 Check Fluid Tables Fig 4 16 Manual Entry Mode for Solution Properties Note Since solution properties vary considerably and non linearly with type and percentage of additive GLD does not include detailed automatic antifreeze information for all conditions Generalized tables of data may be found in the Fluid Properties tables It is recommended that the designer manually enter the desired values in the input text boxes All results for both the heating and the cooling calculations can be viewed at any time on the Resul
290. ly side pipe A Return side pipe A r Return side fitting generally after the return side pipe Note arrows indicate supply return flow directions Also the space between sections is intentional to illustrate the individual subcomponents Each of these subcomponents has a large number of user definable characteristics associated with it including Fittings Af and A s e Fitting type socket tee branch butt tee branch etc e Fitting pipe size e Fitting equivalent length e Fitting name e Fitting volume Pipe A and A Pipe size Pipe type Pipe inner diameter Pipe outer diameter Pipe length Extra pipe length Pipe name e Pipe volume Page 280 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Note that each section can have multiple fittings in case a design requires a series of reducing fittings Also note that while the range of control can seem overwhelming it automatic mode most of these variables are selected automatically for the designer by the CFD algorithms In this version of the software note that the fittings are not automatically selected by the CFD algorithms Within the CFD Layout Manager Workspace a single supply return pipe pair appears in figure 11 27 Note that the workspace is on the left side of the screen and the right side contains a properties window The properties window can be expanded as necessary to view all of the characteristics for all five subcomponents of each GHX C
291. mary header flow rate divided by the number of branches as given on the Piping panel The circuit flow rate is obtained by dividing the system flow rate by the total number of circuits also provided on the Piping panel Printing Reports Reports of the active project can be printed at any time from the Design Studio using the toolbar print button or from the File menu gt Print The information printed includes all of the input parameters from the design module along with the associated results Zone and loads information can be printed separately from the Loads panel The filename of the zon file associated with the project report is also listed on the report Three different project reports are available concise detailed and detailed with loads The concise form includes all of the design parameters but leaves out some of the project information and comments The detailed form includes the information and comments More information on reports can be found in Chapter 7 Page 176 CHAPTER 7 Reports V CHAPTER 7 Reports This chapter covers the report creation and printing features of GLD It includes project zone and financial reports Overview GLD includes reporting features These features have been added for professionals who need to keep records of their designs and communicate them to others There are nine different report styles included within the package and this chapter provides an explanation of as wel
292. mber of Parallel Circuits This is the number of parallel circuits required to maintain the required minimum flow rates defined by the designer If the number of circuits entered here is greater than the allowed number of circuits this value will be overwritten automatically with the limiting value when the calculations are performed Even if the circuits are split into equivalent groups for example three groups with ten circuits each the total number of parallel circuits the smallest unit will not change Circuit Style Both loose bundled coils and slinky spread out styles are available If extensive spacers are used in a coil style arrangement the slinky model may provide more accurate results but the loose coil option will provide the more conservative results Circuit Head Loss per 100 feet This is the head loss for the particular style of pipe These values are not entered automatically Instead they come from designer s charts A chart in English units is included with GLD in the Pipe Tables section The designer must be aware that this value changes with pipe size temperature and flow rate Extra Equivalent Length per Circuit Page 167 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module This is an average pipe length value included per circuit to take into account all fittings elbows tees etc It is only necessary for the head loss calculations E Surface Water Design Project 1 Results Fluid
293. me Supply Fitting 1 Pipe Size 3 in 80 mm Supply Fitting 1 Type Other z Supply Fitting 1 Volume gal a Flow Rate Socket U Bend Socket 90 Elbow tl Socket Tee Branch d Group Name Socket Tee Straight Name Socket Reducer Pipe 1 Supply Socket Joint a Pipe 2 Return Socket Flange Adaptor be Pressure Drop yl Fitting Pipe Fitting Fig 11 64 Fittings Can Be Selected In the Properties Window Modifying Parameters with the Pipe and Fitting Manager Page 317 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module The Pipe and Fitting Manager provides an entirely different system component customization experience A user can access the Pipe and Fitting Manager by right clicking on the component of interest in the Layout Design Manager and selecting the Pipe and Fitting Manager This can be seen in figure 11 65 Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B Main Supply Return Runout Pipe Pair U Circuit 01 8 GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit GHX Header Section 02 U Add New Pipe Pair Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 65 Accessing the Pipe and Fittings Manager for Circuit 2 After doing so the Pipe and Fitting Manager for the selected component a GHX Circuit in this case will open The Manage
294. med e Calculated energy usage values are updated as soon as a change is made in system parameters see below Geothermal System Details The bottom two thirds of the Geothermal panel displays system details related to the geothermal and hybrid system Details of the geothermal and hybrid system if any can be found on separate tabbed panels The geothermal system tabbed panel can be seen below in figure 9 10 and the hybrid component tabbed panel can be seen in figure 9 11 Primary Geothermal Hybrid Component HEATING Eqv Full Load Hours 623 hr Peak Capacity 373 5 kBtu hr 197 7 kBtu hr Average Heat Pump Efficiency 16 8 EER 4 4 COP Circulation Pump Input Power W 1 5 hP o0 Circ Pump Power 1 2 kW 1 5 hP Motor Efficiency 90 0 0 kw Additional Power kw Mech Room Installation Area 300 Fig 9 10 Geothermal System Tabbed Panel Page 215 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Primary Geothermal COOLING HEATING Eqv Full Load Hours 1107 hr 623 hr Hybrid Type Cooling Tower Boiler y Fuel Type Electricity v Electricity v Hybrid System Capacity o0 kBtu hr oo kBtu hr Hybrid Unit Efficiency 00 0 oo Additional Power 0 0 kw oo kw Mech Install Area 00 fe 00 ft 2 Water Usage Rate 0 00 gpm ton 0 00 gpm ton Fig 9 11 Geothermal System Tabbed Panel Primary Geothermal Tab Cooling In this column the user can en
295. meters regarding the physical size and placement of the trenches The number of trenches may be modified at any time using the up down arrows and Separation refers to the center to center distance between adjacent trenches The program assumes all trenches will be equal in separation length depth and width Note that if the selected piping configuration does not fit into the selected trench size the program will automatically adjust the size of the trench to accommodate the selection Since GLD2010 the minimum center to center distance between adjacent trenches has been reduced to provide designer with greater flexibility OF Horizontal Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Information Fixed Area Mode FT On Off Total Area 27558 0 ft 2 Width 60 0 ft x Length 4593 ft Trench Layout 2 Number 6 les Depth 8 0 PIE Separation 10 0 ft Width 11 8 in Pipe Configuration in Trench TELE 9 o y Total Number of Pipes 2 L Vertical Separation Y 240 7 o o erti in k x l Horizontal Separation X 5 in Modeling Time Period Prediction Time 5 years Fig 5 2 Configuration Panel Contents Page 136 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Configuration Trench Number 3 per Separation 20 0 FE Depth En Fk Width En in Fig 5 3 Configuration Controls in Expanded User Interface Pipe Configuration in Trench The designer defines the p
296. mp inlet and outlet temperatures of the circulating fluid The fourth subsection lists the total unit capacity the peak loads and demand of all the equipment and the calculated heat pump and system efficiencies The peak load is the maximum and is determined from whichever time period across all the zones has the highest load The peak demand includes all pumps and external energy requirements including those listed in the Extra kW panel Finally the system flow rate is listed in its own subsection The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the flow rate in gpm ton chosen on the Fluid panel It represents the flow rate from the installation out to the buried pipe system Calculation results for lengths and temperatures are always available in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 18 above Calculations can be performed at any time in the expanded user interface as well Page 114 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Monthly Data Results Results Subsections Fixed Length Mode For Monthly Data calculations fixed length mode is the only option available This is because the loopfield geometry must be fully defined including borehole depth before the calculations can be performed As a result when a designer selects the Monthly Data calculation methodology the program switches to and locks in to fixed length mode GLD calculate monthly inlet temperatu
297. mponent types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Velocity When a user selects Velocity all of the velocities within the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Reynold s Number When a user selects Reynold s Number all of the Reynold s Numbers within the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Volume When a user selects Volume all of the volumes within the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Page 268 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Pressure Drop When a user selects Pressure Drop all of the pressure drops within the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Total Branch Pressure Drop When a user selects this the program displays pressure drops across entire systems of elements Group Name Group Name Group name is a meta property that applies to all components in a particular component family such as a GHX Module a Manifold etc The group name is used to sort and organize components when viewing results in the Review panel Note that in using this system a user must select at least one component type pipe pair circuit one pipe Pipe 1 Pipe 2 and one characteristic length size etc before result
298. n Extra kW Information COOLING 4219 5 HEATING Prediction Time 5 0 years Total Trench Length ft 5211 2 Fixed Temperature C Fixed Area Inlet Temperatures 90 0 F 400 F Width Length 400 0 ft 260 6 ft Trench Number 20 a Separation 20 0 ft Depth 6 0 ft Width 36 0 in Trench Number Single Trench Length ft Total Pipe Length ft Single Trench Pipe Length ft Unit Inlet F Unit Outlet F Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr Peak Load kBtu Hr Peak Demand kW Heat Pump EER COP System EER COP System Flow Rate gpm Optional Hybrid System Off Update Cooling Reset summan OS A 20 211 0 168738 0 843 9 90 0 100 1 1330 5 1330 5 104 3 12 8 12 8 332 6 0 20 260 6 20844 6 1042 2 40 0 34 1 1193 7 750 0 58 4 3 8 3 8 187 5 Heating A sample graph can be seen in figure 5 17 below Graph of Results Horizontal Design Project 1 2 8a gt Average EWT 60 z 2 5 5 is gt a Monthly Data T T Fig 5 16 Graph average EWTs Via the Graph Button Next to the Calculate Button ff Graph Data a F Powe FT Borewal Pr TT Average Exit WT IV Average EWT W Show Title IV Show Legend Fig 5 17 An Average EWT Graph From the Horizontal Module Page 152 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module The horizontal EWT graphs use only design day loads data
299. n on the input screen Once the flow factor is determined the linear capacity or power change per flow unit may be calculated The program then calculates a new capacity or power at any specified flow rate using the initial values already known from the stored data If no data points are entered for a second flow rate the flow factor is assumed to be the constant value of 1 0 This means that the capacity and power will not vary with changes in flow rate Considering the size of the variations generally only a few percent this simple model is accurate enough for most pumps A completely accurate model of the flow rate variations for all possible pumps would require significantly more data entry Load Side Corrections The GLD Edit Add Heat Pumps module also can include corrections to the capacity or power that result from variations in the load side inlet temperature or flow rate They are entered as correction factors across the desired temperature or flow range The software again uses the polynomial fitting to model these correction factors In these cases a four coefficient model is used to better model the types of variations that may occur Three to five points are allowed as data input Again if load side correction data are not included there will be no capacity or power variations with load temperature or flow and all correction factors will be 1 0 the standard value The load side temperature range will generally be co
300. n Runout pipe size Both the Supply and Return Runout will be the same size but they can be adjusted independently 1f necessary an explanation of how to do this comes later Ultra Manifold Details related to an individual Ultra Manifold can be seen in the Ultra Manifold tabbed panel in figure 11 9 Note that in the CFD module an Ultra Manifold is defined as a Manifold or a Vault that is connected to other child Manifolds Vaults Ultra Manifolds are only applicable for use in the largest of commercial projects that require nested levels of Vaults Manifolds Manifold and GHX Module Automation Presets GHX Module Manifold Pipe Sizes Return Piping Style Return Type Direct Return Section Outlet Information Section Outlet Number 5 Extra Section Outlet Separation ft 6 0 0 0 Section Outlet Pipe Size SDR11 3 in 80 mm Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 4 in 100 mm Fig 11 9 Ultra Manifold Information Panel Contents Page 257 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Return Piping Style This section stores information related to direct and reverse return systems Return Type Return type is locked at direct return since reverse return Manifolds are rarely if ever used Section Outlet Information The section outlet information refers to how the outlets in the Ultra Manifold connect to Manifolds Vaults
301. n opens up the Review panel explained below Page 267 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Pipe Pair and Circuit i e the component types Pipe Pair When a user selects Pipe Pair all of the Pipe Pairs in the piping system design are enabled to display the selected fluid dynamics results Circuit When a user selects Circuit all of the GHX Circuits in the piping system design are enabled to display the selected fluid dynamics results Pipe 1 and Pipe 2 Pipe 1 When a user selects Pipe 1 all of the supply side pipes in the piping system design for both pipe pairs and GHX Circuits are enabled to display the selected fluid dynamics results Pipe 2 When a user selects Pipe 2 all of the return side pipes in the piping system design for both pipe pairs and GHX Circuits are enabled to display the selected fluid dynamics results Note that the CFD modules uses the notation to indicate return side flow Length Size Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume and Pressure Drop Size When a user selects Size all of the pipe diameters for the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Length When a user selects Length all of the pipe lengths for the selected component types pipe pair and or circuit and pipes pipe 1 and or pipe 2 are displayed Flow Rate When a user selects Flow Rate all of the flow rates within the selected co
302. nabled computer The program will work without the browser but the data reference files may not be accessible Metric and English reference files are included with GLD These files aid in the correct verification and entry of the various parameters The three main topics design aids currently included under the Tables menu in the Design Studio are Fluid Properties Soil Properties and Pipe Properties A convenient Conversions table with metric English conversions in two different formats is included for reference as well Reference files can be opened and left as open windows on the desktop and the user can refer to them as necessary during the design process Realizing that designers and engineers have their own preferred resources GLD employs the HTML browser model so that the user has ultimate control over the reference files The designer simply creates a basic HTML file containing customized data pictures graphs charts etc and then modifies the included top level HTML files to link to their pages The system requires a very basic knowledge of HTML but it offers an extremely flexible system for user customization Detailed information on reference files and sample HTML can be found in Chapter 8 Program Help and Support GLD contains a comprehensive searchable database of help topics Access this feature from the Design Studio Help menu Through the Help menu it is also possible to access the latest web resources and updates If t
303. naees 181 Concluding Remarks coc tddi 181 CHAPTERS 2 ti acsncusczcasevinacauccaucvsecuaicvascisaccsecudacvoaassiciiacddicucnadsacssnacdicucnadaacesscczees 182 Tables and Reference FileS ccccceesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 182 OVEDVICW manieira es St Man eee o i a nda gia meena een eeal eon eee eis 182 Tables Included with Ground Loop Design ccesccssesssesseesseeseeseeeseeseeeeeceeenseeeseenseenaeenaeeaeeaes 183 Fluid Properties lt 3 nrinn Wade eter Geb a eek eS Hee eh Ren ave seas 183 SOL Properties sie vacate Saccokececn a eich ile ica 184 Pipe Properti0es 4 248 a nck hed eosin eee ic 184 CONVETSIONS fchioe sated Sete o ad eee ee a 185 Adding Customized Reference Files c cccccecseesscessceseceseccecseeeseeeeeeeeensceeseceaeeeaeceaeenseceeeneeeaeeses 185 Original Model jc455 nance doduse la ete ot 185 EME FIGI banoni en A tes duets en th te anon ie bat in 186 Editing Existing Files aa da 186 Malanga Table A Aaa Rainn 187 Adding a Picture Graph or Figure ccccecccecssesseessceeeeeeceneceeceseenseenaecneeeneeenes 187 Taking Care with Updates opos 188 Page 8 PREFACE Contents Concl ding RemarkS tii ia iia 188 CHAPTER 9 E E E E E EA 189 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module oooooocccccccncnnnnoncnacccccnnncnonnnanananncnns 189 OVERVIEW A O O E T 189 General AE K e E E E cla cera 190 Theoretical BASS r a ae aa a a e aaa aa an a AA e a ANEA 191 Opening
304. nager Loads module is provided for designers who desire a full analysis capability Loads are input as separate zones and each zone is matched with a particular pump This mode is more valuable when users require thorough designs The Average Block Loads module offers a rapid system of entering whole systems information for users who do not require or desire to input the data for a fully zone divided installation Rather than matching specific pumps to each zone the Average Block Loads module uses a particular user defined style of pump or COP and matches it in an average way to the entire installation Although the input scheme is simpler the design calculations are identical to those of the more complex Zone Manager Loads module In fact on average 1f identical values could be placed in both the Zone Manager and Average Block loads modules identical calculated bore lengths would result The Average Block Loads module optionally can accept monthly loads total and peak data In GLD 2014 the Average Block Loads module also can accept 8760 hourly loads data When the user inputs these monthly and or hourly data the program provide a number of calculated outputs included monthly hourly borehole evolution temperatures heat pump performance on a monthly or hourly basis graphical representations of the thermal storage effects from balanced loads profiles etc Zone Files Zone loads files are stored as zon files in the GLD zones
305. nd total loads information that is critical for the proper balancing of loads and the proper sizing of geothermal hybrid systems Prior to the LoadSplitter tool developing an understanding of the relationship between peak and total loads was a laborious time consuming process Now it is instantaneous In the cases in which Monthly or Design Day loads are available for a design the LoadSplitter tool looks like this Optional Hybrid System Off Cooling es i 0 Heating Update Peaks Fig 4 30 LoadSplitter Controls with Monthly Design Day Data With access to Monthly or Design Day loads profiles there are two sliders Peak and Total for cooling and two sliders for heating Two sliders are necessary because the Monthly and or Design Day loads data are not detailed enough for the program to automatically understand the relationship between the peak and total loads As a result the user must manually specify both peak and total load shavings Note that to protect the designer from an overly aggressive design the maximum total load Page 126 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module shaving percentage cannot be greater than the peak load shaving percentage For example if the designer specifies a 20 cooling peak load shaving then the designer will be limited to choosing a total load shaving that is between 0 20 This limitation is based off of feedback from experienced design engineers that have characterized the gener
306. ndard option Page 103 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Borehole Diameter and Backfill Grout Information The user can enter the borehole diameter and the grout thermal conductivity directly into their respective text boxes If cuttings are used for the backfill the average soil conductivity should be entered here Soil Input parameters relating to the soil are located in the Soil panel as shown in figure 4 11 These include the average ground temperature the soil thermal properties and the modeling time period F Borehole Design Project 2 Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Undisturbed Ground Temperature Ground Temperature 58 oF Soil Thermal Properties View Layer Calculator Thermal Conductivity 1 08 Btu h ft F Thermal Diffusivity 0 75 ft 2 day Diffusivity Calculator Check Soil Tables Modeling Time Period Prediction Time 10 years Fig 4 11 Soil Panel Contents gt Page 104 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module The undisturbed ground temperature refers to the temperature of the soil below the surface layer where there is no longer a seasonal swing This value may be determined from regional data or by recording the actual stabilized temperature of water circulated through pipe in a test bore The soil thermal properties are a little harder to define and care must be taken to provide accurate values especially for the thermal conductivity Th
307. ne None Fig 9 9 Geothermal Project Power Summary Panel Length or Area of the system The length or area horizontal is a necessary input for calculating the subsurface installation costs Here the user can enter the length of vertical bore or pipe required for a vertical horizontal bore or pond system or the area required for a horizontal system When a user imports a design project into the GSA module the length or area automatically is set to match the length or area calculated in the heat exchanger design Note that the user is responsible for defining lengths in terms of feet of bore feet of pipe or area and then maintaining consistency throughout the rest of the analysis process Geothermal Project Power Summary Below the length or area of the system the user can see the program s annual energy usage estimate for the geothermal system Results are listed in heating cooling and total columns for ease of review Energy usage is divided up into the following constituent parts e geothermal power the power consumed by the geothermal system e hybrid power the power consumed by the hybrid system if any e total annual power a summation of geothermal and hybrid power Page 214 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module e water the amount of water if any consumed by the system on an annual basis e other other fuel sources natural gas fuel oil etc and the annual amount consu
308. nformation Peak Load Flow Rate gpm 30 00 Installed Capacity Flow Rate gpm 60 00 Purging Flow Rate gpm 68 3 Minimum Purging Target Velocity ft s 2 00 100 00 Fig 11 92 68 3 gpm Will Purge the GHX Circuits at 2 ft s Properly purging a system of air also requires that the supply and return headering pairs are properly purged This more complex engineering challenge is addressed by the GHX Header Design Optimizer The GHX Header Design Optimizer Properly purging a GHX Header system is more difficult than purging individual GHX Circuits because the GHX Header pairs are of larger diameter and therefore require higher flow rates to ensure a particular purging target velocity is achieved Higher flow rates require larger and more expensive purging pumps Page 344 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module To avoid these higher pumping costs designers usually design and build reducing headers that gradually shrink in diameter across the GHX Module As the headers shrink in diameter the velocity is boosted As a result the required purging flow rates for a system with reducing headers is lower and costs less than for a system that has uniform diameter pipes across the entire headering system Therefore designers in the know design reducing headers for both direct and reverse return systems The calculations necessary for determining the predicted flow rates and velocities under different piping de
309. ng and flow optimization design considerations that can have a significant impact on overall system performance and cost effectiveness The program is optimized for hybrid system design that combine boilers cooling towers fluid coolers solar thermal and the like with ground heat exchangers Additionally the loads representation employed in GLD s Zone Management system allows for detailed equipment selection and specific load distribution data to maximize calculation accuracy The Premier Version of GLD includes four design modules one for vertical borehole ground heat exchanger systems one for horizontal heat exchanger systems one for surface water pond lake etc installations and the computational fluid dynamics CFD module for piping and flow optimization Page 13 PREFACE Before You Begin design across all types of ground heat exchangers It also includes two loads modules one for average block loads and one for the more detailed zone model The loads data can be shared between modules using GLD s unique linking system In addition loads data including design day monthly and 8760 hourly loads data from external energy simulation programs as well as from Excel files conveniently can be imported into the loads modules The Premier version also includes the Geothermal System Analyzer module for conducting financial CO2 emissions and energy costs analyses of various HVAC systems The Thermal Conductivity analysis module an o
310. nger length is printed in bold type so that it stands out The longer length usually determines the installation size and for this reason the shorter length system results lose relevance However in cases where the cooling and heating lengths are similar care must be taken to assure the safest design Page 173 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module E Surface Water Design Project SurfaceWaterSample Results l Fluid Soil Piping Surface Water Extra kW Information Calculate COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 4087 2 8187 8 Circuit Length ft 371 6 Number of Circuits 11 Max Parallel Circuits 11 Unit Inlet F 55 0 Unit Outlet F 64 4 Approach Temp F 5 9 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 415 5 Peak Load kBtu Hr 130 6 Peak Demand kv 8 4 Heat Pump EER COP 20 5 System EER COP Total Head Loss ft hd 8 6 Header Loss ft hd 5 0 Circuit Loss ft hd 3 6 System Flow Rate gpm Primary Header gpm Branch Header gpm Circuit gpm Fig 6 9 Calculate Panel Contents Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Length Ft 4087 2 8187 8 Unit Inlet F 55 0 36 0 Circuit Length FE 371 6 545 9 Unit Outlet F 64 4 30 1 Fig 6 10 Results as Displayed in Expanded User Interface Calculations Calculate Fig 6 11 Calculate Button in Expanded User Interface Page 174 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module Reporting
311. ni 211 Installation Arta cial 211 Water Usage Rate cai etilo 211 A O ONO 211 Geothermal Project Power Summary Panel oooonconncniccnicnnocnnononnnonnconoconoconocnnoo 212 Length or Area Of the System esccccsccesssecessceenseceteceececunseeeaeecneeeeneeesas 213 Geothermal Project Power SUMMATY cccscccessceesseceseeeenseceseeeensecesees 213 Geothermal System Details ooooonnonconocciocononconnonononnnnnnononcnnnconocnrnonnranono nono noo 214 Primary Geothermal Tab 0 cceccesseesseeseeseceeeceseeeeeeeeeeseenereneenseeaees 215 COONS A e ae cade I O Sted 215 Geothertrial Heating eE id 216 Page 9 PREFACE Contents A O teeviawbig r Eee e Grebe Le 218 E eesti ect ee eles etc decub a ch toca detunis cuties an hack a a aE a s 219 RESUS obi coes O tod esl out tata e e aa ee ae Bol bole hanno Be 220 LifeCycle Sub Panel c ccccs xin Ae hs hoa Rakion te 221 Annual Sub Panel is 0 cance id indian aula Bele dae 222 INCISO 223 VIE WINS COTAS alles tene Aa o la eo do 223 Printing Reports ti is 224 References e nd e o a ea ag 224 CHAPTER TU a s 226 The Thermal Conductivity Module cccconnncnnccccncnnnononanananaccnnnononennnnananannns 226 O A is 226 General Features o o e o 227 Theoretical Basi ci eases a HO A 228 Openi e Projects naaa 228 New Prot iaa 228 Existing Projects e eee 228 SAVING Projects a 228 Importing Conductivity Data cccccsscessesscessceesceescesecesecaecsaecaeesaeeeeeeee
312. nnot be in parallel Can you find the serial flow flows in figure 11 42 Remember serial flow paths are stacked with indentation and each parent can have only one child This means that supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 supply pipe B of Pipe Pair BB Circuit 2 are in series since they are stacked with indentation and each component has only one child and one parent Can you describe the other major series flow path in figure 11 42 It is supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA supply pipe C of the GHX Header Section CC Circuit 3 supply pipe D of Pipe Pair DD Circuit 4 Hopefully by now you are feeling comfortable with the Layout Manager workspace and how it displays parallel and series flow for a variety of conditions We will look at two more basic direct return examples to solidify our understanding It is important to note that the visual grammar that the CFD module uses is not to scale The graphics used to describe the pipes and their relationships are identical in size even if the underlying pipe properties are different For example in figure 31 circuit 1 could be 100 ft deep and circuit 2 could be 200 feet deep Page 300 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module BASIC DIRECT RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 3 Figure 11 43 is the layout of a four circuit two GHX circuits per bore GHX Module The two circuits per bore or double U tubes according to
313. noocccnoncconannncninnnno 41 Efficiency 54 64 89 90 91 116 120 174 188 209 210 211 215 216 217 218 220 250 350 Emissions costS 190 191 196 199 222 Energy costs ceci 13 222 Page 355 Index Index of Terms English Units ooooooccoocccocccooconoconancnonnnonononnnnonnos 20 183 Entering loads ioien piui aias 55 66 Entering water temperature 33 44 100 117 122 150 168 Equipment installation costs 222 Equivalent full load hours 19 193 209 210 215 216 218 219 Equivalent hours 24 28 57 66 74 77 79 81 83 84 Equivalent Hours Calculator 24 57 66 74 77 79 81 84 An A ETT 44 109 112 122 151 152 iii 34 91 94 98 99 352 353 External SOU COS ooonnocnnnnnnnoniconcnicananannnnananono 15 43 48 Extra kW 26 29 31 88 89 90 111 113 116 120 134 150 163 174 F Finance 34 180 181 224 Finance reports cooooccccnocccnonccccononcncnancnconnaconns 180 224 Fittings 38 39 167 241 242 243 244 273 276 277 279 280 281 294 295 297 302 315 316 317 318 319 320 Fixed area mode 24 131 134 135 138 140 Fixed temperature mode 24 100 106 109 110 112 Flow rate 22 38 39 43 44 45 46 58 59 69 90 106 107 111 113 116 120 146 150 162 166 168 169 171 174 175 183 184 185 186 227 231 232 235 236 241 243 244 245 2
314. nsiderably different for water to air and water to water pumps GLD suggests different initial temperature ranges when the user chooses the water to air or the water to water pump type option Page 40 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps Entering Data into the Add Edit Heat Pumps Module The user opens the Edit Add Heat Pumps module from the Design Studio Heat Pumps menu Note that one module can be open at a time When the module opens there are two selection boxes present in the upper pane while no pump data is displayed in the lower pane In the left box the user can choose to select either one of the manufacturers from the list of existing manufacturers or New Series If a manufacturer is selected the associated list of pump series available for that particular manufacturer appears in the box on the right When a series is chosen the data for that series appears in the lower panel Creating a New Series and or Manufacturer If the user chooses New Series from the manufacturer list on the left the lower pane becomes active with another selection box that requests direction as to whether to use an existing manufacturer or to create a New Manufacturer After the user makes a selection the panel changes to show information about the manufacturer and series The manufacturer information will be editable if the series belongs to a new manufacturer The Edit Add Heat Pumps module with an open Pump Information pane
315. nthly loads data from Excel and into the Average Block Loads module Importing Monthly and Hourly Loads From 3rd Party Programs To import a file from a commercial loads program the user can click on the Import button at the top of the Average Block loads module It looks like this 2 Doing so automatically opens the file dialog box in the Loads Files folder There may be several subfolders in which users should store the loads data files that GLD will be using Users can select one of these folders to display all of the files that can be imported from that particular folder Note that in previous versions of GLD the file dialog box in the Zones folder would open up Monthly Loads Data When the user selects a valid monthly import file the program automatically transfers the data into the active Average Block Loads module Note that any previously existing loads will be overwritten If the user is importing a monthly geothermal template GT file from the Trane Trace program an Import Loads window will open showing the imported data in detail This window is shown in figure 3 18 The imported monthly and hourly total and peak data also are automatically imported into the monthly loads input boxes as seen in figure 3 13 The Import Loads window displays the imported data the filename and the name of the program that generated the file Total loads and peak demand data are presented on separate screens for cooling and heatin
316. o the individual components Viewing results in the Layout Manager Workspace is a faster way to review results across an entire system as well as to compare different components from a variety of perspectives Page 336 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Because the results data are comprehensive and too much to absorb at one time designers have control over which results they wish to see at any one time The user can select which information to view using the Display icon button which is the far right button in the image below Calculate El When a user pushes this button a window similar to that in figure 11 83 will appear Multi Select Renew Pipe Pair Circuit Pipel Pipe 2 Size Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop Total Branch Pressure Drop Group Name Fig 11 83 Selecting Which Results to View in the Layout Manager Workspace The user can then proceed to select data sets of interest Note the user MUST select at least one option from each of the following two categories for results to display Pipe Pair and or Circuit Pipe 1 and or Pipe 2 If the user does not select at least one option from each of the above two categories results will not be displayed If the user selects categories of information as can be seen in figure 11 84 then results will appear as they do in figure 11 85 Viewing this Page 337 CHAPTER 11 The Computa
317. odeling time Period In GLD ten years is used as a standard length of time for ground temperature stabilization although longer or shorter time periods may be entered if desired In the case of horizontal systems a single year or less is often chosen since the interaction with the atmosphere or sunlight generally reduces the long term buildup or reduction of soil temperatures Long term thermal effects are more commonly associated with vertical bores The modeling time prediction time period can also be viewed and modified in the expanded interface as seen in figure 5 8 Calculations Calculate Prediction Time 49 9 years Fig 5 8 Prediction Time Controls in Expanded User Interface Page 142 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Piping The Piping panel contains all the information related to the particular pipe chosen for the buried heat exchanger The program uses information about the pipe size and flow type to determine the associated pipe resistance which ultimately is used in the length calculations The input screen for the piping panel is shown in figure 5 9 Pipe Parameters The pipe characteristics are entered in the Pipe Parameters section They include the pipe resistance the inside and outside pipe diameter and the pipe and flow type As in the Borehole Design module GLD calculates the convective resistance using the Dittus Boelter correlation for turbulent flow in a circular tube In
318. odule The design day efficiency is the predicated heat pump performance on the cooling and heating design day The average annual power consumption is calculated by summing up the hourly heat pump power draw over the design lifetime and dividing by the number of modeling years Including the system loads the dynamic fluid temperatures and the dynamic heat pump performance there is no more accurate way to estimate the power consumption of a geothermal design Designers may find it interesting to see the impact of borehole spacing changes on average annual power consumption Finally the system flow rate is listed in its own subsection The system flow rate is calculated from the peak load divided by 12 000 Btu ton and then multiplied by the flow rate in gpm ton chosen on the Fluid panel It represents the flow rate from the installation out to the buried pipe system Page 121 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module A The Graphing Module Users also can view a range of hourly data results using the new Graphing Module In the expanded user interface a graphing icon button will appear after hitting the Calculate button as seen in figure 4 26 Remember the user can access the expanded user interface by double clicking on any of the tabs Figure 4 26 Monthly Data Graphing Button Users can also access the graphs from the Tools dropdown menu selecting the Graph Data option and then importing the data of set of interest into the Gra
319. of Microsoft Corporation Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape Corporation GeoCube is a trademark of Precision Geothermal LLC Trane Trace is a trademark of the Trane Company The lt Virtual Environment gt is a trademark of IES Inc The Ground Loop Design Premier 2014 Edition User s Manual Originally printed in October 2014 Printed in USA Part No GGENG 1107 Visit our Web site at http www gaiageo com http www groundloopdesign com Software Information Three versions of GLD are available The program always is available for download on the web at www gaiageo com Mi aog hl ri HE ii ii ellett j E rele Pree Ple dude el le IU HEHE li HE efef P e i i nut at i l jf HE AAA i E i le pep pe pep pep e eo le e le eo Le e Le o Optional Orional Optcea optional opsonal Opona optonal opsonal optora feo pe e e e fe a A E OF e eo Je Le e e le le eo e e e e loe e e pe pel fe e le e e e e po eje oe e e e e e Le e e e e e at i iolicio Languages Page 1 PREFACE END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEME
320. of Circuits 8 Extra One way Circuit Length ft 300 0 0 0 Circuit Pipe Size SDR11 X 1 in 25 mm y Circuits Per Parallel Loop 1 Circuits Per One Way Length 1 Supply Return Runout Information Extra One Way Length ft 200 0 0 0 Pipe Size SDR11 2 in 50 mm Fig 11 5 Automation Panel Contents GHX Module Details related to an individual GHX Module can be seen in the GHX Module sub tabbed panel in figure 11 5 Return Piping Style This section stores information related to direct and reverse return systems Return Type In this section the designer specifies whether the GHX Module has direct or reverse return routing Note that this specification has Page 252 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module a potentially large impact on both the calculated results as well as the visual representation of the design in the Layout panel This will be discussed in more detail later on in this chapter Circuit Information The Circuit tabbed panel stores parameters related to the GHX Circuits in each GHX Module Circuit information is broken into Basic and Details tabbed panels The Basic tabbed panel can be seen in detail in figure 11 6 Circuit Information Circuits Headers Number of Circuits 8 Extra One way Circuit Length ft 300 0 0 0 Circuit Pipe Size SDR11 1 in 25 mm Circuits Per Parallel Loop 1 Circuits Per One Way Length 1 F
321. om the Design Studio by choosing Open from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar The file automatically opens into a new Borehole Design Project module If a loads file zon is associated with the loaded project the loads file automatically will be loaded into the appropriate loads module and opened along with the project file However if the associated loads file cannot be found the user will be notified and the automatic file loading will not occur Saving Projects Projects may be saved at any time using Save or Save As from the Design Studio File menu or by clicking the save button on the toolbar When the user Page 88 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user 1f he or she wants to save the project and associated loads files Typical Operation Although each user will have his or her own unique style the typical operation of the Borehole Design module would include the following steps e Enter Loads and select pump in either the Average Block Loads module or the Zone Manager module Form a link between the loads module and the design module Modify step by step the input parameters listed in each panel Perform initial calculation Modify various parameters and recalculate to determine the effects of the modifications Add an optional hybrid system e Runa monthly or hourly energy simulation e Establish an optimal system e Save and or
322. ommercial design could easily take an experienced designer a half day or more to try to optimize Modeling reverse return systems with any accuracy is particularly difficult when using spreadsheets and hand calculations The new Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD module in GLD 2014 Premier changes all this The CFD module provides designers and engineers with a level Page 241 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module of design control and power that until now has not existed in our collective toolbox This module specialized in designing the loopfield piping systems The module can be used in conjunction with other piping software solutions that specialize in building internal piping systems The patent pending CFD module utilizes a new and easy to learn visual drag and drop language for describing any possible loopfield configuration including direct and reverse return ground heat exchangers supply and return runouts manifolds vaults the fittings that connect everything together and circulation pumps The user has the ability to define each and every part of the entire design down to the smallest detail if he or she so desires Doing so of course could take some time This is why the CFD module also includes a suite of intelligent algorithms that optimize piping design automatically and nearly instantly fittings in the 2014 version require manual selection These algorithms efficiently calculate for example the proper
323. on panel while piping choices are listed on the Piping panel Everything related to a project is presented simultaneously and easily is accessible throughout the design process In the expanded user interface mode which can be expanded by double clicking on any of the tabs the most CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module commonly modified parameters as well as calculation results are always visible as seen below in figure 5 1 Temperatures i COOLING Unit Inlet F 0 0 Total Trench Length ft 0 0 Unit Outlet F 0 0 Single Trench Length ft 0 0 Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW Information FT On Off Total Area 183720 0 ft 2 Prediction Time 5 0 years Width 400 0 ft x Length 4593 ft CO nial Fixed Temperature C Fixed Area 2 Number 20 E Depth 8 0 ft Inlet Temperatures Separation 20 0 ft Width 120 in 0 0 00 Pipe Conf tion in Ti 4 Width Length HGN U Trench Number 20 e A R Separation 20 0 ft aiai Ea a Total Number of Pipes 2 Cooling Tower Boiler o Vertical Separation Y 15 0 in 5 k x Horizontal Separation X 12 0 in Modeling Time Period dis Prediction Time 50 years Load Balance Fig 5 1 The Expanded User Interface The Horizontal Design module includes several additional features Metric and English unit conversion Printed reports of all input data and calculated results Convenien
324. ontal separation Each horizontal bore has an average depth of 20 ft The two pipe configuration has been selected to represent the supply and return pipe in the bore The horizontal separation has been set to one inch to indicate that the supply and return pipes are close together in the borehole If the designer wishes to have vertically stacked horizontal bores say one at 30 ft depth and one at 15 ft depth the user could set the maximum depth at 30 ft and then choose a total of four pipes and then define the vertical separation between pipes at 180 inches or 15 ft The resulting design would have five columns of horizontal bores with 20 ft horizontal Page 141 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module separation In each column the top bore would be 15 ft deep and the bottom bore would be 30 ft deep This can be seen in figure 5 7 below AP Horizontal Design Project 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping Configuration Extra kW Information Fixed Area Mode FT On Off Total Area 50000 0 ft 2 Width 100 0 ft x Length 500 0 ft Trench Layout 2 number 75 H Depth 30 0 ft Separation 20 0 ft Width 10 in Pipe Configuration in Trench All a o O Cc l Offset Fo Ez Y Total Number of Pipes 4 o o Vertical Separation Y 180 in k x1 Horizontal Separation X 1 0 in Modeling Time Period Prediction Time 5 0 years Fig 5 7 A Vertically Stacked Horizontal Bore Design M
325. oonconnnonononconncnnoconocnnocn noo 170 Coldest Warmest Day in Yeat cccceccesceesseesseeseeeseeeseeereeeeeeteeneensees 171 Corrected Temperature ssc eenn ita Reve igh ores 171 Elda teta lc la ates E ld hens tiveeedte ete htas tan rane 171 RestiltSisz ste St cctiip to 1er e eta 172 Reporting Sect oth a 174 Printing Reports a ta east 175 CHAPTER Ta aaa 176 Report Suicide 176 OVA tt 176 The Report Pre vienWiIAdO Wi ies 176 Project Repotts 1 dci 177 hif rmaton iensen a ER EEA EEE stag EO E EEE 177 Calculation Results 177 Input Para Meli seis 178 Data 178 Monthly Inlet Temperatures ooooccoonnonnnonononcnononononncon nono nono nonnrnnn conc nn carr nn nennnnos 178 Comments estenosis 178 LONG Report dd dd o dd ld E 178 Detailed Forma esha eben ere eee dsd boto 179 Concise Format ado e ad e a il stale de 179 A A etna dette 179 Toads Listin lo ed e e dc dd e 180 Names List il tt ad ote od da e e DA a at 180 Finance Reports calas 180 Concise Form e do e dd ie tat 180 Detailed Formar tao tant 181 Concise and Detailed Inputs Forms ooooconccioninonioononnnnononnnconoc nono nocnncnnnnonocn neos 181 Financial Analysis Form ccccescessscesecesecseceseceeecaeeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeseneeneeeneeaees 181 Thermal Conductivity Report ccccccscecssesscessceesceeecesecesecaecseecaeesaeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeneeneeaees 181 Computational Fluid Dynamics Reports cccescceseessecseceseeeeeeeecaeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneenee
326. op information data during a conductivity test If a particular unit has this capacity and the flow pressure relationship has been calibrated then these calibration data can be entered or in the case of preloaded data viewed and selected here These data are useful because it enables GLD to monitor the raw test data for flow rate stability throughout the conductivity test If a user needs to enter calibration data for a conductivity test unit that is not already included in the module the user will need to manually enter calibration data The calibration process does not have to be complex To collect these data a user can monitor the pressure drop for three flow rates a flow rate can be determined with a stop watch and a bucket of defined volume After these data are collected the user can select Other under the TC Unit Model Name enter the pressure Page 232 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module drop flow rate data and hit the Calculate Coefficients button Hit the save button to store the data for the current analysis Calibration data are stored in the following file Main Drive Program Files GLD2014 ThermalConductivity WodelCoefficients txt In GLD 2014 the Thermal Conductivity automatically determines flow rates for units that have flow meters rather than pressure sensors For those units with flow meters the flow calibration process does not apply Thermal Conductivity Calculation Project So Es
327. operties tables included with GLD are related to either the borehole thermal resistance or the pipe physical data They are listed below Table 1 Thermal Conductivities of Typical Grouts and Backfills Table 2 Pipe and Tube Dimensions Table 3 Required Flow Rates to Achieve 2 ft s SDR11 Pipe The first table provides thermal conductivities for some typical grouts The second lists the physical dimensions inner and outer diameter for common pipe sizes in various types of pipe The third although unnecessary for the associated Page 185 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files calculations provides some convenient flow rates required for proper purging of a piping system Conversions The Conversions table has two separate lists of metric to English conversions placed together in one file As already mentioned the user can obtain multipliers for most common metric English unit changes by going through the listed conversions Adding Customized Reference Files The user can create customized reference files by editing the existing HTML files with the table lists and making new links The process is simple and requires only a very basic knowledge of HTML Original Model The original model included with GLD consists of these files English Metric FluidTables html FluidTablesMetric html FluidTable1 html FluidTable1Metric html FluidTable2 html FluidTable2Metric html FluidTable3 html FluidTable4 html FluidTable5 html So
328. or replacements performed outside of the limited warranty period This warranty does not apply if the Software 1 is licensed for beta evaluation testing or demonstration purposes for which Gaia does not receive a license fee 11 has been altered except by Gala 111 has not been installed operated repaired or maintained in accordance with instructions supplied by Gaia iv has been subjected to abnormal physical or electrical stress misuse negligence or accident or v is used in ultra hazardous activities If the dongle license key becomes damaged replacement keys can be obtained for a 150 fee To obtain a replacement key for a damaged key Customer must send the damaged key to Gaia or a Gaia authorized reseller In the case of a lost dongle license key Customer will be charged the full list price of the Software to replace the lost dongle license key The authorized distributors of the Software who are appointed by Gaia are not permitted to alter the terms of this End User Agreement in any manner Disclaimer EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN THIS WARRANTY ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE NONINFRINGEMENT SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT WILL GAIA OR ITS SUPPLIERS
329. otal Loads kBtu 1000 S Peak Loads kBtu hr Fig 5 22 The hybrid loads graphing module The user can the hit the Calculate button in the horizontal module to see how the reduced geothermal loads impact the geothermal borefield design The designer can repeat the process as necessary until achieving a desired design outcome When the user is satisfied with the design the user has the option of exporting the geothermal and hybrid loads via the File gt Export File gt Export Hybrid Data option as can be seen in figure 5 23 Exporting this data in a text file for further review and manipulation in a spreadsheet like Excel may be useful on some projects Page 157 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Heat Pumps Tools Units Tables Settings Window Help Upgrade MEE File View Loads New Borehole New Horizontal New Surface Water New Geothermal System Analyzer New Thermal Conductivity New Piping Open Ctrl O Save Ctrl S Save As Ctri A Export File Export IDF Print Ctri P Export Hybrid Data gt Monthly Data Exit Ctrl Q Hourly Data Fig 5 23 How to Export Hybrid Loads Data The final major feature of the LoadSplitter tool is the Summary button which can be seen in figure 5 18 The Summary button becomes active after the user has used one or more sliders and hit the Update button The Summary button generates a
330. ow descriptions Then in the Import Loads window click on the Excel icon The data will be imported The data can be modified directly in the Import Loads window or by hitting the Modify button the user can open the file in the Equivalent Hours Calculator where the data can be edited as well The user can transfer the modified data into the Average Block Loads module by pressing the Transfer button When both the Calculator and the Import Loads windows are open the program first will ask the user from which window the Calculator or the Import Loads window he or she wishes to transfer data The program then prompts the user to decide to which loads heating or cooling the data should be transferred Note that it is possible to import a single column of data Following the column order listed above put the single column of data in the correct position Fill the remaining columns with zeros and then copy all four columns to the clipboard Hourly Loads Data There is only one way of importing hourly loads data from Excel or another spreadsheet program and into GLD Premier 2014 Loads data must be in one of the following formats Page 78 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Chillers load kBtu h Boilers load kBtu h 0 0 002 0 09 0 188 0 987 2 38 6 586 193 683 Chillers load kW ojojojo oO O OJO Boilers load kW 0 0 002 0 09 0 1
331. p Input Power Pump Power and Motor Efficiency The circulation pump input power automatically is calculated from the pump power and motor efficiency These values can be imported from a heat exchanger design project or manually entered Additional Power The user can enter power for all other elements in the system besides the heat pump units that may require energy input For example heat recovery units require additional energy that can be recorded in this box so that it can be used in the overall calculation of the System COP Again these data can be imported from a heat exchanger project if the data are in the project or can be entered manually Installation Area In this section the user enters the floor space square footage required by the geothermal mechanical equipment For example if a school geothermal system is decentralized and the heat pumps are located in the ceilings above the classrooms the user might leave this value at 0 Conversely if the geothermal equipment is located in a small closet in each classroom the designer could multiply the square footage of each closet by the number of closets in the school to calculate a cumulative value for entry in this text box Page 218 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Hybrid Component Tab Cooling In this column the user can enter details about the hybrid component of the geothermal cooling system s Equivalent Full Load Hours The
332. phically in figure 11 29 Pipe Pair A Parent to Circuit 1 and Pipe Pair B Circuit 1 Child to Pipe Pair A Sibling of Pipe Pair B Pipe Pair B Child of Pipe Pair A Sibling of Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Child of Pipe Pair B Sibling of Pipe Pair C Pipe Pair C Child of Pipe Pair B Sibling of Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Child of Pipe Pair C This parent child nomenclature will be referred to from time to time throughout the rest of this manual Note that for reverse return systems this nomenclature is modified see below CONCEPT THREE Parallel and Serial Flow Paths Parallel Flow Paths A parallel flow path is defined as one in which a flow path and component divides into two or more parallel flow paths and components Note that parallel does not mean equal It merely means that the flow branches off in two or more directions When a parent is attached to two or more children the flow splits off in parallel Visually a parallel flow across four components can be thought of as looking like this gt aap N Series Flow Paths Page 284 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module A series flow path is defined as one in which a flow path continues in one direction from one component to another component When a parent has one child the flow travels from parent to child in series Visually a series flow across two component elements can be thought of as looking like this gt gt As long as the designer
333. phing Module Figure 4 27 is a screenshot of the Graphing Module with hourly data gt Graph Data HourlyData_07 26 2010_13_20_50 b toba OEI HourlyData_07 26 2010_13_20_50 txt Graph Data Average EWT Hourly Data ra T T 90 7 T Borewall J Tt T Average Exit WT Y Average EWT Minimum EWT M Maximum EWT 80 En o T Temperature F M Show Title a o M Show Legend 40 1 fi 1 0 1752 3 7008 8760 504 5256 Time Hours Figure 4 27 The Graphing Module with Hourly Data The Graphing Module in GLD Premier 2014 is more powerful than the graphing functions in older versions of GLD In the module users can left click the mouse and drag a box around an area of interest in the graph Users can then release the mouse button to zoom in on the area of interest This process can be repeated Page 122 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module multiple times Users can right click the mouse at any time to zoom out to the original view Within the graph the designer can choose which data to view save and or print Options include Q heat transferred to or from the ground heat pump power consumption borehole temperature Tf the average temperature of fluid in the borehole calculated as the average of exiting and entering temperatures average exiting water temperature average entering water temperature and minimum a variation of the a
334. previously two components power the entire CFD module They are Page 276 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module a GHX Circuit with at least three fittings inlet end outlet a Supply Return Pipe Pair with at least two fittings one supply side fitting generally before the supply side pipe and one return side fitting generally after the return side pipe y An individual GHX Circuit consists of the following five subcomponents Ar Fitting for attachment to parent header pipe optional A Supply side pipe Ara End fitting that connects Pipe A and Pipe A optional A Return side pipe usually length A length A A r Fitting for attachment to child header pipe optional SS ES VU A tu Note arrows indicate supply return flow directions Also the space between sections is intentional to illustrate the individual subcomponents Each of these subcomponents has a large number of user definable characteristics associated with it including Fittings As Ag and A s e Fitting type socket tee branch butt tee branch etc Page 277 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module e Fitting pipe size e Fitting equivalent length e Fitting name e Fitting volume Pipe A and A Pipe size Pipe type Pipe inner diameter Pipe outer diameter Pipe length Extra pipe length Pipe name Pipe volume Note that each section can have multiple fittings in case a design requires
335. print the project and associated zone file Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels GLD s innovative tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Information Extra kW Pattern U Tube Soil Fluid and Results panels See Chapter 3 for a discussion of Loads entry Information The contents of the Information panel are shown in figure 4 2 All of the descriptive information related to the project is stored in this panel This primarily includes the names of the project and designer and the dates Reference data concerning the client also can be included on this page so that all relevant project information is in one convenient location In addition to generalized project information specialized comments can be included in the Comments section of the Information panel This area allows the designer to make any notes particular to the specific project that may not necessarily fit under any of the other topics provided Page 89 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module All of the data in the information panel is optional but completing the page is recommended for the sake of organization Reports utilize the project information as a way of distinguishing one project from another Except for the dates the information panel input boxes contain only text and any desired format may be used when
336. profiles of multiple systems The GSA module either can be used on a standalone basis or in conjunction with a heat exchanger system designed in GLD On a standalone basis users can enter minimal data for a quick energy cost and emissions estimate or can enter detailed data for a more comprehensive financial analysis Users also can model the financials of a heat exchanger system designed in GLD The program automatically transfer the applicable parameters into the GSA module and reports the financial and emissions analysis As with the other modules in Ground Loop Design it is important to remember that the calculated results are only as good as the quality of the user defined inputs Assuming that reasonable values are provided to the software the software will provide reasonable results It is also important to note that the GSA module is only an estimation tool and for a variety of reasons installed HVAC systems may have costs and emissions that vary significantly from the estimates General Features To aid in the data entry process the GSA module in Ground Loop Design consists of a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables efficiently For example parameters related to the utility costs are listed on the Utility Costs panel while conventional system comparison choices are listed on the Conventional panel The idea is that everything related to a single GSA project is presented s
337. ptional module performs soil thermal conductivity and borehole thermal response analyses using in situ thermal conductivity response test data Because of the extensive customization and override features included in the software GLD is suited ideally for both standard and non standard applications which can involve significant variations in equipment loads and operational parameters for each zone in the design The user who may prefer to add his or her specific images or data sheets has the freedom to customize the data reference files With instant direct metric English unit conversions and foreign language capabilities GLD is a truly international program With GLD communicating project parameters equipment requirements and loads data with coworkers partners and vendors anywhere in the world is efficient and easy The program provides a framework for international standardization System Requirements for Running GLD This section lists the hardware and software requirements for running GLD Hardware Requirements A full installation has the following minimum hardware requirements e 1GBRAM 2 GB recommended e 150 MB hard disk space 300 MB recommended e Intel Core 2 Duo Processor for optimal simulations Software Requirements GLD has the following software requirements e System running under Windows Page 14 PREFACE Before You Begin e Netscape Navigator Google Chrome Mozilla Firefox or Internet Explore
338. r 0 429 ft yr DX 4 08m yr 4 14m yr 4 26m yr 4 38m yr 4 8m yr cooling Electric 0 382 ft yr 0 388 ft yr 0 399 ft yr 0 416 ft yr 0 45 ft yr heating 2 pipe fan coil 5 58m yr 5 66m yr 5 77m yr 5 95m yr 6 3m yr w boiler and 0 523 ft yr 0 530 ft yr 0 541 ft yr 0 558 ft yr 0 592 ft yr chiller VAV w boiler 6 77m yr 6 84m yr 6 95m yr 7 13m yr 7 5m yr and chiller 0 634 ft7 yr 0 641 ft yr 0 651 ft7 yr 0 668 ft7 yr 0 703 ft yr 4 pipe fain coil 7 32m yr 7 4m yr 7 5m yr 7 7m yr 8 1m yr with boiler and 0 686 ft yr 0 693 ft7 yr 0 703 ft7 yr 0 720 ft yr 0 755 f yr chiller Page 205 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module The above data are included in this manual as a convenience and general reference for Ground Loop Design software users It is of course the responsibility of the designer to determine the exact maintenance cost parameters for use in the GSA module After having selected a system type and an appropriate fuel type for the system the user can then enter the per square foot per year maintenance cost value If for example a user wishes to have the program perform comparisons involving both natural gas and fuel oil boilers the user must be sure to enter the maintenance cost data for both types of boilers Please note that the
339. r Operating System Requirements GLD will operate under Windows 9X ME NT 2000 XP VISTA 7 8 GLD will operate under Apple Macintosh Parallels or Boot Camp running a Windows OS as well Internet Browser Requirements An Internet browser is required only for viewing the data reference files and not for general program operation To access the data reference files at least one of the following browsers is necessary e Netscape Navigator Version 5 0 or later e Internet Explorer Version 5 0 or later e Google Chrome Version 2 0 or later e Mozilla Firefox Version 2 or later Installation Procedure If you have problems installing GLD please visit the support page at http www gaiageo com or contact your distributor Note that you can also download GLD from the internet at http www galageo com The downloadable version always will be the most recent release Initial Installation For CD versions of GLD installation should start automatically If not the software may be installed by clicking on the Setup exe file included on the disk The program is set to install in the folder Main Drive Program Files Gaia Geothermal GLD2014 If desired the user can specify a different location during the installation sequence Installation of Updated Versions or Re Installation Page 15 PREFACE Before You Begin GLD2014 will not overwrite a previous version of GLD on the user s computer If the user needs to uninstall and reinstall
340. r Common Fuels section These fuels include electricity fuel oil natural gas now in therms for GLD2014 propane wood coal biomass excluding wood and wood pellets and water Although water is not a fuel it is consumed in some HVAC systems such as cooling towers and therefore is included here for financial modeling purposes Page 207 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Note that it is essential that users enter rates for both summer and winter rates even 1f they are identical Failure to do so will result in underestimated cost results Annual Inflation Rates In this section users can enter the expected fuel inflation rates for each fuel type as well as the maintenance cost inflation rate and the overall discount rate Because inflation rates vary depending on fuel type users can enter the inflation rate for each fuel type for the highest levels of modeling accuracy To enter the fuel inflation rate for each fuel type the user first selects a fuel type from the dropdown menu and then enters the appropriate inflation rate The user can then repeat the process for the other fuel types Note that if the user selects a HVAC system but does not include a fuel inflation rate appropriate for that system then an accurate NPV analysis cannot be performed For example if the user does not enter the inflation rate for fuel oil yet selects a fuel oil boiler as part of a geothermal hybrid system then the program will
341. r Dragging and Dropping the Second Pipe Pair GHX Circuit Nested Component Family onto the First Pipe Pair The drag and drop process is very flexible and enables designers to quickly design and adjust systems Copying and Pasting Pipe Pairs and Circuits A user also has the option of copying and pasting individual components nested families of components or partial nested families of components For example In figure 11 53 the user can right click on the circuit and choose Copy Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Required Total Circuit Length ft 0 0 o Total Circuit Number __Calculate__ B Peak Load Pipe Pair 200 0 0 Alphabetic Categorized Pipe Pair 200 0ft 0 B Fittings Er Add New Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Add Circulation Pump Page 310 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Fig 11 53 Right Click on the Component of Interest and Choose Copy Selection After doing so the user can paste the circuit in a variety of places in the tree either as a child in a preexisting component nested component family figures 11 54 and 11 55 or as an independent circuit figure 11 56 Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Required Included Total Circuit Length ft 0 0 600 0 Total Circuit Number o 1 Calculate B D
342. r can be seen in figure 11 66 Page 318 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Pipe and Fitting Manage Pipe Section Name Circuit 02 Pipes Fittings Name Pipe 1 Length ft Extra Length ft Pa Size 1in 25mm gt Type sor11 y Volume gal 1 26 Y Copy Input Values to Return Pipe Fig 11 66 The Pipe Section in the Pipe and Fitting Manager The Pipe and Fitting Manager is divided into two sections In the upper section the user can choose between adjusting Pipes or Fittings properties by clicking on one or the other The lower section has detailed input and options boxes for the selected item pipe or fittings Pipes The pipes section is broken into two identical tabbed panels Pipe 1 and Pipe 2 In the Pipe 1 panel the user can enter the Pipe 1 name length extra length pipe size and pipe type The volume is auto calculated from the pipe geometry and reported as well Beneath the Pipe 1 properties is an option box entitled copy input values to return pipe This option if selected will apply changes made to Pipe 1 to Pipe 2 automatically In most cases designers want to make the same changes to both pipes and this feature saves some time Fittings The fittings section can be seen in figure 11 67 below Page 319 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Pipe Section Name Circuit 02 Pipes Fittings Pipe 1 Fitting
343. r easy comparisons with the layout structure in the CFD module Figure 11 40 is the identical layout in the CFD module Page 295 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section 1 B B E E S BY B GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A U Circuit 01 E 4 GHX Header Section B B U Circuit 02 Fig 11 40 Basic Direct Return Loopfield Layout 1 in Layout Manager Workspace Note that in figure 11 39 the layout consists of a combination of the two components the pipe pair and the GHX Circuit Also note that for both circuits 1 and 2 the fittings for attachment to the return header pipes 1 s and 2 s are longer than those attached to the supply header pipes 1 and 2 There is no requirement that each subcomponent in a particular component has a uniform length Indeed the designer has as much control as he or she desires As introduced before it is important to understand how parallel and serial flow paths are displayed in the Layout Manager Workspace Parallel Flow Paths Page 296 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module gt gt In figure 11 39 a parallel flow path occurs where supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout branches into two components Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB The fluid flows in Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB therefore are in parallel
344. r exhausting the heat source making it a fully renewable source of energy As implemented in GLD the difference between the second model and the first is that with the second model it is possible to calculate the evolution of the borehole wall temperature over time when a constant heat extraction rate Q is extracted from the borehole It makes use of a dimensionless G function concept to model the temperature variations taking into account the ratio of the borehole radius and length and the physical layout of the bore field Bandos et al 2009 recently developed modifications to the G function which were originally implemented in GLD 2010 and also are integrated in GLD 2014 GLD also employs its own internal borehole superposition model allowing users to define the borehole layout in a gridfile or in the new GridBuilder import the gridfile into the program and then automatically determine the required G function Because of increased data entry requirements for the monthly hourly and peak loads data in the second model it is only applicable when used in conjunction with the Average Block Loads module where only one set of monthly loads data is required per installation Use of the Zone Manager is limited to the original cylindrical source theoretical model The other design modules currently do not make specific use of the monthly loads data except in the reduced equivalent hours form Horizontal Design Module Descript
345. r project reports are associated with monthly inlet temperatures and therefore are available only with the borehole module The user selects a preference and then clicks OK The report does not print automatically but instead creates the report preview window in which the report can be reviewed prior to printing Printing can be done by clicking on the printer icon in the upper left hand corner of the report preview window In general project reports contain several main sections Information Calculation Results Input Parameters Loads borehole only when linked to Average Block module Monthly Inlet Temperatures borehole only when linked to Average Block module e Comments Information This section contains the information from the design module s Information panel The project and designer s names dates client s name and address etc appear here This section is included at the top of every report Concise reports only include the project name and start date Calculation Results This section lists the results of the calculations and essentially is the same information shown on the Calculate panel of the design module The most important results such as the total length of pipe required are highlighted and boxed in order to stand out from the background The report presents results of both the heating and the cooling calculations Page 178 CHAPTER 7 Reports Input Parameters This section contains all o
346. r square foot installation cost value If for example a user wishes to have the program perform comparisons involving both natural gas and fuel oil boilers the user must be sure to enter the installation cost data for both types of boilers Please note that the GSA module breaks the conventional system analysis into separate heating and cooling systems analyses If a user wants the program to estimate installation costs for a roof DX gas boiler system the user must first select the unitary air conditioner choose a fuel type and then enter the installation costs associated with the DX system The user must then select a boiler choose the appropriate fuel type and then enter the installation costs associated with the gas boiler This system while slightly more labor intensive for the user provides for the highest degree of analysis flexibility Experienced HVAC engineers also oftentimes have a good rule of thumb estimate for the per square foot per year maintenance costs for a variety of HVAC systems Once again some research has been published comparing commercial geothermal system maintenance costs to those of more standard systems Because younger systems have lower maintenance costs than older systems maintenance costs increase over time Data collected and analyzed in several studies by Bloomquist Cane et al Hughes et al and Dohrmann and Alereza suggest the following range of maintenance costs for geothermal and conventional HVAC syst
347. r system follows the horseshoe approach the length of return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in the reverse return system could be nearly the same as return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in the direct return Page 285 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module system thereby reducing the lower pressure drop benefit associated with direct return systems It all depends on the particular design GHX Module Supply Return Runout A A GHX Header Section Ren GHX Header Section 1 B B q E BY B Cr a B AO 2 C Cc A 3 2 Tu 2 Siu Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Fig 11 30 A Direct Return GHX Module The direct return system in the above figure 11 30 has three flow paths The three flow paths are l Fluid circulates from supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA through Circuit 1 and back through return pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Fluid circulates from supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA to supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB through Circuit 2 and back through return pipe B of GHX Header Section BB and back through return pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Fluid circulates from supply pipe A of GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA to supply pipe B of GHX Header Section BB to supply pipe C of GHX Header Section CC through Circuit 3 and back through return pipe C of GHX Head
348. rage pump was selected for the zone and that pump was given a partial load factor of 1 00 for the dominant cooling side Since the partial load factor the ratio between the peak loads and the total equipment capacity varies depending on designer preference it can have any value of 1 0 or less Additionally the partial load factor will remain constant as the continuous update feature modifies the pump values due to changes in the temperature or the flow rate The partial load factor plays a small role in the heat exchanger length determination calculations Details and Clear The Details and Clear buttons and the Details panel operate in the same way as they do in the Zone Manager Loads module However one difference is that no variation of the load flow rates is permitted in the Details panel Custom Pump Customization Checking the Custom Pump check box allows an override of all automatic pump selection features The user can input any data desired although once again the COP used in the calculations is calculated from the capacity and the power not taken from the text box list A Page 70 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Pump Continuous Update Feature The Update Reselect Current Pumps control is called automatically when changes are made to either the inlet source temperature or the system flow rate from within the Zone Manager the Average Block Loads module or the design modules In this way the designer does
349. re Drop ft hd 0 00 U Circuit 06 Pipe 1 Fitting 1 Pressure Drop ft hd 0 00 E S GHX Header Section 06 Pipe 1 Pressure Drop ft hd 1 3 U Circuit 07 Pipe 2 Fitting 1 Pressure Drop ft hd 0 00 Eh GHX Header Section 07 Pipe 2 Pressure Drop ft hd 3 U Circuit 08 Total Branch Pressure Drop ft hd 2 5 Total Child Pressure Drop ft hd 0 0 Total Local Pressure Drop ft hd 2 5 E Reynold s Number Pipe 1 Reynold s Number 4997 Pipe 2 Reynold s Number 4997 E Velocity Pipe 1 Velocity ft s 0 88 Pipe 2 Velocity ft s 0 88 Volume Fig 11 82 A Sample Property Window Results For An Eight GHX Circuit Reverse Return GHX Module Note that the user can expand and contract the details in the Properties Windows as necessary to optimize his or her interpretive space Also note that total pressure drop for an entire nested component family such as a GHX Module can be seen by clicking on the top parent component GHX Module Supply Return Pipe in fig X and viewing the Total Branch Pressure Drop in the Pressure Drop section of the Properties Window Also note that while the detail available in the Properties Window is unsurpassed it is not the fastest way to review a system For a faster system review designers can use the Layout Manager Workspace results option LAYOUT MANAGER WORKSPACE RESULTS The Layout Manager Workspace in addition to displaying the visual piping design also displays results that are matched t
350. reaching the return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout A In summary a simple way to remember how direct return systems model and visualize flow is as follows the GHX Circuit which looks like a u is like a U Turn that sends the fluid flow back up to the top Design for Purging Page 287 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module When a direct return system is optimized for purging the GHX Header system is composed of a series of reducing header pipe pairs Reducing header pipe pairs maintain the flow velocity ft s necessary to purge air effectively In direct return systems GHX Header pipes reduce identically all the way down on both the supply and return side This can be seen in figure 11 32 which is a sample auto sized GHX Module with eight GHX circuits and reducing headers these figures are part of the CFD Module display controls which are explained in great detail later in this chapter For now they are included for illustrative purposes Note that there are seven GHX Header Sections for 8 GHX circuits which are not displayed Figure 11 32 clearly shows that the supply side Pipe 1 and return side Pipe 2 pipes reduce symmetrically from GHX Header Section 1 all the way down to GHX Header Section 7 2 pipe reduces to 1 1 2 pipe which reduces to 1 1 4 pipe and finally down to 1 pipe on the GHX Header sections Named GroupName Pipe Size bd GHX Module Supply Return Runout GHX Modul
351. recognizes that parallel flow involves three or more component elements a parent and at least two children and two or more flow directions and that series flow involves two component elements a parent and a child for example or in the case of reverse return systems a sibling and a sibling and one flow direction he or she is ready to proceed to the next section CONCEPT FOUR Direct and Reverse Return GHX Headers There are two general types of GHX Modules those with direct return headers figure 11 30 below and those with reverse return headers figure 11 34 below GHX Header design is of critical importance because a poorly designed system will be very difficult if not impossible to purge properly The two GHX header types are explained and compared below in regards to how they are represented in the CFD module Direct Return Systems General Description Direct return GHX Headers generally are easier to design easier to build and can require less total pipe and hence offer a lower total pressure drop compared to reverse return GHX Headers The return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout may be shorter in the direct return case compared to the reverse return case This is easily visualized look at the A return pipe of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in both figures 11 30 and 11 34 return pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout in the direct return case is much shorter Of course if a reverse return GHX Heade
352. required it can be entered directly into the text boxes as needed Note By pressing the Check Pipe Tables button the Pipe Properties tables will open If the user wants to enter an experimentally determined pipe resistance or requires more precise calculations he or she can enter these values directly into the Pipe Resistance text box overriding all pipe resistance calculations The user also selects the U tube configuration and radial pipe placement for the designed installation A single U tube refers to two pipes placed in the bore while a double U tube refers to four pipes placed in the bore The radial pipe placement can be one of the following Close together 1 8 average distance between the pipes Average pipes are centered at a point halfway between the wall and the center of the bore Along outer wall pipes are against the outer wall Illustrations are included to clarify the choices New in GLD2014 is an updated pipe database that includes a wide range of international pipe types denoted with by the letters OD Note The Double U tube configuration at this stage is added more for reference than for practical use Currently the values GLD uses are based on experimental data and a new theoretical model accounting for a lower pipe and convective resistance and a larger displacement of the grout Designers should be aware of this fact and remember that a single U tube is the sta
353. requires a minimum system flow rate of 3 0 gpm ton in the pipes to achieve proper heat transfer Minimum flow rates through the circuit piping also are required to maintain the non laminar flow with different antifreeze solutions Thus there is a limit on the maximum recommended number of parallel circuits required in the system which in turn determines the length of an individual circuit Changing the pipe size requires a change in the minimum required flow rates which can either increase or decrease the maximum recommended number of parallel circuits and their lengths However this also can have substantial effects on the piping head losses which must also be considered in order to reduce the pumping costs To fully optimize a system in the Surface Water Design module the designer thoroughly must understand the relationship between the system flow rate the minimum required flow rates the pipe size the head loss per length of pipe and the preferred number of parallel circuits GLD can conveniently make all the appropriate calculations but the designer must first have a grasp of all of the individual inputs required and the relationships among them Finally the surface water designing process actually involves an additional stage of optimization that is not included with the Borehole Design module The Surface Water module includes a piping calculation component to assist the designer in selecting the best pipe sizes and circuit lengths
354. res for a user defined modeling time period see 4 12 Depending on the modeling time period and the computer resources this calculation may take several seconds to complete For the Monthly Data results the reporting section is separated into five subsections and one Graphing Module Results that are unique to the Monthly Data results compared to the Design Day results are displayed in purple A sample screen for Monthly Data results can be seen in figure 4 20 The two lists on the Results panel are for heating and cooling In fixed length mode both heating and cooling results are printed in bold type so that they stand out The reason is that in fixed length mode performance calculations for both the dominant and non dominant sides are based on the actual designer selected length of the heat exchanger Results for both sides are therefore relevant The first subsection deals with the bores including the total length the borehole number and the borehole length for one bore A common way to adjust the borehole length to a desired value is to change the borehole number or pattern on the Pattern panel The second subsection presents the predicted long term ground temperature change with respect to the average ground temperature of the installation When calculating Monthly Data results the average ground temperature change always will be reported as N A This is because the updated theory in GLD Premier 2014 used for these calculations i
355. ressing the link button from an active loads module will have no effect The link status lights in the corners of the modules indicate when a link has been formed Colors indicate the type of link Link status lights are described in more detail below 3 Unlinking To break a link between modules simply activate click on the design module to be disconnected and click the Unlink button on the toolbar Equivalently the user can choose Unlink from the GLD Loads menu The link will be broken and all related loads information for the design module will be cleared However the information still exists in the loads module and can be recovered by linking again if necessary If only one design module is linked to a particular loads module unlinking from the loads module is also possible If more than one linked design window is open however clicking the unlink button from a loads module will have no effect since GLD cannot determine which project should be disconnected The link status lights in the corners of the modules indicate when links are broken Link status lights are described in more detail below Page 72 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones G41 Studio Link Status Lights Studio Link status lights are used to indicate when links are made when data transfer occurs and when links are broken They are located in the lower left hand corner of the design modules and the lower right hand corner of the loads modules
356. rference from other pipes in the same and in adjacent trenches Parker Bose and McQuiston 1985 Page 30 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview The current Horizontal Module effectively employs a combination of the cylindrical model of Carslaw and Jaeger and the multiple pipe methodology of Parker et al Additionally as in the Borehole Module the equations also include modifications suggested by Kavanaugh and Deerman that adjust the methods of Ingersoll to account for physical arrangement and hourly heat variations Kavanaugh and Deerman 1991 However time step based rates of rejection and extraction also previously were discussed in some depth by Parker et al The two Slinky options available on the Configuration panel partially are based on the above formalism Because of the complexity of the solution to the heat transfer equation for coiled loops of pipe the design procedure used for the Slinky options is actually only a theoretical approximation This approximation is recommended in Closed loop Geothermal Systems Slinky Installation Guide and is based on a specific set of tests conducted on 36 diameter Slinky coils Jones 1995 In the approximation the program first calculates the total trench length required for a single U Tube buried at the specified trench depth It then divides the calculated length by 250 ft and multiplies the result by a factor determined from both the run fraction and the Slinky pitch
357. rformance is significantly more advanced Found on the Results tabs of the horizontal design module as can be seen in figure 5 18 below Option al Hyb te Cooling Heating Update ea H 0 jJ o0 Reset Fig 5 18 LoadSplitter Controls in the Horizontal Module There are two sliders Peak and Total for cooling and two sliders for heating Two sliders are necessary because the loads data for horizontal systems are not detailed enough for the program to automatically understand the relationship between the peak and total loads As a result the user must manually specify both peak and total load shavings Note that to protect the designer from an overly aggressive design the maximum total load shaving percentage cannot be greater than the peak load shaving percentage For example if the designer specifies a 20 cooling peak load shaving then the designer will be limited to choosing a total load shaving that is between 0 20 This limitation is based off of feedback from experienced design engineers that have characterized the general relationship between peak and total loads over many designs and over many years Page 154 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Note that when using a Monthly loads profile the total loads slider affects only the months in which the peaks have been shaved For example if a 10 peak load shave affects only the months of July and August then only the total loads in July and August will be impacted
358. rnace X Envision Large Vertical v DDE s General Cooling Heating Load Temperatures Load Flows Test Pump Details Pump Model NLVO80 Pump Type Water to Air Water to Water Manufacturer s Recommendations Flow Rate Pressure Drop gpm ft hd Recommended 0 0 0 0 Minimum 0 0 0 0 Fig 2 2 Pump Edit Pane Pump Series Controls The Pump Series control buttons shown in figure 2 3 are found above the list and the pump data panels They include the Pump Edit controls New Copy Remove Reorder and Clear the pump Save control the Edit Pump Information control and the Delete Series control Page 42 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps ARA Fig 2 3 Pump Series Controls DOE Pump Edit Controls The Pump Edit Control buttons are designed to work directly with the pump list New pumps are added by pressing the New button Copies of existing pumps are added with the Copy button Remove is used to remove a pump from the list Reorder is pressed to reorganize the list both alphabetically and numerically Clear is used to delete all pumps from the current list Be careful not to accidentally delete pumps lal Save Control The Save control button can be used at any time to save the current pump information Edit Pump Information Control The Edit Pump Information control button allows the user to edit both the series and the manufacturer information for a given pump Note however that i
359. rovide an accurate model for the equipment for any given design parameters By including additional data from different source flow rates and or different inlet load temperatures and flow rates higher levels of accuracy are possible The heat pump module can store recommended and minimum flow rate and pressure drop information for each heat pump as well The Edit Add Heat Pumps module is covered in detail in Chapter 2 Page 23 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview Zones Loads Modules GLD employs two different types of load input schemes With the Zone Manager Loads module users can perform a detailed analysis With the Average Block Loads module users can make quick estimates without performing detailed component design work In Premier Financial 2014 Edition users can optionally add monthly and or hourly loads data to the Average Block Loads and then calculate month by month and or hour by hour inlet temperatures in a Borehole Design module These stand alone modules are linked to design modules using the Studio Link system Chapter 3 Both modules can import loads data from commercial loads programs and Excel files Zone Manager Loads Module Component style designs often are more appropriate for geothermal installations particularly when equipment is available in various sizes The units can be placed near or within the locations to be conditioned With regard to water source heat pumps it is often much easier to bring water l
360. rs If exact values are not available an estimate should be made with regard to the expected running time of the unit in each particular zone Estimates of time must be reduced of course from actual running time since the annual equivalent full load hours represents the running time if the system were operating continuously at full load which is not generally the case Equivalent Hours Calculator To aid in this calculation GLD includes the Equivalent Hours Calculator found in the Tools menu or obtainable directly by clicking the Calculate Hours button Figure 3 5 shows a view of the Equivalent Hours Calculator Equivalent Hours Cala 5 xj p Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours Peak Hourly Load MBtu hr Monthly Total Loads MBtu 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Le January February March April May June July August September October November December Full Load Hours Close Fig 3 5 Equivalent Hours Calculator Remember that although the vertical bore length calculation results are not extremely dependent on the running hours within one zone for multi zone designs the total number of running hours across the zones can certainly affect the required bore length The user should attempt to enter the running hours as accurately as possible Equivalent hours are unnecessary for a surface water design
361. rs can create piping systems using a variety of wizards and tools On an integrated basis users can build a design in CFD based off of a designed heat exchanger system As with the other modules in Ground Loop Design it is important to remember that the calculated results are only as good as the quality of the user defined Page 242 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module inputs Assuming that reasonable values are provided to the software the software will provide reasonable results Nomenclature Within the global geothermal industry standard nomenclature is sorely lacking After having polled and interviewed several dozen active designers we are adopting the following nomenclature for use in this manual and the software GHX Manifold Vault GHX Module From Building map E gt To Building l GHX Header GHX Circuits GHX Refers to a ground heat exchanger and may include vertical horizontal trenching horizontal boring pond or lake heat exchanger buried in the ground or submerged in a body of water GHX Circuits HDPE pipe buried in the ground in horizontal or vertical orientation designed to transfer energy to and from the ground Typically a number of GHX Circuits are fusion welded to a GHX Header that is in turn fusion welded to a Supply Return Runout Heat transfer fluid is circulated through the assembly to a building U Tube An assembly of two lengths of HDPE pipe connected on one end with a molde
362. rs of the day GLD performs the monthly partial load and the full load hours calculations automatically when it imports a file containing only monthly and peak loads data However if the designer knows more specific details about the installation in question he or she may want to place those loads more precisely in the actual in use periods of the day and consider also the daily occupation of the installation i e not in use on weekends etc However as long as the peak demand and partial monthly load factor remain the same the calculated length will also remain the same no matter what the representation since the daily and monthly pulses remain unchanged Review of Design Day Loads Entry in GLD The loads input methodology in GLD is not as complicated as it first may appear to be This system has been chosen for two main reasons First the advanced mathematical model the program employs allows the loads to be broken into hourly pulses throughout the day of peak demand the Design Day which should provide a better overall accuracy in the calculations Second GLD uses full load equivalent hours to reduce the total amount of data entry GLD also accepts monthly total and peak loads as well as hourly loads in the average block loads module These data are only necessary for monthly and hourly inlet temperature calculations in the borehole design module The mathematical model the program employs for these calculations requires the mor
363. rtaining to diffusivity estimate calculations can be found in the Diffusivity panel as seen in figure 10 2 below Users can enter estimates of soil specific heat density and moisture content By pressing the Check Soil Tables button users can quickly access reference files that may contain some of these data After the user calculates the thermal conductivity on the Results tab the program automatically estimates the diffusivity based on the calculated conductivity and user input soil values The estimated diffusivity is displayed on this panel and the Results panel If the user wishes to manually enter an estimated diffusivity the user can unselect the automatic estimator mode check box and then manually enter a diffusivity value Page 231 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Thermal Conduct ivity Calculation Project lt a Project File None guja 9 Import Data File American_Swedish_Institute_ 2 csv Y Automatic Estimator Mode Thermal Diffusivity ft 2 day Thermal Conductivity 0 97 Btu h ft F Soil Rock Specific Heat Dry 0 200 Btu F lbm Soil Rock Density Dry 100 0 Ib ft 3 Moisture 0 20 8 Check Soil Tables Fig 10 2 Diffusivity Panel Contents Flow Information pertaining to a particular conductivity test unit s flow pressure coefficients can be selected viewed and calculated in this tab See figure 10 3 below Some conductivity test units have the capacity to collect pressure dr
364. s ii ARE 38 Capacity and POWET ceceni ioie Peotavoenv Baoan ecastek eee 38 BlOWiR ates sires sse OO 38 Load Side ColTE CH iii 39 Entering Data into the Add Edit Heat Pumps Module oooooccciccnocononononcnonononono nono nonn ron nonnonnonnnrnnnnns 40 Creating a New Series and or Manufacturer cccccccssccsseesseeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeseennees 40 Editing P mp Data acres excess cxccedesd anes set eat aeets tii bs 41 Pump Series Controls accord cla da tie Bers waged 41 Pump Edit Controls isc cascades e ee has asks 42 Save Controlado apelada a ati lh eat 42 Edit Pump Information Control ceceecceseeseceeeeeecseeeeeeneeneeeeeees 42 Delete Series Control ici 42 General Informatioi cio cial whieh dias E lid Haat 43 Capacity Power and Flow Rates ccccesccesscsecsceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereneeneenaees 43 Load Side Corrections icicle eit A SRE AES Gas 44 Load Temperatures Panel cccecceescsesceseceeeeesecesecseecseeeseeeneeneeesreees 44 Load Flows Patiel 2204 200 Ss idas 45 Pesting InputsD A E O 46 Exiting the Edit Add Heat Pumps Module oooooonconoccnoccoocconcconcnonconoconocnnconnnon nono nonnnonn ron n rra nrnnn narran 47 Heat Pump File Descriptions li desidia 47 Page 3 PREFACE Contents Adding Pump Sets Obtained From External Sources ccccccseseesseesceeeceeeeeeecnseceseensecsaeeneeeaeeenes 48 Other RESOUS est d ae at eee hae Oh od dd Le eee tha a a 49 CH
365. s for subsequent use in programs such as Excel Split loads profiles also automatically can be imported into the GSA module for more accurate geo hybrid lifecycle cost analyses New Hybrid Loads Graphs In conjunction with the Hybrid Load Splitter Toolset users can specify and graph a range of geothermal and hybrid loads profile data Advanced Fluids Database Addition to the CFD Module The CFD module now offers a range of fluid performance curves that provide viscosities densities and the like for a range of freeze protection levels and expected minimum operating temperatures This database significantly enhances Reynolds number calculations European International Pipe Database Addition GLD now includes integrated support for European Nominal Diameter pipes ranging in diameter from 10mm to 600mm The Design Studio The studio is the desktop work area in which the designer conducts his or her project analyses and establishes the basis for designs When additional projects are desired new windows may be opened or existing projects may be loaded The Loads modules hold and display the information for the particular installation Other windows may be opened concurrently For example one window may be used to edit or to modify heat pump data another to calculate equivalent full load hours and still others to provide easily accessible graphs or charts that may be required repeatedly through the course of a design Similar design plans can be
366. s not directly amenable to such soil temperature calculations Designers that need to estimate the soil temperature change can do so using the Design Day calculation described above Page 115 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module F Borehole Design Project BoreholeSample E 16020 0 16020 0 Borehole Number 60 60 Borehole Length ft 267 0 267 0 Ground Temperature Change F N A N A Peak Unit Inlet F 82 4 54 5 Peak Unit Outlet F 91 4 48 2 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 755 9 810 7 Peak Load kBtu Hr 755 9 810 7 Peak Demand kW 50 1 56 1 Heat Pump EER COP 15 0 4 2 Seasonal Heat Pump EER COP 18 0 4 6 Avg Annual Power kWh 2 66E 4 2 38E 4 System Flow Rate gpm 189 0 202 7 Optional Hybrid System Off Cooling Heating 0 jJ 0 70 6c RAA ES E 3 A E H 0 J 0 Fig 4 20 Results Panel Contents Fixed Length Monthly Data Results Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 16020 0 16020 0 Peak Unit Inlet F 82 4 54 5 Borehole Length ft 267 0 267 0 Peak Unit Outlet F 91 4 48 2 Fig 4 21 Monthly Data Results in Expanded User Interface The third subsection of the report lists the heat pump inlet and outlet temperatures of the circulating fluid Note that in GLD Premier 2014 these purple numbers are absolute peak temperatures and not average peak temperatures In previous versions of GLD reported results for inlet and outlet t
367. s of all possible antifreeze combinations However because these variations are difficult to predict for specific projects only partial information has been included For the most accurate designs designers are encouraged to seek out their own favorite antifreeze combinations and determine the specific heat density and minimum required flow rate for non laminar flow Page 184 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files Soil Properties Soil properties refer to any data related to the soil The four reference files are listed below Table 1 Thermal Conductivity and Diffusivity of Sand and Clay Soils Table 2 Thermal Properties of Rocks at 77 F Table 3 Earth Temperatures Soil Swing and Phase Constants for U S Cities Table 4 Earth Temperatures Soil Swing and Phase Constants for Canadian Cities The first two Soil Properties tables included with GLD provide various soil parameters including ranges for thermal conductivity k and thermal diffusivity a for various types of soils These tables should not be considered accurate for a given location however they should provide the designer with a realistic range within which their own measurement results should fall The third and fourth tables contain mean earth temperatures and other parameters for U S and Canadian cities These tables particularly may be useful for horizontal designs Pipe Properties Pipe properties refer to any data related to the piping The Pipe Pr
368. s the user desires to build Next the uses chooses from several general shapes including a rectangular grid a hollow square and a circle and offset Offset is useful when a designer wishes to auto build more than one shape in a single borefield For example the user may wish to build an 8 x 4 grid and then build a second 8 x4 grid but offset perhaps 100 ft to the right of the first sets of boreholes The Offset button enables the user to do so After selecting a general shape more customization options become available These options vary depending on the shape selected Based on the shape selected the user can then specify details pertaining to the shape number of columns number of rows pitch radius of circle etc After the user is satisfied with the design the user can push the Build Add button The borefield appears in the viewing pane on the right In addition the user can see the details for each borehole in the coordinate list Note that the user can manually delete individual boreholes from an auto built system using the coordinate list Sometimes the fastest way to build a specific system is to auto build a loopfield and then manually delete any unnecessary boreholes Figure 4 14 below is an example of an advanced auto built system spread across two borehole groups Coordinate List 9 El Point X ft Plot of Grid Points 2 15 00 y 15 00 Group 2 Auto Build Options B
369. s to determine which time of day has the highest loading requirements prior to performing its calculations If only cooling or only heating loads data are to be used all of the non used slots should remain as zeroes Only the side with the loads provided will be calculated Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours The hours entered into the lower section of figure 3 4 are determined from detailed annual loads data for the system being designed They represent the annual number of hours the system will be running if operating at full load and are a measure of the system running time This system is used both to limit the amount of data the user must enter and to simplify the calculations It is identical to methods that require input of all the monthly data but more concise since it represents the total energy input to the ground in terms of the peak load Month to month variations are not necessary in the annual monthly daily pulse model used in GLD For example if a loading report provides the number of BTUs required by this zone each month the hours per month will be obtained by dividing the monthly Btu requirement by the peak Btu h value The resulting number will be the monthly equivalent full load hours To get the annual full load hours the value will need to be obtained for every month that required Page 57 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones heating or cooling and then combined to finally get the annual equivalent heating or cooling hou
370. s uses information from the Zone Manager loads module This includes the chosen inlet source temperature the flow rate the heat pump series and the initial inlet load temperatures The flows and load temperatures can be entered at the bottom of the module and the active heat pump series and load temperatures may be changed on the Heat Pumps tabbed panel Manual Select If an automatically selected heat pump is for any reason undesirable or a different pump series from the same manufacturer or even from a different manufacturer is required the Select button may be used This button allows the designer to choose any of the stored pumps As with the Auto Select button all of the associated fields are calculated automatically once the pump is selected When the Select button is pressed the selection panel appears as shown in figure 3 7 After a pump is chosen pressing Select Pump will place the pump in the zone and automatically calculate all of the associated parameters Cancel will return the user to the main display without changing any pumps Page 60 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Note Unlike with Auto Select a pump that is manually selected may or may not match the loads in the zone It is the responsibility of the designer to make sure the pumps match the zones Heat Pump Specifications at Design Temperature and Flow Rate Florida Heat Pump y WP Series Water to Water gt Pump Name WPO36 y Select Pump ma cae
371. s will be actively displayed Also note that a user has to build a piping system before piping system results can be seen Notice in figure 11 18a which options are selected from the Display button Pipe Pair Circuit Pipe 1 Length and Reynold s Number Next notice that lengths and Reynold s Numbers for the supply side pipe Pipe 1 for both the Pipe Pairs and Circuits are displayed in figure 11 18b Multi Select Review Pipe Paw Circuit Pipe 1 Pipe 2 Size Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop Total Branch Pressure Drop Group Name Fig 11 18a Selected Results for Display Page 269 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bl El GHX Module Supply Return Runout 200 0 ft 4461 U Circuit 01 300 0 ft 4034 GHX Header Section 01 20 0 ft 2228 U Circuit 02 300 0 ft 4024 Fig 11 18b Sample of Displayed Results In purge mode a third button becomes visible as seen below 4 81 This third button provides ready access to automated controls such as auto adjusting the purging flow rate and auto sizing the headering system These features are described in more detail below a Section Two The Layout Manager Workspace The left side section of the Layout panel is the Layout Manager Workspace as can be seen in figure 11 16 The Layout Manager Workspace is the area
372. s will overwrite all currently selected pumps including custom pumps Page 62 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Sl Update Reselect Current Pumps The Update Reselect Current Pumps control reselects the pumps in all zones after determining the current series used in each particular zone For example if most of the pumps belonged to the same water to air series but one was a water to water pump this control would determine the difference and update the pumps accordingly Note Custom pumps are not affected when the Update Reselect Current Pumps control is activated Working Series Selection in the Heat Pumps Tabbed Panel Figure 3 9 Shows the Zone Manager opened to the Heat Pump tabbed panel This panel is used to specify the working series for all of the automatic selection features described for the Loads tabbed panel In the Heat Pump tabbed panel the user simply selects the pump series that he or she intends to use for the matching session The selection may be changed at any time without affecting previously automatically selected units However if the Auto Select All Pumps button on the Loads panel is pressed every zone will be replaced with the current working series Additionally in this panel the user may define an inlet load temperature to be used in any automatic selection Choosing the Active Series The active heat pump series is the series of heat pumps used by the Auto Select features in the Loads panel Page 63
373. seen in figure 11 16 b Piping Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization _ dX Design Layout Design and Optimization _ dX Optimization Calculate A B El Purge o Alphabetic Categorized Fig 11 16 Layout Panel Contents In Purge Mode The Layout panel is broken into five primary sections including the Calculate and Results Display Buttons the Layout Manager Workspace the big white space on the left the Flow Type Drop Down Menu the Properties Window on the right and the Circuit Confirmation Calculator invisible in figure 11 16 Section One Calculate and Results Display Buttons At the top are the Calculate and two or three types of results display buttons as can be seen below Page 265 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Calculate El Three Buttons in Peak Load and Equipment Flow Rate Modes Calculate Al El Four Buttons in Purge Flow Rate Mode After the user has created or modified a design he or she can hit the Calculate button to see the updated fluid dynamics results The other results display buttons fulfill a special role in the Layout panel The CFD module produces a large range of results At certain times in the design process one subset of results may be applicable At another stage in the design process a different subset of results may be applicable At the end of the design process the designer may wish
374. ser if he or she wants to save the project Page 229 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Importing Conductivity Data The Thermal Conductivity module can import CSV comma separated value files generated by thermal conductivity test unit data loggers The new version of the Thermal Conductivity module provides a robust CSV file reading capability If the module has trouble reading in a data set it will provide the user with guidance and instructions At present time the module is designed to read in CSV files that follow the format output by the GeoCube a test unit manufactured by Precision Geothermal LLC If a user wishes to import CSV files from another test unit the user should make sure that the column format matches that of the GeoCube test unit The basic format is as follows Format for Geocube Units with Flow Sensors Plot Title Sample TC Test Geothermal Town USA _ Date Time GMT 06 00 Voltage VAC 1 6 2010 10 55 235 233 0 8822 54169 55 168 46 12 64 1 6 2010 10 57 235 374 0 908 54 43 54 734 12 64 Format for Geocube Units with Pressure Transducers Plot Title Sample TC Test Geothermal Lou CA E ES A A NS Time GMT 06 00 Voltage VAC Pressure PSIG Pressure PSIGQ Batt v PSIG 1 317 2009 16 02 211 526 en 59 e 59 E ooo 12404 121 3 17 2009 16 04 211 386 0 9525 59572 59529 0 092 12 227 a Note that some conductivity units do not provide this much data for e
375. sign systems is a complex and in some cases monumental challenge As a result most loopfield designers understand a few basic systems that work and then use them over and over again It is very difficult to experiment on paper with a variety of systems because the calculations are onerous Furthermore reverse return calculations are impossible to perform by hand or calculator and therefore flow rate velocity and Reynold s Number predictions are just that predictions The GHX Header Design Optimizer solves all of these problems Note that while this tool is called the GHX Header Design Optimizer it also has the capacity of optimizing the design of Manifolds Vaults etc and does so automatically To use the GHX Header Design Optimizer the designer must first return to the Fluid Panel and select the Auto Adjust and Auto Size check boxes As was seen previously the Auto Adjust check box option enables the CFD module to automatically adjust the purging flow rate to ensure the user defined minimum purging target velocity through the GHX Circuits The Auto Size check box takes this a step further The Auto Size check box automatically redesigns the Supply return headering system by changing pipe diameters as necessary to ensure that the flow rates stay within the user defined minimum and maximum flow target velocities At the same time the program is analyzing the pipe diameters it is analyzing the flow rate as well to ensure an optima
376. simplification average peak loads for the design day or the day of heaviest usage in the year for both cooling heat gains and heating heat losses modes of operation can be input for up to four separate times of the day These include morning 8 a m to 12 noon afternoon 12 noon to 4 p m evening 4 p m to 8 p m and night 8 p m to 8 a m This method of input not only provides the total load but also identifies when the equipment will be in use for the heat exchanger calculations Page 56 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Design Day Loads Design Day Loads Days Occupied Time of Day Heat Gains Heat Losses per Week MBtu Hr MBtu Hr 5 0 8a m Noon 46 0 38 0 os Noon 4p m 36 0 20 0 transfer 4p m 8 p m 21 0 10 0 Calculate Hours 8p m 8a m 0 0 12 0 Annual Equivalent Full Load Hours 1050 220 Fig 3 4 Sample Loads Input Data If only one peak value during the day is provided to the designer it can be entered into one or several of the time slots depending on how the loads will be expected to change during the course of a day Slightly reduced values can be added for off peak hours if the building still will be in operation but not at full load Insignificant time slots can be left at zero Note If only one peak load value is provided per zone the designer will need to be consistent in placing it in the same time slot for every zone This is because the software loops through all of the zone
377. simply opening up the original file into a text editor or HTML editor making changes and then saving the file again For example if a user wishes to add a new pipe table to the list he or she first will create the table i e Pipe Table4 html and then will add a link to it on the PipeTables html file Additionally if the user wishes to add additional information to an existing table or figure he or she only has to open the appropriate HTML file in a text editor or HTML editor and make and save the desired changes For example if adding a new link PipeTables4 html to the PipeTables html file one might add this new link with the name Table 4 New Pipe Table by typing the new link at the end of the PipeTables html file into a text editor as follows the added section is in bold type lt li gt lt a href PipeTable3 html gt Table 3 Required Flow Rates to Achieve 2ft s SDR 11 Pipe lt a gt lt li gt lt ul gt lt li gt lt a href PipeTable4 html gt Table 4 New Pipe Table lt a gt lt li gt lt ul gt lt body gt lt html gt Page 187 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files PipeTables html edited version Making a Table A new table can be made at any time by creating one as an HTML file The easiest way to do this is to use an HTML editor It is much more difficult to make a table using plain HTML in a text editor Although any name is valid for a table tables can be added
378. software the software will provide a reasonable result General Features The Surface Water Design module in GLD also includes a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables in a straightforward and efficient manner For example parameters related to the body of water are listed on the Surface Water panel while piping choices are listed on the Piping panel Everything related to a project is presented simultaneously and easily is accessible throughout the design process In the expanded user interface mode which can be expanded by double clicking on any of the tabs the most Page 160 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module commonly modified parameters as well as calculation results are always visible as seen below in figure 6 1 E Surface Water Design Project SurfaceWaterSample Lengths Temperatures COOLING HEATING COOLING HEATING Total Length Ft 4087 2 8187 8 Unit Inlet F 55 0 36 0 Circuit Length Ft 371 6 545 9 Unit Outlet F 64 2 30 1 Results Fluid Soil Piping l Surface water Extra kW Information Calculate Circuit Circuit Parameters C Fixed Temperature Circuit Pipe Size 1in 25mm Inlet Temperatures 55 0 oF 36 0 oF Number of Parallel Circuits Cooling 11 Heating 15 Number of Parallel Circuits Circuit Style pa 15 C Coil Slinky Circuit Style Primar C col Slinky t Cooling 0 9 fthd Heating 15 fthd
379. summary panel like the one in figure 5 24 B gt Hybrid Summary Borehole Design Project 1 COOLING HEATING Peak Loads Total kBtu hr 100 0 kBtu hr 100 0 Geo kBtu hr 60 0 kBtu hr 85 0 Hybrid kBtu hr 40 0 kBtu hr 15 0 Total Loads Total 478544 0 100 0 370781 9 kBtu 100 0 Geo 438928 6 91 7 369713 5 kBtu 99 7 Hybrid 39615 4 8 3 1068 4 kBtu 0 3 od coe Fig 5 24 The Hybrid LoadSplitter Summary Button The summary panel presents the peak and total loads breakdown for geothermal and hybrid technologies for both heating and cooling In addition from this panel the designer can access the hybrid loads graphs via the graph icon next to the Close button The summary button displays the quantified total loads balance between the geo and hybrid technologies As mentioned earlier the total loads balance is a critical variable for hybrid loopfield design In figure 5 24 above 91 7 of the total cooling load is geo and 8 3 is hybrid Page 158 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module Printing Reports Reports of the active project can be printed at any time from the Design Studio using the toolbar print button or from the File menu gt Print The information printed includes all of the input parameters from the design module along with the associated results The zone and loads information is not included with the report and must be printed separately from the Loads panel The filename of
380. supply and return header piping reductions to ensure that user defined purging flow rates are maintained throughout any piping design They also make it very easy to have a flow balanced system After the CFD module has auto sized the system excluding the fittings the user can look at a variety of fluid dynamics characteristics for each and every part of the design These characteristics include pipe length pipe size flow rate velocity fluid volume Reynolds number and pressure drop among others If the user needs to make a minor or major modification to the auto calculated system such as manually changing the diameter of a particular pipe section he or she is able to do so easily and then view the impact of the change on the overall system Below are two more representative examples of how the CFD module can be used If a user wishes to see what happens to the overall pressure drop in a GHX Module and the Reynolds number in a single GHX Circuit if he or she switches from 20 to 10 propylene glycol he or she can do so easily If a designer has a system that is unbalanced in design for example a Vault with five 10 circuit ground heat exchanger modules and one 6 circuit ground heat exchanger module the CFD module can help determine the piping arrangements that provide the most balanced flow The CFD module either can be used on a standalone basis or in conjunction with a heat exchanger system designed in GLD On a standalone basis use
381. t 05 E 25 GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 26 GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 E S GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 98 A Circulation Pump Has Been Added After adding a circulation pump details regarding the circulation pump including flow rate and pressure drop are added automatically to a new circulation pump record in the Circulation Pumps panel see figure 11 99 below Notice how the linked component name the name of the component that has the circulation pump appears as well as the associated pressure drop and flow rate It is important that in the Layout Manager Workspace the designer has selected the flow type of interest peak equipment or purge prior to viewing the circulation pump details in the Circulation Pumps panel If a designer wishes to have a circulation pump sized for the equipment flow but has selected peak flow the displayed pump details will be for peak flow and not equipment flow Page 350 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Circulation Pump Information Total Circulation Pump Power kW 0 0 Total Number of Circulation Pumps 1 DOG E Pump Name Pump 1 Linked Element GHX Module Runout Required Pressure Drop ft hd 6 Required Flow Rate gpm Required Input Power kW Pump Power hP Pump Motor Efficiency Fig 11 99 Details of the Added Circulation Pump In this version of GLD the user may add the
382. t buttons to bring up tables and calculators A Calculate button used to refresh the calculations Hybrid systems Opening Projects There are two ways to open Horizontal Design projects One is by using the New Horizontal command from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar and the other is by opening an existing Horizontal Design project gld file Files cannot be opened if other modules with the same name Page 133 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module are already open As many files can be opened as the system s memory permits W New Projects New projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing New Horizontal from either the Design Studio File menu or the toolbar New projects open with standard parameter values that must be edited for new projects In new projects no loads files zon are loaded The user must create a new loads file or open an existing loads file into one of the loads modules Links may be established using the Studio Link system described in Chapter 3 gt Existing Projects Existing projects may be opened at any time from the Design Studio by choosing Open from the Design Studio File menu or toolbar The file automatically opens into a new Horizontal Design Project module If a loads file zon is associated with the loaded project the loads file automatically will be loaded into the appropriate loads module and opened along with the project fi
383. t the design It Page 338 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module is also very useful for understanding the details of reverse return system performance notice the flow rate and Reynold s Number symmetry Group Name Pipe Pair Circuit Pipel Pipe 2 Size Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop Fig 11 86 A Different Set of Desired Results Has Been Selected Layout Design and Optimization Calculate Bal GHX Module Supply Return Pipe U Circuit 01 0 90 ft s 5091 2 GHX Header Section 01 U Circuit 02 0 89 ft s 5044 26 GHX Header Section 02 U Circuit 03 0 88 ft s 5013 2G GHX Header Section 03 U Circuit 04 0 88 ft s 4997 2G GHX Header Section 04 U Circuit 05 0 88 ft s 4997 2G GHX Header Section 05 U Circuit 06 0 88 ft s 5013 2G GHX Header Section 06 U Circuit 07 0 89 ft s 5044 22 GHX Header Section 07 U Circuit 08 0 90 ft s 5091 Fig 11 87 The New Set of Selected Results Are Now Visible While looking at the results in the Layout Manager Workspace offers many benefits in some cases it is easier to look at results in a non nested Page 339 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module format If such results are desired the user can select the Review Panel Results REVIEW PANEL RESU
384. tain reports of the information in separate as well as combined documents For example at one time a designer may want to quickly see all of the zones with their loads and corresponding equipment At other times the designer may only need to see a list of the equipment for each zone GLD offers five different zone report options including A concise zone report A detailed zone report An equipment list report A loads report A zone names report Lifecycle Cost and CO Reports A print button in the GSA module allows the designer to print the finance related information in various formats GLD offers four different GSA finance report options including A concise finance report A detailed finance report A concise inputs report A detailed inputs report A financial analysis report Thermal Conductivity Reports A print button in the thermal conductivity module allows the designer to print out a detailed professional report The designer can also print out large color graphs to include in the report Computational Fluid Dynamics Reports An export button in the CFD module allows the designer to export user specified design details into a text file for further processing in a spreadsheet program Reports are described in detail in Chapter 7 Page 35 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview Data Reference Files To access the data reference files the user must have an internet browser present in the GLD e
385. tangular and non equidistant borefield systems users have the option of creating a visual borefield layout using the GridBuilder The GridBuilder can be accessed via the GridBuilder button on the Pattern tab or via the Tools dropdown menu The GridBuilder has a set of control buttons at the top and is broken into three sections the coordinate list the auto build options and the viewing pane on the right as can be seen below in figure 4 8 T Grid Builder ajo s 93 amp Close Coordinate List A a o _ 2 El X 0 00 Y 0 00 Group 1 Auto Build Options None Fig 4 8 Overview of the GridBuilder The control buttons at the top of the GridBuilder include the following Fig 4 9 GridBuilder Controls The buttons on the left are the Open and Save buttons for opening existing and saving gridfiles along with the Print button for printing the gridfiles The last button on the right is the Export Grid button which is explained towards the end of this section Note that gridfiles are saved to and opened from the following folder Page 95 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Gaia Geothermal GLD2014 GridFiles The first section in the GridBuilder is the coordinate list section as can be seen below in figure 4 10 Coordinate List e El Fig 4 10 Coordinate List In the coordinate list there are four control buttons as can be seen below in figure 4 11
386. tem Reported values include energy costs CO emissions costs water costs maintenance costs and mechanical room lease costs as well as annual total variable costs This sub panel can be seen in figure 9 13 below LifeCycle Annual Analysis Geothermal Air cooled Chiller Variable Costs Boiler Energy 3 846 18 5 679 91 CO2 Emissions 1 398 61 2 206 58 Water 0 00 0 00 Maintenance 4 000 00 8 000 00 Mechanical Room Lease 2 700 00 5 400 00 Annual Total 11 944 79 21 286 49 Fig 9 13 Annual Costs Sub Panel Page 223 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Analysis Sub Panel The Analysis sub panel both summarizes the cost and CO emissions savings in tons as well as provides simple payback IRR internal rate of return and RHI renewable heat incentive analyses Note that depending on the details of a simulation the IRR calculation may not be possible This is the IRR requires a specific and limited set of conditions which are not always present in GSA module simulations In such a case a N A value will be displayed The Analysis sub panel can be seen in figure 9 13 below Analysis LifeCycle Di Annual Air cooled Chiller Geothermal Boiler Financial Metrics Annual Total Savings NPV Total Savings 16 years NPV Total Savings Total CO2 Reduction 16 years Simple Payback IRR Annual RHI NPV Total RHI 9 341 70 395 599 17 8 08 tons 88 61
387. tems In particular data collected and analyzed by Bloomquist suggest the following for vertical closed loop commercial systems 100 m 9 3 ft 135 m 12 5 ft 36 m 3 3 ft Bloomquist further suggests that horizontal closed loop systems have installation costs that are less than 50 of the cost of vertical closed loop systems Below is a table adapted from Bloomquist that indicates average installation capital costs for more standard HVAC systems HVAC System Type Installation Capital Costs Rooftop DX with electric heating 52 m 4 8 14 Rooftop DX with gas heating 61 m 85 7 ft Air source heat pump 74 m 6 9 fi Rooftop variable air volume VAV 86 m 8 0 ft Water source heat pump with gas 133 m 12 4 ft boiler cooling tower Central VAV with chiller cooling tower 162 m 15 0 and gas perimeter heat Four pipe fan coil unit with electric chiller 171 m 15 9 ft and gas_ boiler The above data are included in this manual as a convenience and general reference for Ground Loop Design software users It is of course the Page 203 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module responsibility of the designer to determine the exact installation cost parameters for use in the GSA module After having selected a system type and an appropriate fuel type for the system the user can then enter the pe
388. tems Once the user selects one of these options the user can then enter the appropriate subsurface installation costs For the vertical systems the costs typically are delineated in terms of cost per foot of vertical bore In other words if a system requires 20 000 feet of bore how much will it cost to drill and install pipe in each foot of bore including drilling costs piping grouting headering pressure testing flushing etc In the North American markets this cost likely will be in the 12 to 27 per foot of bore range If the user prefers to use costs per foot of pipe installed rather than cost per foot of bore the user may do so as well note that pond or surface water systems typically are delineated in terms of cost per foot of pipe For horizontal systems the costs typically are delineated in terms of the square footage of the land area required for the horizontal loopfield For example a horizontal system that covers 200 x 300 of ground is a 60 000 ft system The cost per square foot of land in terms of trenching Page 201 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module excavating piping purging flushing etc can be entered This system has been chosen for its flexibility 1t works will all types of piping systems Note that horizontal bore systems probably are better served using the cost per ft formalism as described above for the vertical systems In the North American markets this cost likely will be in the
389. ter and thermal diffusivity Thermal Conductivity Calculation Project Project File None as 9 Import Data File None Results Bore Flow Diffusivity Information Borehole Length 250 0 ft gt 58 0 F Borehole Diameter 5 00 in MV Automatic Estimator Mode Undisturbed Ground Temperature Details Reference Only Pipe Size MNR y Grout Thermal Conductivity 1 00 Btu h ft F Drilling Method Standard Drilling Time 5 0 hr Fig 10 4 Bore Panel Contents Results All of the results for the conductivity analysis can be viewed at any time on the Results panel and in the Graphing Module After all data have been entered or any changes have been made the user can calculate interim or final results using the Calculate button Each time the user hits the Calculate button the graphs will be automatically updated A sample screen for this panel and the Graphing Module can be seen in figures 10 5 and 10 6 Page 234 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module The Calculate panel is divided into three sections On the top is the Calculation Interval input section In the middle are the Calculation Results At the bottom is the Data Quality section Immediately to the right of the Calculate button is a Save Calculated Graph Data button If the user checks this box before hitting the Calculate button then all of the raw data used in the graphs is exported as a text file into the Thermal Conductivi
390. ter details about the geothermal cooling system s Equivalent Full Load Hours The user can enter the equivalent full load hours here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Peak Capacity The user can enter the peak capacity note that this is the peak load covered by the equipment and not the installed equipment capacity here if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Average Heat Pump Efficiency Here the user enters the expected EER for the cooling side of the system if the user has not imported the data automatically from a heat exchanger project design Note that if the user has imported the data from a vertical heat exchanger project that has monthly data calculated Page 216 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module see chapter 4 then the imported EER is the average EER over the system lifetime and not the peak conditions EER Generally using the monthly data provides for a higher EER and lower costs since average fluid temperatures tend to be less extreme than the fluid temperatures during peak load conditions Circulation Pump Input Power Pump Power and Motor Efficiency The circulation pump input power automatically is calculated from the pump power and motor efficiency These values can be imported from a heat exchanger design project or manually entered Additional Power The user can enter power
391. the zon file associated with the project report is also listed on the report Two different project reports are available concise and detailed The concise form includes all of the design parameters but omits some of the project information and comments The detailed version includes the project information and comments More information on reports can be found in Chapter 7 References Francis E Editor Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 3 Edition Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute p 186 Prentice Hall New Jersey 1997 Incropera F and Dewitt D Introduction to Heat Transfer 2 Edition p 456 p 98 John Wiley and Sons New York 1990 Paul N The Effect of Grout Thermal Conductivity on Vertical Geothermal Heat Exchanger Design and Performance Page 159 CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module V gt CHAPTER 6 The Surface Water Design Module This chapter describes the features and operation of the Surface Water Design module This module is for the design of systems that use bodies of water including ponds rivers lakes oceans etc Itis one of the four design modules included with GLD Overview As with the Borehole and Horizontal Design modules the calculations made in the Surface Water Design module involve the combination of a large number of input parameters Care must be taken to assure that proper values are verified before use Assuming that reasonable values are provided to the
392. thermal tabbed panel and transferred automatically into the conventional panel This is to ensure that the comparison between the geothermal system and the conventional systems is based off of an equal number of full load hours Cooling In this column the user can enter details about the alternate cooling system s Equivalent Full Load Hours These values are transferred from the Geothermal panel and cannot be changed by the user If the user wishes to change these values he or she must make the changes from the Geothermal tabbed panel Equipment Type The user can select from among three cooling systems air cooled chillers water cooled chillers and unitary air conditioners Please note that since these systems have different efficiency rating systems the efficiency units change depending on the system selected Power Source Users can select from among electricity natural gas and propane Installed Capacity Here users can enter the cooling system installed capacity Note that in general the installed capacity for conventional systems exceeds the peak capacity of geothermal systems This is because conventional mechanical equipment is usually significantly oversized compared to the equipment in a well designed geothermal system Page 210 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Efficiency Here users enter the expected overall system efficiency for the selected cooling equipment Note that the measurement uni
393. tiation delay For example if the designer anticipates that 5 years from now the CO2 emissions from the HVAC system will be taxed the designer can enter 5 into this box When the program performs the Lifetime NPV costs of the system it will begin including CO emissions costs starting at year five The effective initiation delay enables designers to maximize the accuracy of the program s calculations Average Building Costs When a designer is considering the financial costs of one HVAC system versus another it is important to remember and include overall building costs A well designed decentralized geothermal system may have no need for a mechanical room while a central chiller boiler plant may require a thousand or more square feet of space This additional space costs money to construct In addition the space used for a central plant has an opportunity cost its lost rental or lease value For these reasons the GSA module enables designers to ascertain a the building construction cost reductions if any and b the revenue generated from the additional available square footage if any of a geothermal system compared to a more traditional HVAC solution The total structure floor space enables designers to enter the total square footage floor space of the to be conditioned space Please be sure not to enter the square footage of any unconditioned floor space The average building construction cost enables designers to enter t
394. tion The panel names and many of the panel input parameters differ from those of the Borehole Design module A more complete description about how to enter data and perform calculations in the Surface Water Design module is provided in Chapter 6 Theoretical Basis To determine the length of pipe necessary for different surface water systems experiments were conducted for different size pipes in coiled and slinky configurations for both heating and cooling modes Kavanaugh 1997 GLD uses a polynomial fit of this experimental data to determine the amount of pipe necessary for different loading conditions Additionally coefficients are used to take into account the effect of the heat transfer in the lengths of the header and the branch piping that are in both the water and the soil between the installation and the submerged circuits The program combines all factors so that the loop system provides the source inlet temperature at the heat pump requested by the designer Because the circuit layout is of primary importance to the designer concerned with pumping losses the head loss estimation feature for different piping configurations is included in the Surface Water Design module Users can quickly explore different layouts to determine the optimum design in terms of both heat transfer and circulation pump energy losses A description of some of the calculations and the input data can be found in Chapter 7 of the book Ground Source
395. tion BB are in parallel as they both come out of supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 and supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB are vertically stacked are siblings and share the parent supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Can you find the serial flow paths in figure 11 44 Remember serial flow paths are stacked with indentation The following paths are in series e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Page 302 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module e Supply pipe A of the GHX Module Supply Return Runout AA supply pipe B of the GHX Header Section BB Circuit 3 Circuit 4 BASIC REVERSE RETURN LOOPFIELD LAYOUT 1 Reverse return systems and how they are modeled in the CFD Module were introduced before Key features are presented again here as a review Reverse return systems in the CFD Module have some special features and requirements which are described below Reverse return systems must include at least two reverse return pipe pairs and three GHX Circuit in one nested family of components Reverse return GHX Module systems do not follow the standard layout formalism that was presented for direct return systems Recall that with direct return systems when the GHX Circuit returns to its piping GHX Header section it returns to its parent piping GHX Header section that is one level above it and left
396. tional Fluid Dynamics CFD Module combination of results is useful for looking quickly at the overall piping structure of the GHX Module headering system Group Name Pipe Pair Circuit Pipe 1 Pipe 2 Size Length Flow Rate Velocity Reynold s Number Volume Pressure Drop Fig 11 84 Desired Results to View Have Been Selected Layout Design and Optimization Calculate B 4 GHX Module Supply Return Pipe 200 0 ft 200 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 01 36 GHX Header Section 01 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 02 GHX Header Section 02 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 03 28 GHX Header Section 03 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 04 8 2C GHX Header Section 04 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 05 GHX Header Section 05 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 06 GHX Header Section 06 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 07 E 6 GHX Header Section 07 20 0 ft 20 0 ft 2 2 U Circuit 08 Fig 11 85 Selected Results Are Now Visible in the Layout Manager Workspace For another example if a user selects categories of information as can be seen in figure 11 86 then results will appear as they do in figure 11 87 Viewing this combination of results is useful for looking quickly at circuit flow characteristics and ensuring turbulent flow throughou
397. tions in length could impact flow balancing However even physically imbalanced systems can be flow balanced using the automatic and manual controls in the CFD Module The Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder The Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder is a powerful tool for very large commercial systems that require nested tiers of Manifolds and or field Vaults The highest level Manifold or Vault is defined as an Ultra Manifold or Ultra Vault Coming into an Ultra Manifold or Ultra Vault from the child side are supply return runouts from two or more Manifolds or Vaults Coming out of the Ultra Manifold or Ultra Vault and heading in the parent direction are a supply return runout pair Systems of this size are quite rare but the CFD module is flexible enough to handle them The Ultra Manifold Ultra Vault Builder can be accessed from within the Layout Manager Workspace in the Layout Panel The user can right click the mouse while inside the Layout Manager Workspace to see the menu in figure 11 79 appear Page 331 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Layout Fluid Automation Circulation Pumps Layout Design and Optimization Calculate E Peak Load Alphabetic Categorized Add New Pipe Pair Add Reverse Return Pipe Pair Add New Circuit Add New Ultra Manifold Add New Manifold Add New GHX Module Pipe and Fitting Manager Copy Selection Paste Selection Delete Fig 11 79 Accessing t
398. to the appropriate group by just extending the naming sequence already being used For example the name PipeTable4 html could be used as the name for a new file Adding a Picture Graph or Figure If an image is stored as either jpg or gif it can be imported into an HTML page The HTML page can be linked directly to the GLD reference files As an example let s assume that an engineer scans an image of his favorite density vs percent solute graph for Calcium Chloride and saves it in the Help Files directory as a jpeg image called CaCl2Density jpg A very simple HTML file can be created with a text editor and called FluidTable6 html The entire FluidTable6 html file would be as follows lt html gt lt head gt lt head gt lt body gt lt img SRC CaCl2Density jpg gt lt body gt lt html gt FluidTable6 html Remember the FluidTables html file would have to be edited to include the new link to the FluidTable6 html file similar to the example given in Editing Existing Files above If everything is done properly when Fluid Properties is selected from the Tables menu in the Design Studio Table 6 will appear as a link in the Page 188 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files list of available tables By clicking on the link the CaCl2 density image CaCl2Density jpg will appear and can be used as a convenient internal reference Taking Care with Updates Updated versions of
399. tomizable element of the geothermal Design Studio that the user has the option to control Page 183 CHAPTER 8 Tables and Reference Files Tables Included with Ground Loop Design Several tables are included with GLD They are separated into several broad categories from which most questions will arise These include Fluid Properties Soil Properties Pipe Properties Conversions The first three sections present a menu screen with hyper links to various tables that have been included in the package The fourth section consists of a pair of metric to English units conversion tables that answer most common engineering conversion problems Below is a description of the included files Fluid Properties Fluid properties refer to any data related to the circulation fluid The five Fluid Properties tables in GLD are the following Table 1 Densities and Specific Heats of Various Solutions Table 2 Minimum Required Flow Rate for Non laminar Flow Tables 3 5 included only in English Units Table 3 Head Loss in SDR 11 HDPE Pipe 20 Propylene Glycol Table 4 Head Loss in SDR 11 HDPE Pipe 20 Methanol Table 5 Head Loss in SDR 11 and 17 HDPE Pipe Pure Water Some of these charts could have also been placed with the Pipe Properties tables but because they vary primarily with solution type they were placed here In an ideal world the Fluid Properties tables would include all of the graphs charts and tables for all of the parameter
400. tons 0 8 years N A 1 399 63 18 108 27 Fig 9 13 Analysis Sub Panel Viewing Graphs On the results tab and to the right of the modeling time period entry box there is a graph button The user can push this button to view results in a colorful graphical format A sample can be seen in figure 9 14 below Page 224 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Graph Data C Lifecycle Var Costs C Lifecycle Fixed Costs C Analysis IV Show Title Y Show Legend Fig 9 14 A Sample GSA Module Graph Printing Reports Financial reports can be printed at any time using the toolbar print button in the GSA module A total of five reports including two finance reports two inputs reports and one financial summary report are available The concise finance report has information related to geothermal financials and energy usage The detailed finance report has information related to geothermal and conventional system financials and energy usage The concise inputs report has a truncated list of all the data inputs used in the financial calculations The detailed inputs report has a full list of the data inputs used in the financial calculations More information on reports can be found in Chapter 7 References Bloomquist R G 2001 The Economics of Geothermal Heat Pump Systems for Commercial and Institutional Buildings Proceedings of the International Course on Geothermal Heat Pumps Bad Urach
401. trl S Save As Ctri A Export File Export IDF Print Ctri P Export Hybrid Data gt Monthly Data Exit Ctrl Q Hourly Data Fig 4 35 How to Export Hybrid Loads Data The final major feature of the LoadSplitter tool is the Summary button which can be seen in figure 4 29 The Summary button becomes active after the user has used one or more sliders and hit the Update button The Summary button generates a summary panel like the one in figure 4 36 B gt Hybrid Summary Borehole Design Project 1 COOLING HEATING Peak Loads Total kBtu hr 100 0 kBtu hr 100 0 Geo kBtu hr 60 0 kBtu hr 85 0 Hybrid kBtu hr 40 0 kBtu hr 15 0 Total Loads Total 478544 0 100 0 370781 9 kBtu 100 0 Geo 438928 6 91 7 369713 5 kBtu 99 7 Hybrid 39615 4 8 3 1068 4 kBtu 0 3 od coe Fig 4 36 The Hybrid LoadSplitter Summary Button The summary panel presents the peak and total loads breakdown for geothermal and hybrid technologies for both heating and cooling In addition from this panel the designer can access the hybrid loads graphs via the graph icon next to the Close button The summary button displays the quantified total loads balance between the geo and hybrid technologies As mentioned earlier the total loads balance is a critical variable for hybrid loopfield design In figure 4 36 above 91 7 of the total cooling load is geo and 8 3 is hybrid Page 130 CHAPT
402. ts panel After all data has been entered or any changes have been made the user can choose to calculate interim or final results using the Calculate button In GLD Premier 2014 the designer can choose one of three calculation methodologies Design Day Monthly or Hourly from the dropdown menu prior to hitting the Calculate button The Calculate button is also Page 109 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module available in the expanded user interface as seen in figure 4 1 The three methodologies are described briefly below and in more detail in Chapter 1 Design Day This calculation methodology works with loads from both the Zone Manager Loads module and the Average Block Loads module The calculation performed is based on the cylindrical source heat transfer theory as described in Chapter 1 The Design Day model works in both fixed temperature and fixed length mode described above Monthly This calculation methodology works with loads from the Average Block Loads module if the designer has imported monthly loads data The calculation performed is based on an advanced heat transfer theory Incorporating a dimensionless g function this methodology calculates the evolution of the borehole wall and fluid temperatures over time The monthly model works only in fixed length mode Hourly This calculation methodology works with loads from the Average Block Loads module if the designer has imported hours loads data The calcul
403. ts vary depending on the selected system i e kW ton for water cooled chillers and EER for unitary air conditioners Extra Power Here users enter extra power requirements for the system such as circulation pumps etc Installation Area In this section users enter the floor space square footage required by the selected cooling equipment For example if a water cooled chiller is selected and it requires 1000 ft of mechanical room space the user can enter 1000 ft here Water Usage Rate If the selected cooling equipment consumes water the user can enter the water usage rate here Heating In this column the user can enter details regarding the alternate heating system s Equivalent Full Load Hours These values are transferred from the Geothermal panel and cannot be changed by the user If the user wishes to change these values he or she must do so from the Geothermal tabbed panel Equipment Type The user can select among four heating systems boilers furnaces air source heat pumps and gas fired heat pumps Please note that since these systems have different efficiency rating systems the efficiency units change depending on the system selected Page 211 CHAPTER 09 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module Power Source Users can select from among electricity fuel oil natural gas propane wood coal or biomass biomass excluding wood Installed Capacity Here users can enter the heating system install
404. ty Thermal Conductivity Report Data Files folder The designer can import these data into Excel to create his or her own graphs if so desired Project None gt S 2 Import Data File American_Swedish_Institute_ 2 csv Flow Diffusivity Information Calculate I Save Calculated Graph Data Calculation Interval Start 12 0 hr End 42 0 hr Thermal Conductivity 1 60 Btu h ft F Slope 2 95 Average Heat Flux 17 4 W ft Average Power 5216 2 Watts BH Thermal Resist BTR 0 31 h ft F Btu Thermal Diffusivity 2 ft 2 day Average Flow Rate gpm Data ey Threshold x Power Standard Deviation Power Variation Vv Temperature X Flow Rate Vv Slope Stability x Water Flow Test Fig 10 6 Results Tabbed Panel Page 235 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Thermal Conductivity Graph fo e is CERA Graph Data Hourly Data T T M Temp vs Time I Temp vs In Time I Power vs Time ye o I Flow Rate vs Time M Show Title ann V Show Legend Temp Fit V Show Fit E v 5 E 20 o a 5 j 1 fi 20 30 Time Hours Fig 10 7 Graphing Module Results Calculation Interval The calculation interval is a key factor in the data analysis Typically conductivity tests are run for approximately 48 72 hours and the 12 to 40 hour data range are used in calculations In this section the user can input their desired interval range prior to calculating or reca
405. ty testing and data analysis to third parties In the second they have conducted tests on rented equipment and then sent the data to third parties for analysis These modalities are costly and time consuming In addition these modalities limit the control designers have over the test and the analysis As this industry continues to grow more and more companies desire to have in house testing and analysis capabilities In light of Page 227 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module this evolving situation GLD now includes a comprehensive Thermal Conductivity analysis module The Ground Loop Design Thermal Conductivity module allows designers to import conductivity test data in CSV format collected by a thermal conductivity test unit data logger Users can then quickly input the borehole depth and calculation interval hours 12 to 40 for example and then calculate the thermal conductivity and estimated diffusivity The module includes a suite of automated data analysis tools that assess the raw conductivity data quality The module also enables designers to optimize the modeling period via an auto graphing overlay function A professional report output is included as well With the Thermal Conductivity module conductivity analysis is accurate easy and nearly instantaneous The Thermal Conductivity module in GLD Premier 2014 now provides Borehole Thermal Resistance BTR results from in situ test data and offers an enhanced graph visuali
406. uild Add Group 2 Hollow Square L U x Y Offset ft 15 0 15 0 Pitch Number ft Columns X 7 15 0 Rows Y 7 15 0 Include I Top Y Left F Right M Bottom Fig 4 14 An auto built double half hollow square with 15 ft offset Page 98 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module After creating and saving a grid file the user can export it to the Borehole module for simulation and analysis 2 Export When the user hits the Export button while the vertical borehole module is open a window will open up asking the user to choose to which vertical borehole module he or she wishes to export the gridfile After the user selects a borehole module the gridfile will be transferred into the borehole module as can be seen below in figure 4 15 Vertical Grid Arrangement Borehole Number 26 Grid Builder MV Use External File Select Clear Show Filename doubleL txt Fig 4 15 Selecting an External Grid File The file name will appear directly below the checkbox In this case the filename is doubleL txt The user also has the option of selecting a pre existing grid file using the Select button which can also be seen in figure 4 14 above When a valid grid file has been selected the number of boreholes in the file is displayed and the standard rows across rows down and borehole separation text boxes become inactive If GLD is unable to read the grid file for example if the formatt
407. ul to account for pipe placement grout conductivity and borehole size Paul 1997 Additionally the software calculates the amount of energy absorbed by or withdrawn from the ground using the load information collected from the individual zones and their relationship to the equipment selected The calculations find the conditions for long term steady state operation of borehole fields based on the desired heat pump inlet temperatures In order to provide an optimum design and prevent system failure the combination of parameters must allow for proper extraction or dissipation of energy from or to the earth at the location of interest For the first model the most complete description of the calculations and input data can be found in Chapter 3 of the book Ground Source Heat Pumps Design of Geothermal Systems for Commercial and Institutional Buildings by S P Kavanaugh and K Rafferty 1997 In extensive tests this model consistently proved to be the most accurate when compared with calibrated data from actual installations Hughes and Shonder 1998 The second model within the Borehole Design module is based on the solution to the purely heat conductive problem in a homogenous medium which was solved by approximating the borehole as a finite line sink Eskilson 1987 The steady state solution relates to the case where heat is Page 28 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview extracted continuously from the borehole without eve
408. ulations These reports are design records and are valuable when communicating the design to others involved in the projects Project Reports Every design module has associated project reports which can be printed at any time from the Design Studio desktop The project report contains all the project information and includes the parameters chosen the calculation results and the name of the zone file used Both concise and detailed versions of the report are available Monthly and Hourly Inlet Temperature Reports Monthly and hourly inlet temperature reports can be printed from the Design Studio desktop after calculating inlet temperatures in the borehole design module The reports contain heat transfer power borehole temperature Tf average fluid temperature exiting water temperature entering water temperature minimum entering water temperature and maximum entering water temperature for each month or hour of the design The four reports include a concise temperature report a detailed temperature report a report that offers all project parameters loads data and temperature data and a report that offers project parameters and loads data Page 34 CHAPTER 1 Ground Loop Design Overview Zone Reports A print button in the loads modules allows the designer to print the loads related information in various formats Because the zones contain information about the zones the loads and the equipment it is often necessary to ob
409. umps in the list press the Clear button FRenumber If several pumps are added or removed from the list click the Renumber button to reorganize the pumps This button renumbers Page 248 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module the existing pumps from one starting with the first pump in the current list Figure 11 4 shows a system with three pumps added along with the total circulation pump power requirements listed at the top Bl Summary View Toggle Button With the Summary View toggle button the user can at any time simultaneously review all of the circulation pumps A sample Summary panel is shown in figure 11 4A Circulation Pump Information Total Circulation Pump Power kW 7 9 Total Number of Circulation Pumps 3 On Oe Bs E Total Circulation Pump Power Pump Name Pump 1 Linked Element Supply Return Runout Required Pressure Drop ft hd 6 8 Required Flow Rate gpm Required Input Power kW Pump Power hP Pump Motor Efficiency Fig 11 4 A Circulation Pump System Page 249 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Circulation Pump Information Total Circulation Pump Power kW 6 8 Total Number of Circulation Pumps 3 9 0 a 17 0 15 0 Fig 11 4A Summary View of Circulation Pumps Circulation Pump Details This section stores information related to each individual circulation pump Pump Name In this section the designer specifi
410. units users can obtain different reports and data lists depending on the state of the Design Studio Presentation and comparison of project information between different engineers and designers is now a straightforward process Internationalization Because GLD is multi language capable users easily can communicate accurate results and design parameters across borders even when the designers are not proficient in the technical language of their foreign counterparts Currently Bulgarian Chinese Czech French German Greek Italian Japanese Korean Lithuanian Romanian Russian and Spanish versions are available Figure 1 1 is a screenshot from the Korean version metric SERES BA ppa 3 SA AZ Sor SHA SA ASA RAZ StAlZr 5 0 BAI 12Al 12Al 16AI _BE 16Al 20l nana 204 BAI SAH St SIAIZE 1050 BM ERAN SEE SA BESE BEE 2E Se kw 54 kw COP 23 L min DES SEE 11 4 L min 3 5kw 8D SS EM Figure 1 1 Korean Version of GLD Heat Pump and Zone Loads Modules Introduction The underlying framework of GLD is based on three modules that permit flexibility in the addition and modification of components related to geothermal designs The first is the heat pump module which takes a representative amount of data from the heat pump specifications and then uses it for the automatic pump selection features The second and third are the average block and zone loads Page 22
411. ure content Typical values of thermal conductivity and diffusivity for sand clay and different types of rocks can be found in the Soil Properties tables However it is recommended that designers perform soil tests to Page 145 CHAPTER 5 The Horizontal Design Module obtain these values The thermal conductivity in particular has a large effect on the calculated bore length and should be determined with care through in situ tests or comparison with other projects installed in the local vicinity GLD does not encourage the use of ex situ data Diffusivity Calculator For the designer s assistance GLD includes a Diffusivity Calculator that can be used to determine the actual diffusivity if all pertinent soil parameters including the thermal conductivity the dry specific heat and density and the moisture level in the soil are known EX Diffusivity Calculator ol x Thermal Diffusivity Calculator Thermal Diffusivity ft 2 day Thermal Conductivity 1 30 Btuf h deg F Soil Rock Specific Heat Dry 0 230 Btuf deg F lbm Soil Rock Density Dry 120 0 lbifto3 Moisture 0 20 200 Close Fig 5 11 Diffusivity Calculator Ground Temperature Corrections at Given Depth In a horizontal configuration the ground temperature around buried pipes can vary significantly simply due to the proximity to the surface To account for this variation at different depths the regional
412. urs Fig 10 8 Raw Test Data Temp vs LN Time Hourly Data Temperature F 10 Time Hours Fig 10 9 Raw and Modeled Data Temp vs LN Time Page 239 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Printing Reports The Thermal Conductivity report can be printed at any time using the toolbar print button in the conductivity module More information on reports can be found in Chapter 7 Page 240 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module V gt CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module This chapter describes how to use the new Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD module a module that answers the sometimes difficult question How should I set up my geothermal piping systems so that they maximize performance minimize operational costs and are easily purged of air after installation and before start up Overview Piping optimization is an essential and oftentimes overlooked component in competent geothermal loop design When designed correctly a piping system will be easy to purge and provide the flow characteristics essential for efficient heat transfer all while minimizing pumping and operational costs Up until now piping optimization has been a time consuming difficult and iterative process The present state of the art for geothermal piping design is based on homegrown spreadsheets rule of thumb estimates and piping specification sheets Indeed a mid sized c
413. urs can be calculated for the entire installation using the Equivalent Hours Calculator The second difference is that the loads data entry method has been expanded to accept monthly and or hourly loads data Monthly and hourly loads data are Page 67 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones necessary for calculating monthly and hourly inlet temperatures and monthly and hourly heat pump performance respectively in the borehole design module Note that adding monthly and or hourly loads is necessary only if a designer wishes to calculate monthly and or hourly inlet temperatures for a vertical borehole heat exchanger Monthly Loads To access the monthly loads data input panel as seen in figure 3 13 click on the Monthly Loads button Monthly Load Data z Updat Cooling das Heating E Total Peak Total Peak Cancel ketu 21 ketu hr 2 ketu 0 kBtu hr 0 0 January 0 February 0 March 0 April 0 May June July August September October November December Total 3 0 3 0 E Hours at Peak Hours at Peak ol o S S S S 9 9 9 Fig 3 13 Monthly Loads Input Boxes There are three ways to enter the loads data Manually enter the total and peak cooling and heating loads in the appropriate boxes Copy and paste from Excel using the Excel icon button See later in this chapter for how to format the Excel file Note that since GLD Version 5 from 2008 the formatting has changed
414. ust first input the loopfield design into the input boxes and then must hit the Create button that can be seen in figure 4 5 Doing so will create a grid file The user can then export a scr file following the above bullet point instructions Note that if the user is using the standard input boxes for loopfield design he or she should be sure to deselect use external file after completing the export to AutoCAD process Page 100 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Boreholes per Parallel Loop The number of boreholes per parallel loop refers to the piping arrangement within the borehole pattern The calculation will give slightly different bore lengths depending on whether one two or more boreholes are included in one parallel circuit Remember that pumping costs will increase as the pipe lengths per parallel circuit become longer Pressure drop impacts can be fully explored in the new CFD module Fixed Length Mode By selecting fixed length mode the designer can specify the loop field length number of boreholes x length per borehole and have GLD calculate the entering water temperatures When in fixed length mode it is important to note that both cooling and heating lengths are identical unlike in the fixed temperature mode where designers specify temperatures and calculate lengths The expanded user interface displays the design mode fixed temperature or fixed length as well as adjustable parameters associated wit
415. ust the borehole length to a desired value is to change the borehole number or pattern on the Pattern panel The second subsection presents the predicted long term ground temperature change with respect to the average ground temperature of the installation When calculating Hourly Data results the average ground temperature change always will be reported as N A This is because the updated theory in GLD Premier 2014 used for these calculations is not directly amenable to such soil temperature calculations Designers that need to estimate the soil temperature change can do so using the Design Day calculation described above Y Borehole Design Project BoreholeSample flor Results Fluid Soil U Tube Pattern Extra kw Information Calculate Hourly y COOLING HEATING Total Length ft 16020 0 16020 0 Borehole Number 60 60 Borehole Length ft 267 0 267 0 Ground Temperature Change F N A N A Peak Unit Inlet F 80 5 53 5 Peak Unit Outlet F 89 1 48 4 Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr 755 9 810 7 Peak Load kBtu Hr 755 9 810 7 Peak Demand kW 45 8 46 9 Heat Pump EER COP 16 4 5 0 Seasonal Heat Pump EER COP 17 3 4 4 Avg Annual Power kWh 2 77E 4 2 47E 4 System Flow Rate gpm 189 0 202 7 Optional Hybrid System Off Cooling Heating Update Peaks 0 A 0 Reset Totals 0 oo 0 Fig 4 24 Results Panel Contents Fixed Length Hourly Data Results Page 120 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Modu
416. vanaugh S P and Rafferty K Ground Source Heat Pumps Design of Geothermal Systems for Commercial and Institutional Buildings ASHRAE 1997 Parker J D Bose J E and McQuiston F C ASHRAE Design Data Manual for Ground Coupled Heat Pumps ASHRAE Research Project RP 366 1985 Paul N The Effect of Grout Thermal Conductivity on Vertical Geothermal Heat Exchanger Design and Performance M S Thesis South Dakota State University 1996 V Page 37 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps To effectively use any of the design modules included with GLD it is important to understand how the system models heat pump data For the purpose of adding new or editing existing heat pumps to GLD s Heat Pump Database the Add Edit Heat Pumps Module is included as a separate module in the Design Studio This chapter describes the theory of the module and gives an example of how to enter heat pump data A more detailed example can be found online and accessed through the Help menu web resources option Heat Pump Model Description For convenience the Loads modules in GLD predict how heat pump characteristics will vary with changes in the input design parameters If the designer changes the inlet source or load temperatures or the system flow rate the capacity and power data of the units may also change The easiest and most accurate way of realizing these changes is to employ an internal model
417. verage calculated from the application of short term heating loads and maximum a variation from the average calculated from the application of short term peak cooling loads entering water temperatures The designer can also add a title and legend to the graph More than one graph can be open at the same time enabling designers to quickly compare different designs Saved graphs can be found in the GLD Graph Images folder Note that since the hour is the shortest modeling time frame and the program outputs results on an hourly time scale the average max and min EWT values are identical A dated hourly data text file containing the temperature data is generated and stored in the Hourly Data folder each time the Calculate button is pressed If necessary data from this file can be imported into Excel The Design Compare Button The design compare button also known as the Design Dashboard enables a user to quickly and simultaneously compare the results from a Design Day a Monthly and possibly an Hourly simulation The button only appears after the user has selected the Monthly or Hourly design method Figure 4 28 is a sample screen shot from a design that shows results from both the Design Day and Monthly simulation El Design Method Results Comparison Total Length ft Borehole Number Borehole Length ft Ground Temperature Change F Peak Unit Inlet F Peak Unit Outlet F Total Unit Capacity kBtu Hr Peak Lo
418. via the Manifold Supply Return Runouts Section Outlet Number Here the user enters the number of outlets there are in the Ultra Manifold Vault that connect to child Manifolds Vaults via the Manifold Supply Return Runout s Section Outlet Separation Here the user enters the distance separating the section outlets in the Ultra Manifold Section Outlet Pipe Size Here the user enters the outlet size connecting to the Supply Return Runouts of the child Manifolds Vaults Supply Return Runout Information The Ultra Manifold Supply Return Runout information refers to the pipe pair that is the parent of the Ultra Manifold Vault For example in an in building Ultra Manifold system the Supply Return Runout information would likely pertain to the pipe pair to from the circulation pumps and to from the Ultra Manifold One Way Length Here the user enters the one way length of the supply pipe The return pipe will default to the same length Page 258 CHAPTER 11 The Computational Fluid Dynamics CFD Module Supply Pipe Size Here the user enters the supply pipe size The return pipe will default to the same size Pipe Sizes Details related to the pipe sizes available for auto building and auto optimization of piping systems can be seen and selected in the Pipe Sizes tabbed panel in figure 11 10 Manifold and GHX Module Automation Presets GHX Module Manifold Ultra Manifold 3 List of Available Pipe Sizes 3 1
419. were those used for the inlet source data on the Cooling and Heating tabbed panels described previously Occasionally manufacturers will provide capacity values at the standard temperature with a table of correction factors that can be entered into the GLD Load Temperatures panel directly Page 45 CHAPTER 2 Adding Editing Heat Pumps Notice how in figure 2 5 five points of data are included for cooling but only three are included for heating The software requires a minimum of three data points for its coefficient calculation More data may be input if desired However no boxes may be left blank Other temperature and coefficient values must be set to zero in this case As a convenience 0 buttons are included to quickly set rows to zero General Cooling Heating Load Temperatures Load Flows Test Temperature Corrections LOAD COOLING HEATING EAT WB Capacity Power EAT DB Capacity Power degF Factor Factor degF Factor Factor 0 000000 Calculate Coefficients Fig 2 5 Heat Pump Load Temperatures Panel Note If correction factors are unknown or unnecessary they can all be left at the constant value of 1 0 which is the initial condition that exists when a new pump is first added Load Flows Panel Similar to the Load Temperatures panel the Load Flows panel allows the user to enter corrections for variation in load side flow rates The system used here is different however Every pump
420. whether or not certain aspects of the data meet user defined thresholds These analyses are useful for determining the overall reliability of the conductivity test data A green check indicates that the entire data set remains within the threshold range A red x indicates that at least one data point extends beyond the threshold range Details for each test are described below Power Standard Deviation The power standard deviation test checks the standard deviation of all points compared to the average value and sees if the deviation falls within the user defined acceptable range The default value is 1 5 Power Variation The power variation test checks to see if any point goes over a predefined limit which is a percentage of the average value The default is 10 Temperature The temperature test checks to see if the temperature decreases from its maximum measured value to a point below a defined threshold for more than 1 of the entire range It assumes that the temperature should not decrease with constant heat input The default is 5 Flow Rate The flow rate test checks the standard deviation of the flow rate If the standard deviation exceeds the threshold as a percentage of the average it fails The default is 5 Page 237 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Slope Stability The slope stability test divides the total range of interest into 5 sections and then calculates the slope for
421. which are discussed in more detail below LY New and Copy A new zone may be created at any time from the Loads panel by clicking the New button Identical zones may be created from any existing zone by bringing up that zone s data window and clicking the Copy button Page 54 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones Y 5 Remove and Clear Zones also can be deleted from the list Any zone can be removed from the list by bringing up the zone s data window and pressing the Remove button To delete all of the zones in the list press the Clear button lige Renumber If several zones are added or removed from the list click the Renumber button to reorganize the zones This button renumbers the existing zones from one starting with the first zone in the current list Al Summary View Toggle Button With the Summary View toggle button the user can at any time simultaneously look at the group of zones This view provides lists of the heat pump data in both cooling and heating modes as well as collective information about the set of chosen pumps This information includes the peak loads and when they occur and the total combined capacity the peak demand and the average efficiency of the selected equipment Although individual pumps cannot be added or removed in the Summary View changes made across the entire pump selection are directly observable A sample Summary panel is shown in figure 3 3 Note that more than one type of pump series is listed
422. window or by Page 81 CHAPTER 3 Loads and Zones hitting the Modify button the user can open the file in the Equivalent Hours Calculator where the data can be edited as well The user can transfer the modified data into the Average Block Loads module by pressing the Transfer button When both the Calculator and the Import Loads windows are open the program first will ask the user from which window the Calculator or the Import Loads window he or she wishes to transfer data The program then prompts the user to decide to which loads heating or cooling the data should be transferred The second way to import the loads data is to save the Excel file as a csv file into the Loads Files Monthly Data Files folder To import this csv file the user can choose the zone of interest and then click on the Import button at the top of the Zone Manager loads module It looks like this a Navigate to the csv file of interest and import it into GLD When Imported Data is Not Detailed Enough How the Program Modifies External Loads Files In the case of a loads program that generates only total monthly loads and peak monthly demand nothing is known about the daily hour by hour transfer of heat to or from the installation This information is important in the Borehole and Horizontal Design modules because the hourly data ultimately determines the contributions to the daily and monthly pulses of heat to the ground GLD performs ca
423. xample many units do not record pressure In such a case make sure that the CSV file has the column title and then just populate the data rows with 0 0 To import the CSV file first save it in the following folder Main Drive Program Files GLD2014 ThermalConductivity Thermal Conductivity Data Files Next in the Bore tab enter the borehole length Next click the following import button that is found on the module toolbar Ed Finally select the CSV file of interest Page 230 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module Typical Operation The typical operation of the Thermal Conductivity module would include the following steps e Open a new Thermal Conductivity module Choose metric or English units Enter soil parameters in the Diffusivity Panel 1f desired On the Bore Panel enter the borehole depth Import the in situ data set Review the graphs that appear in the Graphing Module On the Results Panel hit the Calculate button Modify calculation interval if necessary to maximize overlap of raw data and best fit lines in Temp vs LN Time graph e Save and or print the conductivity test report Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels Ground Loop Design s tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Diffusivity Flow Bore and Results panels Diffusivity Information pe
424. y accurately and graphically and then take advantage of this knowledge to engineer an appropriately sized hybrid system While the new LoadSplitter Tool superficially looks very similar to the hybrid sliders in previous editions of GLD its functional performance is significantly more advanced Found on the Results tabs of the borehole design module as can be seen in figure 4 19 the LoadSplitter is intelligent It presents itself to the user in different ways depending on the loads profile being utilized for the design In the case in which 8760 hourly loads data are available the LoadSplitter tool looks like this Page 125 CHAPTER 4 The Borehole Design Module Cooling pts 0 Heating Fig 4 29 LoadSplitter Controls with 8760 Hourly Data With access to 8760 hourly data there is an active peak slider for both cooling and heating When the user moves the slider or both of them the LoadSplitter examines the 8760 loads profile hour by hour and determines what percentage of each hourly load will go to the loopfield and what percentage will go to the hybrid mechanical equipment This process is known as precision peak load shaving At the same time the total sliders automatically adjust based on the user controlled peak slider s to represent the impact the peak sliders have on the total loads The LoadSplitter provides the user with very valuable information about the nature of the relationship between peak a
425. y be saved at any time by clicking the save button on the GSA module toolbar When the user closes the program or module the program automatically asks the user if he or she wants to save the GSA project Typical Operation Although each user will have his or her own unique method the typical operation of the GSA module would include the following steps 1 Open a new GSA module 2 Choose metric or English units 3 If necessary enter modify project specific financial data in the incentives other costs and utility costs tabbed panels Page 194 CHAPTER 9 The Geothermal System Analyzer Module 4 Either link to an open heat exchanger design file or manually enter the geothermal project data 5 In the conventional tabbed panel choose up to 4 conventional systems to compare to the geothermal system 6 In the results tabbed panel hit the calculate button to view the financial analysis 7 Make modifications as necessary 8 Save and or print the GSA project reports Entering Data into the Tabbed Panels Ground Loop Design s innovative tabbed panel system provides for easy organization of and direct access to the relatively large number of design parameters associated with a particular project This section describes the Incentives Other Costs Utility Costs Conventional Geothermal and Results panels Incentives Tax Depreciation and RHI The Incentives tab is divided into three sections Tax Incentives Depreciation Sche
426. yright NOtiCe iicoiooicoriniornrra daa na w aasia aaiae iaaa H ada iaaiiai aiaa 1 Ground Loop Design Premier 2014 User s Guide ccsecsssssssssesssssssessereees 1 Software INfOFMAION ciar aanaeio naiara aawa eanas duo aaraa awa danua duia adnia 1 END USER SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccncnnnnnnnnnos i Conventions Used in This Document cccececcsssecceeceessecseesccnecaeesecnevseceaseecsaecaeseeeaeseeenaeeeeeaeeees 111 CON EN S ivi i 1 PREP ACE A a A A O Ta A O O 12 Before YOU Be lN unanimidad 12 Introduction Typical Uses and Users 0ooococccoconocononononoonnooncnnnconoco nono nconncon nono nonn non non n naar ran rra nnrnnnnn nos 12 System Requirements for Running GLD 2 0 ce cececeseesseeeceescesseeecesecaecaeceaecseecaeecaeeeneeeeeensenereees 13 Hardware Requireimenits ss ccsoccSs cuss sheedleces dida 13 Software Requirements ao lis 13 Operating System Requirement cccesceseessecssecseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseseeneeneenaees 14 Internet Browser Requirements cccsccsceesseeseeesceeseeseeeeeeeeceeeeeerenereneeeneenaees 14 Installation A O let ata AO 14 it Wnstallati On fas ei lei e N 14 Installation of Updated Versions or Re Installation ee cceeceeeseecneeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeereres 14 Program Licensing tii les nate 16 Softwate License Don gle cutis Rs 16 How to Install the Dongle Driver cccceeceesceecceseceeceseceecaeecseeeaeeeeeeeecereeseseneeerenrees 16 After
427. zation module that accelerates the data analysis process General Features To aid in the analysis process the Thermal Conductivity module in Ground Loop Design consists of a set of panels grouped by subject through which the designer can enter and edit the input variables efficiently For example parameters related to the diffusivity estimation are listed on the Diffusivity panel while bore specific information can be viewed on the Bore panel The idea is that everything related to a single conductivity analysis is presented simultaneously and is easily accessible at any time The tabbed panels can be seen in figure 10 1 below In GLD Premier 2014 graphs appear in a separate and flexible module when data are imported into the Thermal Conductivity module Results Bore Flow Diffusivity Information Fig 10 1 Thermal Conductivity Panel List The Thermal Conductivity module includes several additional features Diffusivity estimator based on user defined soil conditions Borehole Thermal Resistance BTR calculated results Flow rate test based on calibrated unit data and or flow sensors Metric and English unit conversions Adjustable calculation intervals for conductivity analysis A range of color graphs in a stand alone module Graph overlays for calculation interval optimization Page 228 CHAPTER 10 The Thermal Conductivity Module e Automatic data quality analysis error checks e Printed report of all input and calculated data

GLD 2014 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents